# Fuze Store — Full Documentation > https://development.fuze-store.com/llms-full.txt > Phone-first point-of-sale for small Philippine businesses. Flat monthly > fee per store, 0% commission on sales, 30-day free trial. Requires an > internet connection (no offline mode). BIR-ready receipts (device > accreditation on the roadmap). --- # Add-ons Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/addons/overview # Add-ons Overview Add-ons are optional features you can add to your Fuze Store subscription. Each add-on unlocks a specific capability for your business, from customer-facing displays to AI-powered analytics. ## How Add-ons Work Add-ons extend your subscription with extra features. You can activate and deactivate them at any time from your account dashboard. Some add-ons are billed per account, while others are billed per store where they are enabled. You can review your active add-ons and their costs from the Add-ons page in your account dashboard. ## How to Activate an Add-on Go to your account dashboard and navigate to the Add-ons page. You will see a list of all available add-ons with their descriptions and pricing. Select the add-on you want to activate. Review the description, pricing, and billing type (per account or per store). Click Activate and confirm when prompted. The add-on is **charged immediately** to your saved payment method, pro-rated for the rest of your current period — it does not wait for your next billing cycle. You need a payment method on file first; if you have none, add one from your Subscription page. Each add-on then renews on its own schedule from its activation date. Per-store add-ons are billed once for each store where you enable them. For per-store add-ons, go to your store's settings and enable the add-on for each store where you want to use it. ## Managing Your Add-ons You can manage your active add-ons at any time from the Add-ons page in your account dashboard. ### Canceling an Add-on To cancel an add-on, click the options menu next to the active add-on and select Cancel. The add-on will remain active until the end of your current billing cycle, then it will be deactivated. ### Reactivating an Add-on If you previously canceled an add-on, you can reactivate it before the billing cycle ends. Click the options menu and select Reactivate. The cancellation will be reversed and the add-on will continue on your next billing cycle. ## Per-Store Add-on Management Some add-ons are billed per store. After activating them on your account, you need to enable them for each store where you want to use the feature. Per-store add-ons are billed separately for each store where they are enabled. Review your store add-on settings regularly to manage costs. To manage per-store add-ons, go to Store Settings and navigate to the Add-ons section. You can enable or disable each add-on per store. ## Available Add-ons Fuze Store offers the following add-ons to enhance your business: - **Customer Facing Display (CFD)** -- Show order details and QR payment codes on a second screen for your customers. - **Kitchen Display System (KDS)** -- Display orders in the kitchen for streamlined preparation and order management. - **Staff Operations** -- Per-operator PIN sessions, manager approvals, terminal pairing, and a full staff activity audit trail on shared POS terminals. - **Loyalty Programs** -- Reward your customers with points-based loyalty programs and tier-based rewards. - **Gift Cards** -- Create, sell, and redeem digital gift cards at your store. - **Roles & Permissions** -- Set up granular access control with custom roles for your staff. - **Waiting List** -- Manage walk-in customer queues with automated notifications. - **Store Sessions** -- Track cash register sessions with opening/closing reconciliation. - **AI Connections** -- Connect AI assistants like Claude to query your store data via natural language. - **Inventory Management** -- Track stock across multiple locations with costing, purchase orders, transfers, stock counts, and low-stock alerts. Billed per store. - **Expense Management** -- Track, categorize, and approve business expenses with full audit trails. Billed per store. - **Text Messaging (SMS)** -- Send transactional SMS to customers, such as order updates and reminders. Usage-based with a prepaid wallet, billed separately from your plan. Billed per store. - **Organization Management** -- Group multiple stores under one organization with centralized member management and billing. Billed per account. While you are on an active free trial, every add-on is included free **except Inventory Management and Organization Management**. Add-ons re-lock automatically when your trial ends, so activate a paid plan or purchase the add-on before then to keep using it. Re-locking only hides the feature — it never deletes your data. Anything you set up during the trial (loyalty points, KDS history, SMS message history, custom roles, and so on) stays safe and comes right back the moment you re-enable the add-on. - [Upgrading Subscription](/docs/account/subscription/upgrading-subscription) - [Adding Payment Method](/docs/account/subscription/adding-payment-method) - [How Subscriptions Work](/docs/other/how-account-subscription-works) --- # How to Change Your Email Address > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/changing-email # How to Change Your Email Address Your email is used for login, password resets, and important notifications. Keep it up to date so you never lose access. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Account Details** from the list. 4. Under Email, tap **Change Email** next to your current address. 5. Enter your new email address. 6. Tap **Save**. You may need to verify the new address through a link sent to your inbox. ## Tips - Use an email you check regularly so you do not miss updates. - A correct email is essential for password resets and account recovery. - You can change your email at any time. --- # Create Your Account > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/create-an-account # Create Your Account To start using Fuze Store POS, you need to create an account. The process takes just a few minutes. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Go to the Register Page** -- Visit [https://fuze-store.com/register](https://fuze-store.com/register). 2. **Fill in Your Details** -- Enter the required information (see the field table below). 3. **Agree to Terms** -- Check the box to accept the terms and conditions. 4. **Submit** -- Click the **Create Account** button. ## Field Descriptions | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Username** | The name others see in the app. | Yes | john.doe | | **First Name** | Your first name. | Yes | John | | **Last Name** | Your last name. | Yes | Doe | | **Email** | Your email address. | Yes | john.doe@example.com | | **New Password** | Choose a secure password. | Yes | \*\*\*\*\*\*\*\*\*\* | | **Confirm Password** | Re-enter your password to verify it. | Yes | \*\*\*\*\*\*\*\*\*\* | ## Tips - Pick a **username** that is unique and easy to remember. - Use a strong password with a mix of letters, numbers, and symbols. - Keep your email address current so you can recover your account if needed. - You can update your account details later from your profile settings. - If you forget your password, use the **Forgot Password?** link on the login page. ## Next Steps - [Create Your Store](/docs/store/creating-a-store) - [Upgrading Your Subscription](/docs/store/creating-a-store) --- # Deleting Your Account > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/deleting-an-account # Deleting Your Account Deleting your account permanently removes all your data. This action cannot be undone. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Account Details** from the list. 4. Scroll to the bottom and tap **Delete Account**. 5. Confirm that you want to proceed. > **30-day grace period:** You can sign back in within 30 days to restore your account. ## Before You Delete - Back up any important data, reports, or records you need to keep. - Cancel your subscription first to stop future charges. - After 30 days, your account and all associated data are permanently removed. --- # Forgot Password > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/forgot-password # Forgot Your Password? If you cannot remember your password, you can reset it in a few steps. ## Steps 1. Go to the Fuze Store POS login page. 2. Tap **Forgot Password?** below the login form. 3. Enter the email address linked to your account. 4. Check your inbox for a password reset link. Look in your spam or junk folder if you do not see it. 5. Open the link and create a new password. 6. Sign in with your new password. ## Tips - Use an email you check regularly so the reset link arrives quickly. - If the email does not appear, double-check the address and try again. - Choose a strong password that mixes letters, numbers, and symbols. - You can reset your password as many times as you need. --- # Linking and Unlinking Social Accounts > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/linking-unlinking-social-accounts # How to Link or Unlink Social Accounts Connecting a social account lets you sign in with Google or Facebook instead of typing your email and password each time. ## To Link a Social Account 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Account Details** from the list. 4. Under the **Social** section, tap **Link** next to the account you want to add. 5. Follow the prompts to sign in and authorize the connection. 6. Your social account is now linked. You can use it to sign in next time. ## To Unlink a Social Account 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Account Details** from the list. 4. Under the **Social** section, tap **Unlink** next to the account you want to remove. 5. Confirm that you want to unlink it. You can still sign in with your email and password. ## Tips - If you sign in with Google or Facebook using the **same email address** as an existing account (only capitalization may differ), the second provider is **linked automatically**—you stay on one account. - You can link more than one social account for convenience. - If you unlink all social accounts, make sure you remember your email and password. - Only link accounts you trust and use regularly. --- # Accepting an Organization Invitation > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/accepting-an-invitation # Accepting an Organization Invitation When someone invites you to their organization, you will receive an email with a link to accept or decline the invitation. ## What the Invitation Includes The invitation email and preview page show: - The **organization name** you are being invited to - Your assigned **role** (Admin, Member, or Billing) - Any **store assignments** if the invite includes store access (combined invite) - Who sent the invitation ## Accepting an Invitation Click the **Accept Invitation** link in the email you received. Review the invitation details on the preview page. If you are not logged in, you will be redirected to log in first. Press **Accept** to join the organization. You must have a Fuze Store account to accept an invitation. If you do not have one yet, create an account first using the same email address the invitation was sent to. ## What Happens When You Accept - You are added as a member of the organization with the assigned role. - If the invitation includes store assignments, you are also added as staff to those stores with the specified roles. - All of this happens in a single step — you do not need to accept each store assignment separately. ## Declining an Invitation If you do not want to join the organization, press **Decline** on the invitation preview page. The invitation will be marked as declined and cannot be used again. ## Expired Invitations Invitations expire after 72 hours. If your invitation has expired: 1. Contact the organization administrator. 2. Ask them to resend the invitation from the organization's member management page. ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Managing Members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) --- # Adding Stores to an Organization > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/adding-stores # Adding Stores to an Organization You can link your stores to an organization to manage them as a group. This gives organization owners and admins automatic access to all linked stores. ## How Store Linking Works Each store has an optional organization field. When you assign a store to an organization: - The store appears in the organization's store list - Organization **owners** and **admins** get full access to the store automatically - The store retains its own staff, roles, and permissions independently - The store's billing migrates to the organization subscription at the next billing cycle A store can belong to at most one organization at a time. You can change or remove the assignment later. ## Adding a Store During Creation You can assign a store to an organization when creating it: Go to **Account** and open **Stores**. Press **New Store** to create a new store. In the **Organization** field, select the organization you want to link to. Complete the remaining store details and press **Save**. ## Linking an Existing Store You can link a store that already exists to an organization from the store details page: Go to **Account** and open **Stores**. Select the store you want to link. On the store details page, find the **Organization** field. Select the organization you want to link the store to. Press **Save** to confirm the change. When you link a store to an organization, the store's billing migrates to the organization subscription at the next billing cycle. The store is no longer billed on your personal subscription. ## Unlinking a Store You can unlink a store from an organization to make it standalone again: Go to **Account** and open **Stores**. Select the store you want to unlink. On the store details page, clear the **Organization** field. Press **Save** to confirm the change. When you unlink a store from an organization, the store's billing returns to your personal subscription at the next billing cycle. Make sure your personal subscription can accommodate the store. For a detailed guide on linking and unlinking, see [Linking & Unlinking Stores](/docs/account/organizations/linking-stores). ## Viewing Organization Stores To see all stores linked to an organization: 1. Go to **Account** > **Organizations**. 2. Select the organization. 3. The **Stores** section shows all linked stores with their name, country, currency, and active status. ## Automatic Access for Owners and Admins Organization owners and admins get automatic full access to all linked stores. They do not need to be added as staff to individual stores. Organization owners and admins do not appear in store staff lists. Their access is resolved automatically through the organization hierarchy. ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Linking & Unlinking Stores](/docs/account/organizations/linking-stores) - [Managing Members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) - [Organization Invoices](/docs/account/organizations/organization-invoices) --- # Creating an Organization > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/creating-an-organization # Creating an Organization Organizations let you group stores and team members under one account. Follow these steps to create one. ## Prerequisites You need the **Organization Management** add-on active on your account. Once active, the Organizations section appears in your account menu. ## Step-by-Step Guide Go to **Account** and open **Organizations**. Press the **+** button or **New Organization**. Enter the organization name and select your country. Optionally set a slug, currency, and timezone. Press **Save** to create the organization. ## Field Descriptions | Field | Required | Description | | ---------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | | Name | Yes | The display name of your organization. | | Country | Yes | ISO country code (e.g., PH, US). Used for timezone hint. | | Slug | No | URL-friendly identifier. Auto-generated from name if empty. | | Currency | No | Default currency for the organization (e.g., PHP, USD). | | Timezone | No | Organization timezone. Defaults to UTC. | When you create an organization, you are automatically assigned as the **Owner**. You get full control over the organization, its stores, members, and billing. When you create an organization, an organization subscription is automatically created. The org subscription inherits your plan but has no base fee — your plan fee stays on your personal subscription. The org subscription is used to consolidate billing for all stores linked to the organization. ## What Happens Next After creating the organization, you can: - [Add stores](/docs/account/organizations/adding-stores) to group them under the organization - [Invite members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) with specific roles - View [consolidated invoices](/docs/account/organizations/organization-invoices) for the organization ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Managing Members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) - [Adding Stores](/docs/account/organizations/adding-stores) --- # Deleting an Organization > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/deleting-an-organization # Deleting an Organization Only the organization **owner** can delete an organization. This action cannot be undone. ## Before You Delete If the organization's **wallet still has credit**, deletion is blocked — you'll be asked to use up the balance first so your prepaid credit isn't lost. Either spend it down or **allocate it to one of your stores** (Organization → Wallet → **Allocate to store**), then delete. ## How to Delete Go to **Account** and open **Organizations**. Select the organization you want to delete. Scroll to the bottom and press **Delete Organization**. Confirm the deletion in the dialog. ## What Happens When You Delete - The organization is permanently removed. - All members lose their organization-level access. - Linked stores are **not** deleted. They continue to operate independently. - Store billing migrates back to your personal subscription at the next billing cycle. - The organization subscription is canceled. - If members were also added as staff to individual stores, that store-level access remains unaffected. Deleting an organization is permanent. Make sure you no longer need the organization before proceeding. ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Managing Members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) --- # Linking and Unlinking Stores > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/linking-stores # Linking and Unlinking Stores You can link existing stores to an organization from the store details page. You can also unlink a store to make it standalone again. Both actions affect how the store is billed. ## Linking a Store to an Organization To link an existing store to an organization: Go to **Account** and open **Stores**. Select the store you want to link. On the store details page, find the **Organization** field. Select the organization you want to link the store to. Press **Save** to confirm the change. A store can belong to at most one organization at a time. If the store is already linked to another organization, you must unlink it first. ## What Happens When You Link a Store - The store appears in the organization's store list. - Organization **owners** and **admins** get automatic full access to the store immediately. - The store's billing migrates to the organization subscription at the next billing cycle. - The store retains its own staff, roles, and permissions independently. Billing does not move immediately. The store continues on its current billing until the next billing cycle, at which point it transitions to the organization subscription. ## Unlinking a Store from an Organization To unlink a store and make it standalone: Go to **Account** and open **Stores**. Select the store you want to unlink. On the store details page, clear the **Organization** field. Press **Save** to confirm the change. ## What Happens When You Unlink a Store - The store is removed from the organization's store list. - Organization owners and admins lose their automatic access to the store. - The store's billing returns to your personal subscription at the next billing cycle. - Any staff that were manually added to the store remain unaffected. When you unlink a store, its billing migrates back to your personal subscription at the next billing cycle. Make sure your personal subscription can accommodate the additional store. ## Automatic Access for Owners and Admins When a store is linked to an organization, the organization owner and admins get automatic full access to it. They do not need to be added as staff to the store. This access is revoked immediately when the store is unlinked. Organization owners and admins do not appear in store staff lists. Their access is resolved automatically through the organization hierarchy. ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Adding Stores](/docs/account/organizations/adding-stores) - [Organization Invoices](/docs/account/organizations/organization-invoices) - [Deleting an Organization](/docs/account/organizations/deleting-an-organization) --- # Managing Organization Members > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/managing-members # Managing Organization Members You can invite team members to your organization and assign them roles that control their level of access across your stores. ## Inviting a Member Go to **Account** and open **Organizations**. Select the organization you want to manage. Press **Invite Member**. Enter the member's email address and select their role. Press **Send Invite**. The invited person receives an email with a link to accept the invitation. If they don't have a Fuze Store account yet, they can create one with the same email address and then accept. Invitations expire after 72 hours, and the invitee only joins once they accept — until then they appear under **Pending Invitations**. ### Combined Invite (Store Access) When inviting a member, you can optionally assign them to specific stores at the same time. Select stores and roles in the **Store Access** section of the invite form. When the invitee accepts, they are added to both the organization and the selected stores in a single step. ### Pending Invitations You can view pending invitations on the organization detail page. From there you can: - **Resend** an invitation (generates a new link and extends the expiry) - **Cancel** an invitation (removes it permanently) ## Member Role Reference | Role | Store Access | Billing Access | Manage Members | | ----------- | --------------------- | ---------------- | -------------- | | **Owner** | All stores (full) | Yes (view + pay) | Yes | | **Admin** | All stores (full) | View only | Yes | | **Member** | Manual per-store only | No | No | | **Billing** | Manual per-store only | Yes (view + pay) | No | Owners and admins automatically access all stores under the organization. They are not listed in any store's staff list, but they can perform any action on any store. This cannot be restricted. ## Updating a Member's Role 1. Open the organization and go to the **Members** tab. 2. Find the member you want to update. 3. Press **Change Role** and select the new role. 4. Confirm the change. It takes effect immediately. Only owners can assign the **Admin** or **Owner** role. Admins can assign **Member** or **Billing** roles. You cannot change your own role. ## Removing a Member 1. Open the organization and go to the **Members** tab. 2. Find the member you want to remove. 3. Press the **Remove** button next to their name. 4. Confirm the removal. Removing a member revokes their organization-level access. If they were also manually added as staff to individual stores, that store-level access remains unaffected. The organization owner cannot be removed. If you need to transfer ownership, promote another member to owner first. ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Accepting an Invitation](/docs/account/organizations/accepting-an-invitation) - [Add-ons Overview](/docs/account/addons/overview) --- # Organization Invoices > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/organization-invoices # Organization Invoices Organization invoices are consolidated billing records for the entire organization. They are separate from individual store invoices. ## How Organization Billing Works When stores are linked to an organization, their billing is consolidated under the organization's subscription: - The organization has its own subscription that covers all linked stores. - Each store's billing migrates to the organization subscription at the next billing cycle after being linked. - Invoices are generated for the organization as a whole, not per individual store. - If a store is unlinked, its billing returns to the owner's personal subscription at the next billing cycle. ## Who Can Access Invoices | Action | Owner | Admin | Billing | Member | | --------------------- | ----- | ----- | ------- | ------ | | View invoices | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | | Download PDF | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | | Pay invoices | Yes | No | Yes | No | | Manage payment method | Yes | No | Yes | No | Organization admins can view and download invoices but cannot make payments or manage payment methods. Only owners and billing members can process payments. ## Viewing Invoices Go to **Account** and open **Organizations**. Select the organization. Scroll to the **Recent Invoices** section, or press **View All** to see the full list. The invoice list shows: - Invoice number - Billing period - Total amount - Payment status (Paid, Pending, Overdue) ## Paying an Invoice 1. Open the invoice detail page. 2. Press **Pay Invoice**. 3. Select a saved payment method. 4. Confirm the payment. Payments are processed through your saved payment methods. If you do not have a payment method on file, add one using the payment method management option first. ## Payment Method Management Organization owners and billing members can manage the payment method used for organization invoices: 1. Open the organization detail page. 2. Go to the **Billing** or **Payment Method** section. 3. Add, update, or remove a payment method. The organization payment method is separate from your personal subscription payment method. ## Grace Period and Store Suspension If an organization invoice payment fails, the following happens: 1. **Grace period begins.** You have 7 days to make the payment. 2. **Grace period expires.** If payment is not received within 7 days, all stores linked to the organization are suspended. 3. **Stores are suspended.** Suspended stores cannot process transactions. Staff can still log in but cannot perform sales or other operations. When the grace period expires, all stores under the organization are suspended — not just the stores that generated the unpaid charges. Pay the outstanding invoice promptly to avoid disruption. ## Reactivation After Suspension Once the overdue payment is cleared: - All suspended stores are reactivated automatically. - No manual action is needed to restore store access. - Transactions can resume immediately after payment is processed. ## Downloading an Invoice Press the **Download** button next to any invoice to get a PDF copy. The download link is temporary and expires after a short time. ## Related Guides - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) - [Managing Members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) - [Linking & Unlinking Stores](/docs/account/organizations/linking-stores) --- # Organizations Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/overview # Organizations Overview Organization Management is one of the few add-ons **not** unlocked during a free trial. To use it, purchase the add-on on any paid plan. Organizations let you group multiple stores under a single account. Use them to manage a team of staff across all your stores, control member access levels, and view consolidated billing in one place. ## What is an Organization? An organization is an account-level container for your stores and team. When you create an organization, you can: - Add any of your stores to it - Invite team members with specific roles - View invoices and billing history for the whole organization Organizations are separate from individual store staff. Members added at the organization level get automatic access to stores based on their role. ## Member Roles Each member in an organization has one of four roles: | Role | Permissions | | ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Owner** | Full control. Can manage members, stores, billing, and delete the organization. | | **Admin** | Full access to all stores. Cannot manage billing or delete the organization. | | **Member** | No automatic store access. Must be manually added as staff to individual stores. | | **Billing** | Can view and pay organization invoices. No store access unless manually added. | Organization owners and admins automatically get full access to all stores under the organization. They do not appear in store staff lists, but they can perform any action on any store. ## Key Features - **Centralized member management.** Invite people once and control their access across all stores. - **Automatic store access for admins.** Owners and admins skip per-store setup. - **Store linking from store details.** Link any existing store to an organization directly from the store details page. - **Billing consolidation.** All stores under an organization share a single org subscription and consolidated invoicing. - **Payment management.** Owners and billing members can manage the organization payment method and pay invoices. - **Multiple organizations.** You can create and belong to more than one organization. ## Store Linking You can link stores to an organization in two ways: - **During store creation** — select an organization in the store creation form. - **From the store details page** — open an existing store's details and assign it to an organization. Once linked, the store appears in the organization's store list and organization owners and admins get automatic full access to it. You can also unlink a store at any time to make it standalone again. See [Linking & Unlinking Stores](/docs/account/organizations/linking-stores) for a step-by-step guide. ## Organization Billing When stores are linked to an organization, their billing is consolidated under the organization's subscription: - The organization has its own subscription with consolidated invoicing for all linked stores. - Store billing migrates to the organization subscription at the next billing cycle. - If an organization payment fails, a 7-day grace period begins. After the grace period expires, linked stores are suspended until payment is made. - Owners and billing members can update the organization payment method and pay invoices directly. See [Organization Invoices](/docs/account/organizations/organization-invoices) for details on viewing and paying invoices. ## Store Suspension If payment for the organization subscription fails and the 7-day grace period expires: - All stores linked to the organization are suspended. - Suspended stores cannot process transactions until payment is cleared. - Once payment is made, all stores are reactivated automatically. ## Before You Begin To use organizations, you need the **Organization Management** add-on active on your account. Once active, the Organizations section appears in your account menu. ## Related Guides - [Creating an Organization](/docs/account/organizations/creating-an-organization) - [Managing Organization Members](/docs/account/organizations/managing-members) - [Accepting an Invitation](/docs/account/organizations/accepting-an-invitation) - [Adding Stores](/docs/account/organizations/adding-stores) - [Linking & Unlinking Stores](/docs/account/organizations/linking-stores) - [Organization Invoices](/docs/account/organizations/organization-invoices) - [Deleting an Organization](/docs/account/organizations/deleting-an-organization) - [Add-ons Overview](/docs/account/addons/overview) --- # Organization Wallet & SMS > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/organizations/sms-wallet # Organization Wallet & SMS When you group several stores under an **organization**, they can share a single **pooled Wallet**. The organization (your head office) tops it up once, and every store under it sends text messages from that shared balance. No need to top up each branch separately. ## Why pool the Wallet - **One place to fund everything.** Top up the organization Wallet and all branches can send texts. - **Simpler accounting.** One balance, one set of receipts, one activity log. - **Fair tracking.** Even though the pool is shared, each text is still tagged to the store that sent it, so you can see which branch is using the most. ## Where to find it From the sidebar, go to **Account → Organizations → [your organization] → SMS**. The hub mirrors the store version, with the Wallet, activity, receipts, and per-store usage all at the organization level. ## Topping up the pool Go to **Account → Organizations → [your organization] → SMS**. Choose an amount, review the points it adds, and confirm. Pay on the secure checkout page. Points land in the pool once payment clears, and every member store can spend them. When your stores are pooled, individual store Wallet screens point you back to the organization to top up. That's expected — the pool is funded centrally, not per store. ## Allocating credit to a store Sometimes you want to give a specific branch a fixed amount of credit rather than letting it draw freely from the pool. The **Allocate to store** action moves a chosen number of points from the organization pool to one store's own Wallet. Go to **Account → Organizations → [your organization] → SMS**. Choose the destination store, enter the number of points to move (up to the current pool balance), and add an optional note. The points move from the pool to that store. The action is recorded in the activity log on both sides. Allocating to a store is one-directional credit movement, recorded for audit. When a store **leaves** a pooled organization, its new standalone Wallet starts at zero — the pool was jointly funded, so no automatic refund is split out. Allocate a starting balance to it before or after it leaves if you want it to have credit. ## Who can do what - **Organization owner / admin** can top up the pool and allocate credit to stores. - **Billing** members can view and top up. - Funding is controlled at the organization; sending is controlled per store with the SMS add-on. - [Wallet Overview](/docs/store/wallet/overview) - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Organizations Overview](/docs/account/organizations/overview) --- # Account Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/overview # Account Overview Your account is the central hub for everything in Fuze Store POS. It stores your personal details, connects you to your stores, and gives you control over billing and security. ## What You Can Do - Update your name, email, and password at any time - Link or unlink social accounts like Google or Facebook - Manage your stores and switch between them - Set up security features to protect your data - Manage your subscription and billing information ## Tips - Keep your email and phone number current for account recovery. - Use a strong, unique password and change it regularly. - Link a social account so you can sign in faster. - Review your account and security settings on a regular basis. --- # How to Change Your Password > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/security/change-password # How to Change Your Password Changing your password regularly is one of the easiest ways to protect your account. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Security** from the list. 4. Tap **Change Password**. 5. Enter your new password. 6. Re-enter it to confirm there are no typos. 7. Tap **Save**. A confirmation message appears when the change is complete. After saving, the Security page shows how long ago your password was last changed (for example, "Last changed 2 days ago"). If you have never changed your password, it shows "Never changed." ## Tips for a Strong Password - Use at least 8 characters. Longer is better. - Mix uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols. - Avoid common words or personal details like your name or birthday. - Do not reuse passwords from other accounts. - Change your password on a regular schedule for extra security. --- # Account Security Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/security/overview # Account Security Overview Strong security protects your business data, customer information, and staff access. Here is what Fuze Store POS offers to keep your account safe. ## Why Security Matters - Prevents unauthorized access to your stores and data. - Keeps sales, inventory, and staff information private. - Protects your customers' personal details. ## Key Security Features - **Strong passwords** -- Use a mix of letters, numbers, and symbols. Change your password regularly and never share it. - **Password age tracking** -- Your security page shows when your password was last changed so you know how recent your credentials are. - **Two-factor authentication (2FA)** -- Require a verification code from your phone or email when signing in. - **Role-based access** -- Give each staff member only the permissions they need. - **Account recovery** -- Keep your email current so you can reset your password if needed. - **Session management** -- Sign out of devices you are not using and review active sessions in your settings. ## Tips for Staying Safe - Never share your password with anyone. - Use a unique password for Fuze Store POS. - Enable 2FA for an extra layer of protection. - Review your staff's roles and permissions regularly. - Sign out from shared or public devices after each use. - Keep your email and phone number updated for account recovery. --- # How to Add a Payment Method > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/adding-payment-method # How to Add a Payment Method Adding a payment method lets you pay for your subscription and any extras your business needs. Your payment details are stored securely and never shared. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Subscription** from the list. 4. Under **Payment Methods**, tap **Add Payment Method**. 5. If prompted, confirm the action. You will be redirected to a secure third-party page. 6. Enter your card or payment details (card number, expiration date, security code). 7. Tap **Save** or **Add**. Your payment method is now ready for future payments. ## Tips - You can add more than one payment method and choose which one to use. - Keep your payment details current to avoid service interruptions. - All payment information is handled by a secure third-party processor. --- # How to Apply a Coupon to Your Subscription > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/applying-coupon # How to Apply a Coupon to Your Subscription A coupon code applies a discount to your Fuze Store subscription billing. Coupons can take a percentage off, a fixed amount off, or give you free months. ## Apply a coupon 1. Open the **sidebar menu** and select **Account**. 2. Select **Subscription** from the list. 3. Scroll to the **Coupon** section ("Do you have a coupon?"). 4. Type your coupon **code** into the field. 5. Select **Apply Coupon**. When the code is valid, you'll see a **"Coupon applied"** confirmation and the discount is recorded against your subscription. > **Note:** Some coupons are only valid for specific plans. If your current plan isn't eligible, you'll see "Coupon is not valid for your current plan." Other codes may show "Coupon is expired" or "Coupon already max redeemed." ## What the discount types mean - **Percentage off** — a percentage is deducted from your billing amount. - **Fixed amount off** — a set amount is deducted. - **Free months** — your subscription's renewal date is extended by the number of free months. For example, a 2-month coupon pushes your expiry out by two months immediately. ## See your redeemed coupons 1. Open **Account** from the sidebar. 2. Select **My Coupons**. Each coupon shows its code, discount, scope, status (Active or Expired), the date it was redeemed, and the date it's valid until. ## Tips - A coupon can be redeemed **once per account** — re-entering the same code shows "Coupon already max redeemed." - Coupons that take a percentage or fixed amount off are reflected on your next invoice; free-month coupons take effect on your renewal date right away. - You can also enter a coupon code when you **register** a new account. ## Related Guides - [Subscription Overview](/docs/account/subscription/overview) - [How to Upgrade Your Subscription](/docs/account/subscription/upgrading-subscription) - [How to Add a Payment Method](/docs/account/subscription/adding-payment-method) --- # How to Cancel Your Subscription > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/canceling-subscription # How to Cancel Your Subscription If you no longer need Fuze Store POS, you can cancel your subscription in a few steps. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Subscription** from the list. 4. Under the **Plans** section, tap **Cancel**. 5. Follow the prompts to confirm the cancellation. 6. Your subscription stays active until the end of your current billing period. ## What to Know Before Canceling - You keep access to paid features until your billing period ends. - Download any important data or reports before your plan expires. - You can reactivate or upgrade your plan at any time after canceling. --- # How to Downgrade Your Subscription > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/downgrading-subscription # How to Downgrade Your Subscription If you need fewer features or want to lower your costs, you can switch to a smaller plan at any time. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Subscription** from the list. 4. Under the **Plans** section, tap **Choose Plans** to view available options. 5. Pick a lower plan that fits your new needs. Review the features and price. 6. Tap **Downgrade** and follow the prompts to confirm. 7. Your new plan takes effect at the end of your current billing period. ## What to Know Before Downgrading - Downgrading may reduce the number of stores, staff, or features you can use. - Any data that exceeds the new plan's limits may become restricted. - You can upgrade again at any time if your needs change. - Keep your payment method current to avoid billing issues. --- # Subscription Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/overview # Subscription Overview Your subscription determines which features, stores, and staff limits are available in Fuze Store POS. You can start with a free plan and upgrade as your business grows. ## What Is a Subscription? A subscription is the plan that controls your access to Fuze Store POS. It sets your feature limits and is billed automatically, so you never have to worry about renewals. ## What the Free (Basic) Plan Includes You can run your store on the free **Basic** plan and upgrade when you need more. **Creating orders in the POS is unlimited on every plan, including Basic.** Some features are reserved for paid plans and are turned off on Basic: - **Taxes**, **Import**, **Export**, and **email notifications** -- available on any paid plan (Starter and up). - **Refunds**, **exporting reports**, and **real-time sync** across devices -- available on the Lite plan and up. - **SMS notifications** -- available with the **Text Messaging (SMS)** add-on (on any plan). The [pricing page](/pricing) lists every plan side by side, including store, staff, and catalog limits. ## What You Can Manage - **View your plan** -- See your current plan and what it includes. - **Upgrade or downgrade** -- Change plans as your business needs shift. - **Payment methods** -- Add, remove, or update your billing details. - **Billing history** -- Review past invoices and download receipts. - **Cancel** -- Stop your subscription if you no longer need it. ## How Billing Works Your plan is a **flat monthly fee per store** — Fuze Store never takes a percentage of your sales. - **You pay in advance.** Each renewal charges the fee for the **upcoming** month, like a typical software subscription. - **Upgrades apply right away.** When you move to a higher plan mid-cycle, you are charged only the prorated difference for the days left in your current cycle, and the new features unlock immediately. Your renewal date stays the same. - **Downgrades apply at renewal.** When you move to a lower plan, you keep your current plan's features until the end of the cycle you already paid for; the next renewal bills at the lower rate. - **Add-ons bill separately.** Each add-on is charged when you activate it and renews on its own monthly cycle. Add-ons work on any plan — including Basic — as long as you have a payment method on file. ## Subscription Status Your subscription can be in one of several states: | Status | Meaning | |--------|---------| | **Active** | Your subscription is in good standing and all features are available. | | **Pending** | A plan change is scheduled and will take effect at the end of your current billing cycle. | | **Canceled** | Your subscription will downgrade to the free plan when the current cycle ends. You can reactivate before that date. | | **Past Due** | A payment has failed. You have a 7-day grace period to update your payment method. Your stores remain active during this period. | | **Suspended** | The grace period has expired without a successful payment. Your stores are temporarily frozen and POS operations are blocked until payment is resolved. | If a payment fails, you have 7 days to add a valid payment method. After 7 days, your stores will be suspended and you will not be able to process sales until the issue is resolved. ## Tips - Review your plan regularly to make sure it still fits your business. - Upgrade when you need more stores, staff, or advanced features. - Keep your payment details current to avoid service interruptions. --- # How to Remove a Payment Method > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/removing-payment-method # How to Remove a Payment Method You can remove outdated or unused payment methods from your account at any time. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Subscription** from the list. 4. Under **Payment Methods**, select the payment method you want to remove. 5. Tap **Delete Payment Method**. 6. Confirm the removal when prompted. ## Important - Keep at least one active payment method if you have an ongoing subscription. - Removing your only payment method may interrupt your subscription. - You can add a new payment method at any time from the same screen. --- # How to Set a Default Payment Method > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/set-default-payment-method # How to Set a Default Payment Method Your default payment method is charged automatically for subscription renewals. Set it to the card or account you prefer. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Subscription** from the list. 4. Under **Payment Methods**, select the payment method you want to make the default. 5. Tap **Set as Default**. 6. Future payments will now use this method automatically. ## Tips - Change your default payment method at any time. - If your default card expires, update it right away to avoid missed payments. - You can always add a new card and set it as the default in one visit. --- # How to Upgrade Your Subscription > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/subscription/upgrading-subscription # How to Upgrade Your Subscription Upgrading your plan unlocks more features, stores, and staff slots for your business. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Subscription** from the list. 4. Under the **Plan** section, tap **Choose Plans** to see available options. 5. Pick the plan that fits your needs. Review the features and price. 6. Tap **Subscribe**. You will be redirected to the payment page. > **Note:** The payment page is managed by a third-party processor. Additional verification steps may be required. 7. Enter or confirm your payment details. 8. After payment, you will be redirected back to Fuze Store. Your new plan takes effect shortly. ## Tips - Compare plan features before choosing so you get the best fit. - You can upgrade or downgrade at any time. - Keep your payment method up to date to avoid billing issues. ## Related Guides - [Subscription Overview](/docs/account/subscription/overview) - [How to Downgrade Your Subscription](/docs/account/subscription/downgrading-subscription) - [How to Add a Payment Method](/docs/account/subscription/adding-payment-method) --- # How to Update Your Account Information > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/account/updating-account-info # How to Update Your Account Information Keeping your account details accurate helps with account recovery and makes sure your team can recognize you. ## Steps 1. Open the **sidebar menu** from the top of the screen. 2. Select **Account** from the menu. 3. Select **Account Details** from the list. 4. Under Personal Information, tap **Edit**. 5. Update your username, first name, or last name. 6. Tap **Save** to apply your changes. ## Tips - Use your real name so staff and customers can identify you. - You can update your information whenever your details change. - Accurate contact details make account recovery faster. --- # App General Information > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/general-info # App General Information The About App page gives you a snapshot of your Fuze Store POS setup. You can find key details about the app, your device, and your business at a glance. ## What You Will See - **App Name and Version** -- The current app version, so you can confirm you are up to date. - **Business Name** -- The name of your store or business as registered in the app. - **Device Info** -- The type of device you are using (iPad, Android tablet, Windows PC, etc.). - **System Info** -- Your operating system and browser details. This is helpful when contacting support. - **Last Update** -- When the app was last updated on your device. - **Legal and Licenses** -- Links to the terms of service, privacy policy, and open-source licenses. No sensitive or private data appears on this page. It shows only the basics about your app and setup. ## System Information Fuze Store POS is cloud-based. You can access your business from anywhere with an internet connection. Your data is securely stored and backed up automatically. The app works best with the latest versions of **Chrome**, **Safari**, or **Edge**. You can also use it on mobile devices running **iOS** or **Android**. --- # Connecting a Bluetooth Printer > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/bluetooth-printer # Connecting a Bluetooth Printer Bluetooth is the simplest way to print and the only one that needs **no extra hardware or software**. A Bluetooth printer pairs **directly with the phone or tablet** running Fuze Store — it does **not** go through the Fuze Store Hub. This makes it ideal for mobile POS, food trucks, market stalls, and single-printer stores. Bluetooth printers work on the **mobile app** (iOS and Android) only — not in a web browser. For web-browser printing, or for USB/Serial printers, use the [Fuze Store Hub](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) instead. You need the **Manage Printer** permission (or be the store owner) to add or edit printers. ## Before you start - Power the printer on and make sure it has paper. - Have the printer's manual nearby — you may need its **MAC address** (often on the self-test page). - Turn **Bluetooth on** for your phone or tablet, and grant Bluetooth permission to the Fuze Store app. ## Pair the printer Because the printer talks to the tablet directly, there's nothing to install — just pair and add it in the app. Power on the printer and put it in **pairing mode** (check the printer's manual — usually a long press of the feed button). On your POS device, open **Configurations → Printers** and tap **Add Printer**. Give the printer a clear name like "Front Counter" or "Kitchen". This is what staff will see in routing rules. Select **Bluetooth** as the connection type. Enter the printer's **MAC address** (printed on the self-test page or in the manual). It looks like `AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF`. Choose your **paper width**: 58mm or 80mm. The wrong width gives clipped or half-empty receipts. Tap **Save**, then open the printer's detail page and tap **Test Print** to confirm the connection. Most ESC/POS thermal printers from Epson, Xprinter, MUNBYN, Goojprt, and generic 58mm/80mm Bluetooth brands work out of the box. If your printer prints garbled text, see [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting). ## Good to know - **One tablet at a time.** A Bluetooth printer pairs with a single device — only the paired tablet can print to it. If you need several tablets to share one printer, use a Network (TCP/IP) or USB printer through the Fuze Store Hub instead. - **No Hub needed.** The Fuze Store Hub does not need to be installed or running for Bluetooth printing. - **Queue retries differ.** A failed Bluetooth print can't be retried automatically from the print queue (the print runs on the device, not through the Hub). If one fails, use **Reprint** from the order's detail page. See [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status). - **Peso glyph.** Many low-cost Bluetooth printers can't render the `₱` symbol, so receipts show the currency code once in the header instead. See [Receipt & Ticket Design](/docs/app/printer/receipt-design). ## Troubleshooting If your printer doesn't appear when you scan, or you see a "Bluetooth permission required" message, see the Bluetooth sections of the [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) guide. ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Printer (Network, USB, Serial)](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Connecting a Printer > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer # Connecting a Printer This guide walks you through adding a thermal printer that connects over your network or through the Fuze Store Hub. Pick the section that matches how your printer connects: **Network (TCP/IP)**, **USB**, or **Serial**. Bluetooth printers pair directly with your phone or tablet and don't use the Fuze Store Hub — they have their own guide: [Connecting a Bluetooth Printer](/docs/app/printer/bluetooth-printer). **USB**, **Serial**, and **web-browser** printing run through the [Fuze Store Hub](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup). **Network (TCP/IP)** printers can be reached directly from the mobile app, though the Hub is recommended for speed and reliability. You need the **Manage Printer** permission (or be the store owner) to add or edit printers. ## Before you start - Make sure your printer is powered on and has paper. - Have the printer's manual nearby — you may need details like the MAC address, IP address, or USB vendor ID. - For network and USB printers, make sure your POS device and the printer are on the same Wi-Fi. ## Connect a Network (TCP/IP) Printer Network printers stay in one spot and connect over your store's Wi-Fi or Ethernet. They are reliable for high-volume restaurants and retail. Plug the printer into your network (Ethernet cable or Wi-Fi setup as per the printer's manual). Print a network self-test page from the printer to find its **IP address**. It looks like `192.168.1.100`. On your POS device, open **Store → Printers** and tap **Add Printer**. Give the printer a name and select **Network (TCP/IP)** as the connection type. Enter the printer's **IP address** and **port**. The default port for thermal printers is `9100` — only change this if your printer's manual says otherwise. Pick your **paper width** (58mm or 80mm) and **encoding** (use UTF-8 unless you need Chinese, Japanese, or Korean — see the encoding tip below). Tap **Save**, then **Test Print** from the printer detail page. The printer must be on the **same network** as your POS device. If your store has multiple Wi-Fi networks (e.g., a "guest" and a "staff" network), the printer and the POS must be on the same one. ## Connect a USB Printer USB printers connect to a computer in your store, and that computer relays prints to the rest of your devices. This needs the **LAN Bridge** running on the connected computer first. Install and start the **LAN Bridge**. Follow the [LAN Bridge Setup guide](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) before continuing. Plug the USB printer into the LAN Bridge computer. On your POS device, open **Store → Printers** and tap **Add Printer**. Give the printer a name and select **USB** as the connection type. Tap **Discover USB Printers**. Fuze Store asks the LAN Bridge to scan for every USB printer plugged into it. A dialog appears with the discovered printers, showing each printer's name, Vendor ID (VID), and Product ID (PID). Select your printer from the list. The **Vendor ID** and **Product ID** fields are filled in automatically. These are hex identifiers that uniquely identify your printer model — you don't need to change them. Choose your **paper width** (58mm or 80mm) and tap **Save**. Open the printer's detail page and tap **Test Print** to confirm the LAN Bridge can talk to the printer. The test page prints directly through the LAN Bridge. The **Discover USB Printers** button is only active when your device is connected to the Fuze Store Hub. If the button is grayed out, open **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub** and make sure the connection is paired and the badge is green. If discovery doesn't find your printer, you can type the Vendor ID and Product ID manually. These are 4-character hex codes (e.g. `04b8` and `0202`) — you can find them in your printer's manual or by running `lsusb` (Linux/macOS) or checking Device Manager (Windows). ## Connect a Serial Printer Serial printers are older or industrial models that connect via RS-232. Like USB, they need the **LAN Bridge** running on the computer they are plugged into. Install and start the LAN Bridge on the computer with the serial port. Connect the serial printer to the computer's serial port (or a USB-to-Serial adapter like an FTDI FT232). In Fuze Store, open **Store → Printers** and tap **Add Printer**. Choose **Serial** as the connection type. Enter the **device path** (Linux: `/dev/ttyUSB0` or `/dev/ttyS0`, Windows: `COM3`) and the **baud rate** (usually `9600` or `19200` — check the manual). If your printer prints the first half of a receipt and then stops, or shows garbled characters, open **Advanced Serial Settings** and enable **Hardware Flow Control (RTS/CTS)**. Industrial kitchen printers almost always need this. Save and run a test print. The **Advanced Serial Settings** panel also lets you change **data bits** (default 8), **parity** (default none), **stop bits** (default 1), and toggle software flow control (XON/XOFF). Most modern thermal printers ship with the defaults (8-N-1, no flow control) — only change these if the printer manual or the vendor's receipt comes out garbled. ## Encoding tip The default encoding is **UTF-8**, which works for English, Spanish, French, and most Latin-script languages. If your receipts show garbled or square characters: | Language | Recommended encoding | |---|---| | Chinese (Simplified or Traditional) | `GB18030` or `GBK` | | Japanese | `Shift_JIS` | | Korean | `EUC-KR` | | Older / US-only printers | `CP437` | You can change the encoding any time on the printer's edit page. ## Naming printers well Good names make routing rules easy to read later. Try names like: - "Front Counter Receipt" - "Kitchen Hot Line" - "Bar — Drinks" - "Take-away Labels" Avoid generic names like "Printer 1" — when you have three printers in a busy kitchen, you'll be glad you used descriptive names. ## What's next - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) — tell Fuze Store what to print and where. - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) — see what happens when a printer is offline. - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) — fix common issues. ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Bluetooth Printer](/docs/app/printer/bluetooth-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Label & Sticker Printing > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/label-printing # Label & Sticker Printing Regular receipt printing (receipts, kitchen tickets, bar slips, queue tickets) is included in every plan and prints on continuous paper rolls. **Label and sticker printing is different** — it prints on **die-cut labels** (pre-cut, fixed-size stickers on a backing sheet) using a dedicated label printer. That capability is part of the **Advanced Printing** add-on. ## What you get with the add-on - **A die-cut label printer option** on the printer form — pick a command language, a label size, and see a live preview before you print. - **Product barcode labels** — a "Print barcode label" button on any product that has a barcode. The printed barcode scans straight back into the register. - **Order-item stickers** — a small sticker per item when an order is being prepared (great for coffee cups, take-away bags, and prep stations). - **Bag tags** — numbered "Bag 1 of N" stickers for laundry and packaged orders. Receipts, kitchen tickets, bar slips, queue tickets, and the laundry claim stub do **not** need this add-on. Only die-cut labels, stickers, product barcodes, and bag tags are part of Advanced Printing. ## Supported label printers A label printer speaks a **command language**. Pick the one that matches your hardware — this is the most common thing people get wrong. | Command language | Typical printers | Notes | |---|---|---| | **ESC/POS** | Cheap 2–3" USB/Bluetooth sticker printers | Small die-cut and round labels at 203 dpi (also the standard receipt-printer language) | | **TSPL (TSC)** | TSC and compatible desktop printers (incl. many VOZY / Xprinter models) | Text, barcodes, and QR at 203 or 300 dpi | | **ZPL (Zebra)** | Zebra desktop and industrial printers | 203 / 300 / 600 dpi; best for 4×6 shipping labels | The **Command language must match the physical printer**. A Zebra printer set to TSPL, or a TSC printer set to ZPL, will feed a blank label or nothing at all. If unsure, check the sticker on the printer or its box. ## Supported label sizes Pick from standard presets — **2×1, 3×2, 4×6** (TSPL/ZPL only), address, Dymo sizes, **round** 1" / 1.5" / 2", jewelry — or set a **Custom** size in millimetres with a rectangle, rounded, or **circle** shape. The size picker only shows the sizes your chosen command language can actually print, and a live preview shows the true shape and proportions. Retail barcodes print sharpest at **300 dpi**. ## Set up a label printer Go to **Preferences → Order** and turn on printing if it isn't already on. Go to **Configurations → Printers → New Printer**. Give it a name and pick the connection (Bluetooth, Network, USB, or Serial). Under **Label Printing**, set the **Command language** to match your printer. Choosing **TSPL** or **ZPL** switches **Media** to **Die-cut label** automatically; on **ESC/POS** (a cheap sticker printer) set **Media** to **Die-cut label** yourself. Then pick a **Label size** (or Custom). Check the live preview, then save. On the printer's **Print Routing Rules**, add an assignment with the **Label** role so order-item stickers print automatically. Leave it off if you only want to print product barcodes on demand. Use **Test print** on the printer's detail screen to send a small test label before your first real print — it confirms the size, command language, and connection are all correct. ## Print a product barcode label Open a product, enter a **Barcode** (or tap **Generate Code**), and save. A **Print barcode label** button appears at the bottom of the product form. Tap it to open the print dialog, then choose the **label type** (see Label presets below), the **label printer** (if you have more than one), the **label size**, and how many **copies** — a live preview shows the sticker before you print. The printed barcode scans straight into the POS register and adds the product to the cart — no manual lookup. ## Label presets Every label prints from a **preset** — a ready-made layout that fills itself in from your data (product name, price, SKU, barcode, dates, and more). Presets are **business-neutral**, so the same set works for a coffee shop, a hardware store, a pharmacy, a repair shop, or a laundry. You pick a preset in the print dialog's **Label type** menu; a live preview shows the result before you print. The menu only lists presets that make sense for what you're printing — it filters by your store's **business type**, your **printer's command language**, and whether the item actually has the fields a preset needs. Examples of built-in presets: | Preset | Good for | |---|---| | **Product Barcode / Price Tag / Shelf Label** | Retail, grocery, hardware | | **Cup / Takeout / Ingredient / Expiration** | Cafés, restaurants, bakeries | | **Serial / Repair / QR-Asset** | Electronics, repair services | | **Laundry Claim / Bag Tag** | Laundry, dry cleaning | | **Shipping / Address / Customer** | Any store that ships | | **Inventory / Jewelry / Gift / Plant** | Inventory bins and specialty retail | Presets are read-only in this release — pick one and print. A custom label designer is planned for a future update. ## How labels reach the printer - **Bluetooth** label printers print directly from your phone. - **USB, Network, and Serial** label printers print through the **Fuze Store Hub** desktop app on a computer in your store — the same Hub that handles receipts. - **Web** printing (from a browser) always goes through the Hub. Industrial Zebra / TSC printers are most reliable over **USB or Network via the Fuze Store Hub**. Bluetooth label printing depends on the specific printer, so test yours before relying on it during service. ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # LAN Bridge Setup > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup # LAN Bridge Setup The **LAN Bridge** is the on-premise helper that lets Fuze Store talk to USB and Serial printers and makes printing from a web browser possible. It is now built into the **Fuze Store Hub** — a free desktop app you install on one computer in your store. There is no separate "LAN Bridge" download; installing the Hub gives you the bridge. If you only use **Bluetooth** printers from the mobile app, you can skip this guide — Bluetooth printing does not need the Hub. ## When you need it You need the Fuze Store Hub if **any** of these are true: - You have a **USB** printer. - You have a **Serial / RS-232** printer. - You print receipts from a **web browser** (the Fuze Store dashboard). - You want **faster, more reliable** printing in a busy store, even with TCP/IP printers. You **do not** need it if: - You only use a **Bluetooth** printer with the mobile app. - You only use a **TCP/IP** printer from the mobile app and you're happy with the speed. ## What you need - A Windows, Mac, or Linux computer that **stays on** during business hours (a dedicated mini-PC, an old laptop, or your back-office computer). - The computer must be on the **same Wi-Fi or LAN** as your POS device(s) and your printers. - About **10 minutes** for setup. ## Install and connect the Hub The Hub has its own setup guide. Follow it once, then come back here to add printers: Download and install the Fuze Store Hub for your operating system. See [Installing Fuze Store Hub](/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub). On first launch you **sign in**, **pick the store** this computer serves, and paste a **72-hour activation key** (generated for you in the mobile app under **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub**). There is no Store ID to type and no shared password to copy. See [First-Time Setup](/docs/hub/first-time-setup). Generate an 8-digit pair code in **Hub → Settings → Network** and enter it on your phone or tablet's pairing wizard. Each device gets its own 30-day session key — there's no manual IP address or port to enter; the app finds the Hub on your Wi-Fi automatically once paired. See [Pairing the Mobile App](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app). The mobile app sends a small "heartbeat" to the Hub every 30 seconds to keep the connection healthy. If the Hub is unreachable for too long, you'll see a "LAN disconnected" banner — your prints **queue** and resume automatically when the Hub is back. See [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status). ## Add USB or Serial printers Once the Hub is connected and your device is paired, register USB and Serial printers: Plug the USB printer (or connect the Serial cable) into the **Hub computer** and turn it on. In the mobile app, open **Configurations → Printers** and tap **Add Printer**. Select **USB** or **Serial** as the connection type. Tap **Discover USB Printers** (or enter the Serial device path manually). The Hub scans for connected printers and returns each device's name, Vendor ID, and Product ID. Select your printer — the connection fields fill in automatically. Give it a name, choose paper width, and tap **Save**. Open the printer detail page and tap **Test Print**. The test page prints directly through the Hub. You can also discover and register printers from the Hub itself (**Hub → Printers → Discover → Register**). For the full walk-through, see [Adding Printers on the Hub](/docs/hub/adding-printers) and [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer). ## Verify the Hub is reachable To confirm the Hub is alive without using the app, open this in a browser on any computer on the same network (replace `192.168.1.10` with the Hub computer's IP): ``` https://192.168.1.10:18443/health ``` The Hub uses a **self-signed certificate**, so your browser shows a one-time security warning the first time — that's expected on a local device. After you continue, you should see a small `{ "status": "ok" }` response. From a terminal, use `curl -k https://192.168.1.10:18443/health` (the `-k` skips the self-signed-cert check). ## Common questions **Is the LAN Bridge a separate program?** No — it's part of the Fuze Store Hub. Installing the Hub installs the bridge. **Can the Hub run on the same computer as the Fuze Store browser app?** Yes. The browser app pairs with the Hub the same way a phone does (see [Pairing the Browser App](/docs/hub/pairing-browser-app)). **Can multiple POS devices share one Hub?** Yes — that's the recommended setup. One Hub per store, with every tablet and counter paired to it. **Does the Hub need internet?** No, not for printing. Printing flows over your local Wi-Fi. The Hub uses the internet only for plan/add-on updates, optional Kitchen Display cloud sync, and automatic updates. If the internet drops, local printing keeps working. Each paired device has its **own** session key — there's no shared password. If a device is lost or stolen, revoke just that device in **Hub → Settings → Network → Pair the browser** without disturbing the others. ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Installing Fuze Store Hub](/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub) - [Adding Printers on the Hub](/docs/hub/adding-printers) - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Printers Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/overview # Printers Overview Fuze Store can print receipts, kitchen tickets, bar slips, queue tickets, and labels automatically while you take orders. You can connect more than one printer to the same store, and Fuze Store will send the right paper to the right printer without any extra clicks during checkout. ## What you can do with printers - **Print receipts** to a front-counter printer when payment is completed. - **Print kitchen tickets** to a kitchen printer the moment an order is created. - **Print bar slips** to a separate bar printer for drink orders only. - **Print queue tickets** for waiting customers. - **Print labels** for take-away packaging. You can use one printer for everything, or split the workload across many printers. Fuze Store automatically picks the right printer for each job based on rules you set once. ## How it works Here is the simple picture of what happens when an order is placed: ``` ┌─────────────┐ │ Order │ │ #001234 │ └──────┬──────┘ │ │ Trigger: Payment Completed ▼ ┌──────────────┐ │ Routing Rule │ │ Engine │ └──┬────────┬──┘ │ │ ▼ ▼ ┌────────┐ ┌────────┐ │Receipt │ │Kitchen │ │Printer │ │Printer │ └────────┘ └────────┘ ``` 1. You connect your printers to Fuze Store. 2. You create routing rules that say "when this happens, print this on that printer". 3. Fuze Store does the rest while you ring up orders. ## Connection types Fuze Store supports four ways to connect a printer. Pick the one that matches your hardware. | Connection | Best for | Needs LAN Bridge? | |---|---|---| | **Bluetooth** | Mobile setups, food trucks, single printer | No | | **Network (TCP/IP)** | Stationary printers on store Wi-Fi | Recommended | | **USB** | USB-only printers shared by multiple devices | Yes | | **Serial** | Older or industrial printers | Yes | The **LAN Bridge** is built into the **Fuze Store Hub**, a free desktop app that runs on a computer in your store. You always need it for USB and Serial printers, and for any printing from a web browser. Bluetooth printers work directly from a phone without the bridge. Network (TCP/IP) printers technically *can* be reached straight from a phone, but we recommend running the LAN Bridge anyway because: - The bridge keeps a **persistent print queue** that survives a phone crash or reboot mid-checkout, so no receipt is ever lost. - The bridge dedupes retries so the same receipt is never printed twice. - The bridge gives you a single place to see queue status across all your devices. If you have only one device and a single network printer, you can skip the bridge — just be aware that a phone crash mid-print may drop the job. ## What you need - A Fuze Store account with your store created. - An ESC/POS-compatible thermal printer (most receipt printers from Epson, Star, Xprinter, MUNBYN, Goojprt and similar brands). - Permission to manage printers (store owner or staff with the **Manage Printer** permission). - For USB / Serial / Web printing: a computer running the **LAN Bridge** on the same Wi-Fi as your POS device. The Printer feature is included in every Fuze Store plan. There is no extra add-on or charge to use it. ## Where to next For a **Bluetooth** printer (pairs directly with your phone, no Hub), follow [Connecting a Bluetooth Printer](/docs/app/printer/bluetooth-printer). For a **Network, USB, or Serial** printer, read [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer). Set up [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) so the right documents go to the right printer. If you need USB or Serial support, follow the [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) guide. Learn how the [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) keeps you covered when a printer goes offline. ## Related guides - [Connecting a Bluetooth Printer](/docs/app/printer/bluetooth-printer) - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Print Queue & Status > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status # Print Queue & Status Things go wrong sometimes. A printer runs out of paper, the LAN Bridge computer reboots, the Wi-Fi blinks. Fuze Store is built so that **none of those events lose your prints**. This page explains the safety net. ## The status banner The first thing you'll notice when a printer goes offline is a banner at the top of the printer screen. | Banner color | What it means | |---|---| | **Red banner** | All your printers are offline. New prints will be queued and retried. | | **Yellow banner** | One printer is offline but you have at least one other working. Failover may kick in if a backup is configured. | | **No banner** | Everything is working as expected. | The banner is **non-blocking** — you can keep ringing up sales. It just keeps you informed. Banners disappear automatically as soon as Fuze Store detects the printer is back online. You don't have to dismiss them by hand. ## What is the print queue? The print queue is a hidden list of prints that **failed to reach a printer right away**. Instead of losing the print, Fuze Store remembers it and retries when the printer comes back. Each queued print remembers: - The order it belongs to. - Which routing rule fired it. - Which printer it should go to. - How many times it has been tried. - The error message (if any). You can see queued prints from any printer's detail page in the **Status & Queue** section. ## How retries work ``` ┌──────────────┐ │ Print fails │ └──────┬───────┘ │ ▼ ┌──────────────┐ │ Add to │ │ queue │ ← "Print queued for retry" toast └──────┬───────┘ │ │ Wait for printer to reconnect ▼ ┌──────────────┐ │ Connection │ │ restored │ ← "LAN reconnected" toast └──────┬───────┘ │ │ 5-second debounce ▼ ┌──────────────┐ │ Flush queue │ ← "Print queue flushed" toast └──────┬───────┘ │ ▼ ┌──────────────┐ │ Printed │ └──────────────┘ ``` The queue is automatic. You don't have to tap "retry" — Fuze Store retries each job up to **3 times** as soon as the printer is reachable again. If a job still can't print after 3 tries, it stays in the queue marked **failed**. You can then retry it manually or cancel it. ## Manual retry and cancel Open any printer's detail page. The **Status & Queue** card shows: - Number of jobs **queued** (waiting to be tried) - Number of jobs **failed** (tried 3 times, gave up) - Each job has its own **Retry** and **Cancel** button Tap **Retry** to put a failed job back in line. Tap **Cancel** to remove it permanently. ## Print history on orders Every order keeps a **Print History** card on its detail page so you can see exactly what was printed for that specific order, when, and on which printer. Each entry shows: - The printer name - A status badge (queued, printing, completed, failed) - The trigger that fired the print (Order Created, Payment Completed, etc.) - The time it was attempted - An error message if it failed This is the place to look when a customer says "I never got my receipt" — you can confirm at a glance whether the print succeeded. ## What happens when you have no printers yet If you open the Printers screen and you haven't added any yet, you'll see a **Setup Card** with a friendly explanation and an **Add Printer** button. This is just a helpful empty state — nothing has gone wrong. ## Migrating from the old single-printer setup If you used Fuze Store's previous single-printer Bluetooth setup, you'll see a one-time **Migration Banner** at the top of the Printers screen. Tapping **Migrate** does three things automatically: Creates a new Bluetooth printer in the new system using your existing pairing information (the MAC address Fuze Store already knew about). Reads your old print preferences ("print receipt on payment", "print order slip on create") and creates **routing rules** that match them. Hides the migration banner. From now on you can use all the new features (multiple printers, routing rules, queue, etc.). Your existing receipts continue to print exactly as before, just through the new system. The migration is one-way. Once you've migrated, the old single-printer settings are no longer used. Make sure to test a print after migrating to confirm everything works. ## Bluetooth printers and the queue Bluetooth printers have one limitation: **they can't be retried from the queue automatically**. This is because retrying a print needs the full order data, and Bluetooth printers run on the device itself rather than through the LAN Bridge. If a Bluetooth print fails, you'll see a toast and the failed print will appear in the order's Print History — but you'll need to use **Reprint** from the order detail page to try again. Network, USB, and Serial printers don't have this limitation. ## Toasts you'll see | Toast | What it means | |---|---| | **"Print queued for retry"** | A print failed and is now in the queue. Don't worry — Fuze Store will try again. | | **"Failover active"** | The primary printer failed and a backup printer took over successfully. | | **"Printer reconnected"** | A printer that was offline is back. | | **"LAN Bridge reconnected"** | The LAN Bridge came back online. The queue will flush in 5 seconds. | | **"Print queue flushed"** | All queued prints were sent. | | **"Bluetooth permission required"** | Grant Bluetooth access to your phone for the printer to work. | ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Receipt & Ticket Design > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/receipt-design # Receipt & Ticket Design Every piece of paper Fuze Store prints — sales receipts, kitchen tickets, bar slips, customer bills, official receipts, refund receipts, queue stubs, product labels, and delivery slips — comes out of a single, shared **print engine**. The same engine renders the preview you see in the app and the bytes that go to your physical printer. This page explains the design system behind those documents so you can predict what will print, configure your store correctly, and (if you’re a developer) extend it safely. You don’t have to read this to get printing working. Connect a printer, hit print, and Fuze Store does the right thing. This page is for store owners who want fine control and developers building on top of the platform. ## What gets printed Fuze Store ships nine document types out of the box, plus a diagnostic test page: | Document | When it prints | Typical printer | |---|---|---| | **Sales receipt** | Payment is completed | Front-counter | | **Kitchen ticket** | Order is created (for kitchen items) | Kitchen | | **Bar ticket** | Order is created (for bar items) | Bar | | **Customer bill** | Server requests "Bill out" before payment | Front-counter | | **Official receipt** | Fiscal copy required (e.g. BIR, VAT) | Front-counter | | **Refund receipt** | Refund or void is processed | Front-counter | | **Queue ticket** | Customer joins the queue | Front-counter / queue | | **Order sticker** | Order moves into preparation | Label printer | | **Delivery slip** | Order is dispatched | Front-counter / kitchen | | **Test page** | Printer setup / diagnostic | Any | The **order sticker** prints one small label per item-unit as the order starts being prepared — handy for sticking on cups, bags, or trays so each item is clearly tagged. It carries the item and order number, not a price or barcode. Each document is defined by a **JSON template** in the print engine. Templates describe blocks (text, key/value rows, line items, dividers, QR codes, etc.) — they never describe pixels. The engine takes care of column math, wrapping, alignment, and ESC/POS formatting for both **58mm** and **80mm** paper. ## Design tokens To keep every document consistent, the print engine has a single source of truth for layout numbers: - **Columns**: 32 columns for 58mm paper, 48 columns for 80mm paper. - **Line item layout**: the item name and its line total sit on the first row (total right-aligned); when the quantity is more than one, a subtle `qty @ unit` breakdown prints beneath, with modifiers indented under that. - **Dividers**: `=` for major section breaks (around the total), `-` for minor ones. Every divider spans the full paper width and does the visual separating — the layout avoids stacking blank lines to save paper. - **Headers**: store name printed bold and double-height for instant recognition, followed by your full **address block** — address lines, city, region, postal code, phone, email, and tax ID — each line printing only when your store has it (no blank rows). - **Footer**: sales receipts close with a small **"Powered by Fuze Store"** provider line. - **Item count**: receipts close the item list with an `Items: N` summary. These tokens live in `packages/print-engine/src/design/tokens.ts`. Changing them ripples through every template in a single place. ## Money & dates These two details do the most to make a receipt look professional. **Money** prints with thousands separators, left-labelled and right-aligned (`Subtotal 1,234.56`). Amounts are bare numbers and the currency is shown **once** in the receipt header (`Currency PHP`) — cleaner than repeating a prefix on every line, and it sidesteps a real hardware limitation: many low-cost Bluetooth printers cannot render the `₱` peso glyph and would print `?` in its place. (The engine can also print a per-amount symbol or ISO-code prefix where a printer is known to support it.) **Dates** print as `Apr 15, 2026 2:32 PM` — never a raw timestamp. When your store's timezone is known, times are shown in that zone. ## The audit line Back-office copies (merchant and accounting copies, like the end-of-day session report) carry a tiny `TPL: FP:` line for support traceability and tamper-checking. Customer-facing receipts, kitchen tickets, and delivery slips do **not** print it — it would only be noise on the customer's copy. ## "Not an official receipt" notice Until your store has a BIR Permit to Print Official Receipts, the sales receipt prints a **`THIS IS NOT AN OFFICIAL RECEIPT`** line near the bottom. Once your permit is approved, this notice is removed and your fiscal copies print as the **Official Receipt** document (with your TIN, OR number, and legal footer). The sales receipt also shows the **cashier / assigned staff**, the **order type** (Dine In, Take Out, Delivery…), the payment tendered, and any **change** — each line appears only when that information is available. ## Cash drawer Each printer has a **Cash drawer** capability you can turn on (in the printer's settings) when a cash drawer is wired to it. When it's on, Fuze Store sends the "open drawer" command at the **start of every print job** routed to that printer — so the drawer pops the moment a receipt prints, exactly when the cashier needs it. A drawer-test print is included, but the standalone USB/network "Test print" button intentionally does **not** kick the drawer. Leave the capability off if no drawer is connected, and nothing happens. ## Kitchen & bar tickets Kitchen and bar tickets are built for the line — large, scannable, and price-free. Every ticket follows the same top-to-bottom flow: 1. **Store name** and outlet, then a bold **`KITCHEN ORDER`** (or **`BAR ORDER`**) band. 2. A large **order number**. 3. The **order type** — `Dine In`, `Take Out`, `Delivery` — printed prominently so the kitchen routes it correctly. 4. The details it has: **customer**, **table**, **guests**, the **assigned staff**, the **time placed**, and the **time printed**. Each line appears only when that information exists. 5. An **`ORDER NOTE`** block for any order-wide special instructions ("Customer allergic to peanuts. Please rush."). 6. The **items** — each numbered, double-height, with modifiers, prep notes (`*`), and allergen tags indented underneath. 7. A closing **`TOTAL ITEMS`** count (or **`TOTAL DRINKS`** on a bar ticket). Prices never print on a kitchen or bar ticket — they're not for the customer. If a ticket is printed a second time, it carries a clear **`REPRINT`** banner so the line knows it isn't a new order. Every document Fuze Store prints — receipt, kitchen ticket, refund, delivery slip, session report — opens the same way: your store name, then a clearly framed title band. One consistent look across the whole roll. ## Internationalization (i18n) Templates never embed English strings directly. Instead they reference translation keys: ```json { "type": "keyValue", "left": "{{i18n:label.subtotal}}", "right": "{{fmt.transaction.subtotal}}" } ``` When the engine renders a job it merges the built-in English defaults with any overrides you pass through `options.translations`. Missing keys render as the key itself (e.g. `label.subtotal`) so drift is visible on the printed paper, not silently swallowed. To localize: 1. Pick a key name (`label.subtotal`, `refund.reason`, etc.). 2. Add a translation in your locale dictionary on the client. 3. Pass it through `options.translations` when calling `renderPrintJob`. The templates are fully localization-ready. Today the apps print the engine's built-in **English** labels; wiring each app's active language into `options.translations` so receipts print in your account language is a planned follow-up. (Your store's own data — item names, customer names, notes — already prints exactly as you entered it, in any language.) ## Fiscal & legal footers Compliance text (BIR footer in PH, VAT registration line in EU, etc.) is **never hard-coded into templates**. Instead, your store carries a small `fiscal` config: ```ts type StoreFiscalConfig = { tin?: string; // Tax ID printed on official receipts orPrefix?: string; // e.g. "OR No.", "Invoice #" legalFooters?: string[]; // Free-form footer lines jurisdictionId?: string; // e.g. "PH-BIR-V1" }; ``` The mobile bridge reads this from `store.preferences.fiscal` and forwards it to the print engine. Templates that need the TIN, OR number, or footer block pick it up automatically. Stores without a fiscal config simply omit those lines. This means: - **Switching tax regions** is a config change, not a code change. - **Multiple outlets** in different jurisdictions can each carry their own legal footer. - **No template duplication** for "PH official receipt", "MX official receipt", etc. ## How a print job flows ``` ┌─────────────────────────┐ │ POS (mobile / web) │ │ buildPrintJobInput() │ └────────────┬────────────┘ │ PrintJobInput (JSON) ▼ ┌─────────────────────────┐ │ @fuze-store/print-engine │ renderPrintJob() │ → IR (intermediate representation) └────────────┬────────────┘ │ ┌────────┴────────┐ │ │ ▼ ▼ ┌─────────┐ ┌──────────────┐ │ Earl │ │ Raw ESC/POS │ │ DSL │ │ bytes │ │ (BLE + │ │ (LAN: QR / │ │ LAN) │ │ barcodes) │ └────┬────┘ └──────┬───────┘ │ │ ▼ ▼ ┌─────────────────────────────┐ │ ESC/POS thermal printer │ └─────────────────────────────┘ ``` 1. The POS builds a `PrintJobInput` from the order, store, and printer profile. 2. The print engine renders an **intermediate representation (IR)** — a structured list of operations with alignment, bold and double-size flags. 3. The mobile app converts the IR to **Earl DSL** (`...`) for transport over Bluetooth and the LAN bridge. 4. For LAN printers needing rich features (QR codes, barcodes), the bridge accepts **raw ESC/POS bytes** via `POST /print/escpos`, bypassing the DSL. 5. Either path produces the same printed output because both originate from the same IR. ## Snapshot guarantees Every document has a snapshot test at both 58mm and 80mm. CI fails if a template change accidentally moves a column, swaps an alignment, or drops a translation key. So you can iterate on templates with confidence — the diff is the design. ## Test page If a print looks wrong, run a test print from `Settings → Printers → → Test print`. The test page exercises: - Centering, left and right alignment. - Bold and double-width / double-height styles. - A character ruler so you can spot column drift. - Date/time and terminal name to confirm the device is online. A successful test page means the printer, paper width, and bridge are all configured correctly. If your real receipts still look off, the issue is data-side (e.g. missing TIN, wrong locale) — not printer-side. ## For developers The engine lives at `packages/print-engine` in the monorepo: - `src/templates/*.json` — the document templates. - `src/design/tokens.ts` — column counts, item layout, design constants. - `src/design/translations.ts` — default English translations. - `src/emitter/earl.ts` — IR → Earl DSL converter. - `src/pipeline.ts` — the renderer entry point (`renderPrintJob`). - `test/snapshots.spec.ts` — the locking snapshot suite. Add a new document by: 1. Dropping a JSON file in `src/templates/`. 2. Registering it in `src/template/registry.ts`. 3. Adding a snapshot case in `test/snapshots.spec.ts`. 4. Wiring a builder in `apps/mobile/src/services/printer/printEngineBridge.ts`. That’s it. The same template will render identically on Bluetooth, LAN, and the in-app preview. ## Related guides - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Routing Rules > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/routing-rules # Routing Rules Routing rules are how you tell Fuze Store **what to print, when, and on which printer**. Once you set them up, you never have to pick a printer manually during checkout again — the right paper just appears on the right printer automatically. You can create as many routing rules as you need. A small store might have one rule. A busy restaurant might have ten. ## What a routing rule is A routing rule answers four questions: 1. **When** should I print? (the *trigger event*) 2. **What kind of document** is this? (the *function*) 3. **Which orders** does this apply to? (the *filter*) 4. **Which printer** should print it? (and the *priority* if multiple printers can) Here is what one rule looks like in plain English: > **When** payment is completed, print a **Receipt** for **all orders** on the **Front Counter** printer. And another: > **When** an order is created, print a **Kitchen Ticket** for orders that include items from the **Food** category on the **Kitchen Hot Line** printer. You can add as many of these as you need. They run in parallel — one order can produce a receipt at the front counter and a kitchen ticket at the back at the same time. ## Visual: one order, multiple printers ``` ┌─────────────┐ │ Order │ │ #001234 │ │ │ │ 2× Burger │ ← Food category │ 1× Beer │ ← Drinks category └──────┬──────┘ │ │ Trigger: Order Created ▼ ┌──────────────┐ │ Routing Rule │ │ Engine │ └──┬────────┬──┘ │ │ ▼ ▼ ┌────────┐ ┌────────┐ │Kitchen │ │ Bar │ │ Hot │ │ Drinks │ │ Line │ │ │ └────────┘ └────────┘ ``` The kitchen sees only food. The bar sees only drinks. Both happen automatically the moment the order is created. ## Trigger events A trigger event is the moment in the order lifecycle when the print should fire. | Trigger | When it fires | Typical use | |---|---|---| | **Order Created** | Right after a new order is saved | Kitchen tickets, prep slips | | **Order Updated** | Whenever items are added, changed, or removed | Re-print kitchen slip with the changes | | **Order Completed** | When the order is marked complete | Bill out, take-away label | | **Payment Completed** | When the customer has paid | Customer receipt | | **Manual** | Only when staff taps "Reprint" | Manual reprints from order detail | You'll typically use **Order Created** for kitchen tickets and **Payment Completed** for receipts. ## Printer functions A function describes what kind of document the printer is for. Fuze Store uses this for failover (described below) and for the printer's icon in the UI. | Function | What it's for | |---|---| | **Receipt** | Customer-facing receipts with totals, payment, and change | | **Kitchen** | Hot kitchen tickets — items, modifiers, special instructions | | **Bar** | Drink slips for the bar station | | **Label** | Take-away labels and packaging stickers | | **Queue** | Customer queue tickets ("Now serving #42") | ## Filters Filters let you say "this rule only applies to certain orders". Without a filter, the rule applies to **every** order. Filters are how you split kitchen vs bar, or how you skip take-away orders. | Filter | Example | |---|---| | **All orders** | The default — print for every order. | | **By order type** | Only In-Store, only Take-Away, only Delivery, etc. | | **By category** | Only when the order contains items from "Food", "Drinks", "Desserts"… | | **By product** | Only when the order contains a specific product (e.g. "Birthday Cake") | You can mix filters — for example, "By category: Food **and** by order type: In-Store" only prints when both are true. **Coffee shop example.** Two printers: one in the kitchen, one at the bar. Create two rules — one with category filter "Food" pointed at the kitchen, one with category filter "Drinks" pointed at the bar. Both fire on **Order Created**. Done. ## Priority and failover If you have **two printers that could both handle the same job** (say, two receipt printers at busy front counters), use **priority** to say which one to try first. - Priority is a number from `1` (highest) to `100` (lowest). - Fuze Store always tries the highest-priority printer first. - If that printer fails (offline, paper jam, network issue), Fuze Store **automatically tries the next priority printer with the same function** — this is called *failover*. - A friendly "Failover active" toast appears so you know the backup printer kicked in. The printer-level **Default** setting is separate from routing priority. Default is only used when no routing rule matches. It does not make that printer first when multiple rules have the same trigger and function. ``` Priority 1 ──> ┌──────────┐ │ Receipt │ │ #1 │ ← offline ✗ └──────────┘ │ │ failover ▼ Priority 2 ──> ┌──────────┐ │ Receipt │ │ #2 │ ← prints ✓ └──────────┘ ``` If **all** printers for a function fail, the job goes into the [print queue](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) and is automatically reprinted when a printer comes back online. ## Creating a routing rule Open **Store → Printers** and tap the printer you want to add the rule to. Open the **Routing Rules** tab and tap **Add Routing Rule**. Choose the **Function** (Receipt, Kitchen, Bar, Label, or Queue). Choose the **Trigger Event** (when this rule should fire). Set the **Filter**. Pick **All orders** for a simple setup, or use category / product / order type filters to narrow it down. Set the **Priority** (default `1`). Only matters if you'll have a backup printer for the same function. Set the number of **Copies** (1-10) — useful for kitchen prep tickets that need a duplicate. Tap **Save**. The rule is live immediately. ## Editing or removing a routing rule You can edit or delete a routing rule from the same Routing Rules tab. Toggling **Active** off keeps the rule in place but stops it from running — handy for temporarily disabling a printer without losing the configuration. Changing or deleting a rule does not affect orders that have already been placed and printed. It only affects future orders. ## Examples ### Restaurant with kitchen and bar | # | Function | Trigger | Filter | Printer | |---|---|---|---|---| | 1 | Receipt | Payment Completed | All orders | Front Counter | | 2 | Kitchen | Order Created | Category: Food | Kitchen Hot Line | | 3 | Bar | Order Created | Category: Drinks | Bar | ### Retail with two backup receipt printers | # | Function | Trigger | Filter | Priority | Printer | |---|---|---|---|---|---| | 1 | Receipt | Payment Completed | All orders | 1 | Front Counter A | | 2 | Receipt | Payment Completed | All orders | 2 | Front Counter B | If A goes down, B takes over automatically. ### Take-away only labels | # | Function | Trigger | Filter | Printer | |---|---|---|---|---| | 1 | Label | Order Completed | Order type: Take-Away | Label Printer | ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) - [Troubleshooting](/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting) --- # Printer Troubleshooting > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/app/printer/troubleshooting # Printer Troubleshooting This page is a quick-fix guide for the most common printer problems. Each section follows the same format: **Symptom → Likely cause → How to fix**. If nothing here helps, contact Fuze Store support with the printer model, the connection type, and any error messages you see. ## My printer is not detected ### Bluetooth printer not appearing **Symptom**: You tap **Add Printer → Bluetooth → Scan** and your printer doesn't show up. **Likely cause**: The printer isn't in pairing mode, Bluetooth is off, or another device is already paired to the printer. **How to fix**: Power-cycle the printer and put it back into pairing mode (usually a long press of the feed button — check the manual). Make sure Bluetooth is **on** in your phone or tablet settings, and that you've granted Bluetooth permission to the Fuze Store app. Forget any other Bluetooth pairings to this printer — most thermal printers only allow **one** active pairing at a time. Stay within ~10 meters of the printer while pairing. Tap **Scan** again. ### Network (TCP/IP) printer connection failed **Symptom**: You enter the IP address and port but **Test Print** fails. **Likely cause**: Wrong IP, wrong port, or the printer is on a different network. **How to fix**: Print a network self-test page from the printer to confirm its **IP address**. Make sure your POS device and the printer are on the **same Wi-Fi network**. Some stores have separate "guest" and "staff" networks — both devices must be on the staff one. Confirm the port is **9100** (the thermal printer default) unless your printer's manual says otherwise. From a laptop on the same network, try opening `http://<printer-ip>:9100` in a browser. If nothing happens (which is expected), at least confirm the address can be reached. If the connection immediately fails, the printer or your network is the problem. ### USB printer not found by the LAN Bridge **Symptom**: You select **USB** in Fuze Store, tap **Discover USB Printers**, and no printers appear. **Likely cause**: The LAN Bridge is not running, the USB cable is loose, or the LAN Bridge can't access USB devices on its host computer. **How to fix**: Make sure the **Discover USB Printers** button is active (not grayed out). If it's grayed out, your device is not connected to the Fuze Store Hub — open **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub** and confirm the connection shows paired and green. Confirm Fuze Store Hub is running on the Hub computer. Open `https://<hub-ip>:18443/health` in a browser (accept the one-time self-signed certificate warning) — you should see `{ "status": "ok" }`. Reseat the USB cable, or try a different USB port on the Hub computer. On **Windows**: Fuze Store Hub will normally print through the Windows Print Spooler, so make sure your printer is installed with its manufacturer's driver and visible under **Settings → Bluetooth & devices → Printers & scanners**. You do not need to replace the driver. On **macOS**: if the printer shows up in **System Settings → Printers & Scanners**, remove it there. macOS claims the USB device through CUPS on plug-in and prevents Fuze Store Hub from talking to it directly. On **Linux**: USB printers need access permissions. Install the Fuze Store Hub udev rules (or run the Hub with elevated permissions for a quick test). Restart Fuze Store Hub after any of the above, then tap **Discover USB Printers** again in the app. If discovery still shows nothing, you can add the printer manually. Find the Vendor ID and Product ID from your printer's manual, Device Manager (Windows), or `lsusb` (Linux/macOS), and enter them as 4-character hex codes (e.g. `04b8`, `0202`). Fuze Store Hub exposes `GET /info` which shows exactly which USB path is available on its host (`libusb` vs `windowsSpooler`). Useful for diagnosis: `curl -k https://<hub-ip>:18443/info` (the `-k` skips the self-signed-cert check). ## My receipts are garbled or showing strange characters **Symptom**: Receipts print with random symbols, square boxes, or question marks where letters should be. **Likely cause**: The encoding is wrong for the language you're printing. **How to fix**: Open the printer's edit page in **Store → Printers**. Change the **Encoding** field. Use: | Language | Encoding | |---|---| | English / Spanish / French / Latin scripts | `UTF-8` (default) | | Chinese | `GB18030` or `GBK` | | Japanese | `Shift_JIS` | | Korean | `EUC-KR` | | Older / US-only printers | `CP437` | Save and **Test Print** to verify. ## The wrong printer is printing my receipt **Symptom**: Drinks are printing in the kitchen, or food orders are landing on the bar printer. **Likely cause**: A routing rule is misconfigured — the filter is wrong, or a rule was created for the wrong printer. **How to fix**: Open **Store → Printers**, then tap the printer that received the wrong receipt. Open its **Routing Rules** tab. Check each rule's **Function**, **Trigger Event**, and **Filter**. Are the categories correct? Is "All orders" toggled on when it shouldn't be? Edit or delete the rule, then test by ringing up a sample order. For a guide on setting up routing rules properly, see [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules). ## I'm getting duplicate prints **Symptom**: Two copies of the same receipt or kitchen ticket appear when only one should. **Likely cause**: Two routing rules overlap — for example, one rule says "Receipt on Payment Completed for all orders" and another says "Receipt on Payment Completed for In-Store orders". An in-store payment fires both. **How to fix**: Open **Store → Printers** and review the rules on every printer. Look for two or more rules with the **same Function** and the **same Trigger Event** that could both match a single order. Delete or narrow one of the overlapping rules. Place a test order to confirm only one print fires. If you actually want two copies of the same receipt, set the **Copies** field on a single routing rule to 2 instead of creating a duplicate rule. ## Print queue is not draining **Symptom**: The Status & Queue card on the printer detail page shows queued jobs that never go through, even after the printer is back online. **Likely cause**: The LAN Bridge or the connection to it is still down, or the printer is offline at the hardware level. **How to fix**: Check the **connection badge** at the top of the app. If it shows "LAN disconnected", the LAN Bridge is the problem — restart it and reload the app. Check the printer's hardware: power, paper, no paper jam, and that the cable or Wi-Fi is intact. Open the printer detail page and tap **Test Print**. If that fails, the queue won't drain either. Once the printer is healthy, tap **Retry** on each failed job — or wait 5 seconds for Fuze Store to flush the queue automatically. ## The cutter isn't cutting the paper **Symptom**: Receipts print but never cut — you have to tear them by hand. **Likely cause**: Either the printer doesn't have a cutter, or the cutter capability is turned off in Fuze Store. **How to fix**: Open the printer's edit page. Find the **Capabilities** section and make sure **Cutter** is toggled **on**. If your printer has a cutter and it still doesn't work, check the printer manual — some models need a specific firmware version or have a physical cutter switch. ## A toast says "Failover active" **Symptom**: After a print, a toast appears that says **"Failover active — receipt printed on backup"**. **Likely cause**: This is **not an error**. It means your primary printer for that function failed, and Fuze Store automatically printed on the next-priority backup printer instead. **How to fix**: Check your primary printer when you have a moment. It probably ran out of paper, lost its connection, or had a paper jam. The receipt was already printed safely on the backup. For more details, see [Routing Rules → Priority and failover](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules#priority-and-failover). ## Receipts are clipped or only half-filling the paper **Symptom**: Receipts are missing the right side of the page, or they only fill the left half of the paper. **Likely cause**: The **paper width** in Fuze Store doesn't match the actual physical paper width. **How to fix**: Open the printer's edit page. Set **Paper Width** to either `58mm` or `80mm` to match what's loaded in the printer. Most receipt printers are 80mm; small portable printers are usually 58mm. Save and **Test Print** to confirm. ## Bluetooth permission denied on iPhone or Android **Symptom**: You see **"Bluetooth permission required"** even after granting permission. **Likely cause**: System permission was denied or revoked outside the app. **How to fix**: On **iOS**: open Settings → Fuze Store → toggle **Bluetooth** on. On **Android**: open Settings → Apps → Fuze Store → Permissions → enable **Nearby devices** (or **Bluetooth**, depending on Android version). Force-quit and reopen the Fuze Store app. ## Getting more help If none of the above fixes your issue: 1. Check the printer manufacturer's documentation. Most quirks are model-specific. 2. Confirm your printer supports **ESC/POS** commands — Fuze Store uses ESC/POS, the standard for thermal printers. If your printer needs a proprietary driver, it won't work. 3. Run a **Test Print** from the printer detail page and see what (if anything) the printer does. 4. Contact Fuze Store support with: - Your printer's brand and model - The connection type (Bluetooth / TCP / USB / Serial) - The exact error message or toast - The steps to reproduce the issue ## Related guides - [Printers Overview](/docs/app/printer/overview) - [Connecting a Printer](/docs/app/printer/connecting-a-printer) - [Routing Rules](/docs/app/printer/routing-rules) - [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) - [Print Queue & Status](/docs/app/printer/print-queue-and-status) --- # Getting Started with Fuze Store POS > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/getting-started # Getting Started with Fuze Store POS This guide walks you through setting up Fuze Store POS from scratch. Follow the steps below and you will be ready to serve your first customer. ## First Time You Open the App The very first time you open Fuze Store on your phone or tablet, you will see a short **welcome carousel** introducing the four pillars of the app — Welcome, POS, Inventory, and Insights. Swipe through the slides or tap **Skip**; either way you will only see this carousel once per device. After that, the app remembers you have completed the introduction and takes you straight to **Sign in** or your store dashboard on every subsequent launch. ## Setup Checklist Complete these steps in order to get your store up and running: 1. **[Create an Account](/docs/account/create-an-account)** -- Sign up for Fuze Store POS. 2. **[Create Your First Store](/docs/store/creating-a-store)** -- Set up your store name, currency, and business type. 3. **[Add Your First Product or Service](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product)** -- Enter an item, set a price, and assign a category. 4. **[Add Store Address](/docs/store/adding-store-address)** -- Enter your store's address for receipts and records. 5. **[Set Up Store Preferences](/docs/store/setup-your-store-preference)** -- Adjust settings that control how your store operates. 6. **[Add Payment Methods](/docs/store/payment-method/adding-payment-methods)** -- Configure how you accept payments (cash, card, etc.). 7. **[Invite Staff](/docs/store/staff/creating-a-staff)** -- Add team members and assign their roles. 8. **[Set Up Taxes](/docs/store/tax/creating-a-tax)** -- Add your local tax rates if they apply. 9. **[Create Discounts or Gift Cards](/docs/store/discount/creating-a-discount)** -- Set up promotions or gift cards for your customers. 10. **[Start Your First Sale](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register)** -- Learn how to ring up sales and process orders. Once you finish these steps, your store is ready for business. ## Optional: Install Fuze Store Hub on your back-office computer If you plan to use thermal printers, a kitchen display, or a customer-facing display in your store, install the **Fuze Store Hub** desktop app on your back-office computer. The Hub bridges your phones / tablets to local hardware over your store's WiFi, and works offline once paired. Grab the right installer for your operating system from the [Downloads page](/downloads), then follow the [Fuze Store Hub guide](/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub) to pair it with your store. You don't need the Hub for basic POS operations on a phone or tablet — it's optional, and only required when local hardware enters the picture. --- # Adding Printers > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/adding-printers # Adding Printers Fuze Store Hub supports the four most common printer connections. Once a printer is added here, every POS tablet on your network can use it. ## Supported printers Almost any **ESC/POS thermal printer** works — Epson TM-series, Star TSP-series, Xprinter, Rongta, and most 58mm / 80mm receipt printers. ![The Add Printer dialog in Fuze Store Hub showing Name, Connection Type (USB, Network, Serial, Bluetooth), and Port fields](/docs/hub/hub-add-printer-form.png) ## Adding a USB or network printer **USB** — connect the cable to the Fuze Store Hub computer and turn the printer on. **Network** — connect the printer to your router via Ethernet or Wi-Fi, following the printer's manual. Note its IP address. Click **Printers** in the sidebar, then click **Discover** in the top right. Fuze Store Hub scans your USB ports and local network. Any compatible printer shows up in the list. Click **Register** next to the printer. You'll be asked to give it a name like **Receipt — Counter** or **Kitchen — Hot Line**. Back on the Printers page, click **Test print** next to your new printer. A test receipt should come out within a second or two. If nothing happens, check [Troubleshooting](/docs/hub/troubleshooting). ## Assigning printers to receipts or kitchen tickets ![The Printer Assignment screen in Fuze Store Hub showing receipt and kitchen ticket routing toggles for each registered printer](/docs/hub/hub-printer-assignment.png) Printer *assignments* (which document goes to which printer) live in the mobile app: 1. Open **Fuze Store → Configurations → Printers** on a paired tablet 2. Pick a printer 3. Toggle which documents it should print — **Receipts**, **Kitchen tickets**, **Bill out**, etc. Changes sync to Fuze Store Hub immediately. No restart needed. ## Bluetooth printers Bluetooth printers connect **directly to the tablet**, not through Fuze Store Hub. That means: - Each tablet must pair with the Bluetooth printer individually (Settings → Bluetooth on iOS/Android) - Only the tablet that's paired can print to that printer - Fuze Store Hub does **not** need to be running for Bluetooth printing Use Bluetooth for small, mobile setups (food truck, market stall). Use USB or network for fixed installations. --- # Connecting to Your Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/connecting-to-your-store # Connecting to Your Store Fuze Store Hub talks to two sides of your business: 1. **Your Fuze Store cloud account** — for plan info, add-ons, kitchen ticket sync, and updates. 2. **Your POS devices on the local Wi-Fi** — for printing, kitchen displays, and customer screens. This page explains the pieces involved. For the actual pairing walkthroughs, see [Pairing the Mobile App](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app) and [Pairing the Browser App](/docs/hub/pairing-browser-app). ![The Configurations › Integrations › Fuze Store Hub screen in the Fuze Store mobile app, showing the Store ID field and a Generate Activation Key button](/docs/hub/hub-connect-store-id.png) ## What identifies your store ## What identifies each device Every phone, tablet, or browser that talks to your Hub gets its **own personal key**. You generate these one at a time as you pair each device. **No more shared password.** Older versions of Fuze Store Hub used one shared "LAN token" for every device. Now each device has its own key, so you can revoke a single phone (e.g. lost or stolen) without disturbing the others. ## Pairing a POS device — quick reference For the full walk-through, follow the right page below: - **Phone or tablet** (iOS / Android) → [Pairing the Mobile App](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app) - **Browser** (Chrome / Edge / Safari at `store.fuze-store.com`) → [Pairing the Browser App](/docs/hub/pairing-browser-app) The high-level flow is the same on both: Open **Fuze Store Hub → Settings → Network**, click **Generate code** in the **Pair the browser** card. An 8-digit code appears. Open Fuze Store on the device, walk through the pairing wizard, and type (or scan) the 8-digit code. The pair code is exchanged for a 30-day session key that lives only on that one device. The device shows a green "Connected" badge. ![The Paired Devices list in Fuze Store Hub showing a connected MacBook with a green status badge, pair date, and a Revoke button](/docs/hub/hub-connect-paired-devices.png) ## Managing paired devices Open **Fuze Store Hub → Settings → Network → Pair the browser**. You'll see a count of active sessions and a list of paired devices. From here you can: - **Revoke a single device** — useful if a phone is lost. The other devices keep working. - **Revoke all** — kicks every paired device off at once. They'll need to walk through the pairing wizard again. Revoking takes effect immediately. The next request from the revoked device fails and the device is bumped back to the pairing screen. ## Does Fuze Store Hub need the internet? Most of the time, **no**. Receipts, kitchen tickets, and customer display updates all flow over your local Wi-Fi. The cloud connection is only used for: - Plan / add-on updates (so the Hub knows which features your subscription includes) - Kitchen Display sync (optional — only if you also use KDS in the cloud) - Automatic Hub updates If your internet drops, everything local keeps working. Kitchen tickets queue up locally and push to the cloud when you reconnect. --- # Customer-Facing Display (CFD) > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/customer-facing-display-cfd # Customer-Facing Display (CFD) A **Customer-Facing Display** is a second screen that faces your customer at the counter. It shows the live cart, running total, payment status, and a queue of recent orders. ## What you need - Any screen that can run a web browser — an iPad, cheap Android tablet, an old laptop, a smart TV with a Chromecast, etc. - The CFD add-on active on your store - **Fuze Store Hub** running on a shop computer, with your POS tablet paired to it — the display updates travel over your local Wi-Fi through the Hub ## Setting it up On the CFD screen, open the Fuze Store mobile app and go to **Displays → Customer Display** (or on a browser, go to your store's CFD URL from **Configurations → Display**). ![The Configurations › Display screen in Fuze Store showing the Customer Display URL field with the store's unique CFD web address](/docs/hub/hub-cfd-setup-url.png) The POS tablet (the one your staff uses) drives the CFD. Open **Fuze Store → Displays → Customer Display** on the POS and tap the pair icon, then scan the QR code from the CFD screen. ![The customer-facing display screen showing a pairing QR code and a 4-digit PIN to confirm on the POS tablet](/docs/hub/hub-cfd-pairing.png) Once paired, anything you add to the POS cart shows up on the customer screen instantly — over your local Wi-Fi via Fuze Store Hub. If the POS tablet has **Use this Hub** turned off, it will stay paired but pause local CFD updates until you turn Hub use back on. In **Configurations → Display → Customer Display** on the POS, you can choose what shows when no order is active: - **Queue** — rotating list of recent orders ready for pickup - **Logo** — your store logo on a full-screen background - **Auto** — queue during busy hours, logo otherwise ![The idle screen customization panel in Fuze Store showing Logo upload, background color picker, and Queue / Logo / Auto idle mode options](/docs/hub/hub-cfd-idle-screen.png) ## Does CFD need Fuze Store Hub? **Yes.** The customer display updates over your local Wi-Fi through Fuze Store Hub — the POS tablet sends each cart and payment update to the Hub, which relays it to the customer screen. If the Hub isn't running and paired (or **Use this Hub** is turned off on the POS), the display won't update. Running on your local network this way gives you: - **Instant updates** — cart changes appear on the display with no internet round-trip - **Works during internet outages** — as long as both devices are on the same Wi-Fi - **Lower cloud usage** — display updates never leave your shop --- # First-Time Setup > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/first-time-setup # First-Time Setup The first time you open Fuze Store Hub, you'll see a **five-slide welcome carousel**. It takes about a minute to complete. You can change anything later from Settings. ![The Fuze Store Hub first-time setup carousel showing the Welcome slide with a brief description of printing, kitchen display, and customer display features, and a Next button](/docs/hub/hub-first-time-setup-carousel.png) Have your Fuze Store **mobile app** open on a tablet or phone beside you. You'll generate one **activation key** there (in **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub**) and paste it into the Hub. Before the slides, Fuze Store Hub asks you to **sign in** with your Fuze Store account and **pick the store** this computer will serve. You must be the store owner, an organization admin, or a staff member with **Hub Admin** permission. Once you've chosen the store, the welcome carousel begins. ## The five slides Quick overview of what Fuze Store Hub does: **printing, kitchen display, and customer display**. No input needed — just click **Next**. Paste your **activation key** — a short code you generate in the mobile app under **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub**. It's valid for 72 hours and links this computer to the store you selected. Your store is already chosen from the sign-in step, so there's no Store ID to copy. Once the key is accepted, Fuze Store Hub gets its own secure connection to your store automatically. Click the **?** next to any label for a plain-English explainer. In most cases you can leave everything on the defaults — Fuze Store Hub listens on `127.0.0.1:18443` over HTTPS — and just click **Next**. To let phones and tablets on the same Wi-Fi reach this computer, turn on **LAN sharing**, which widens the listener to your local network address (`0.0.0.0:18443`). Only change the bind address, port, or cloud API URL if your network administrator told you to — tap **Show advanced network settings**. Toggle any optional modules you want: - **Kitchen Display (KDS) sync** — keeps a local copy of tickets so the kitchen screen works during internet outages. Only needed if you're using the KDS add-on. You can skip this slide entirely if you don't need those features. A checklist shows what to do next: plug in a printer, pair a POS terminal, send a test print. Click **Finish setup** and Fuze Store Hub will start running in the background. ## Where does the setup live? Everything you enter is saved locally on this computer, inside your user profile: - **Mac** — `~/Library/Application Support/Fuze Store Hub/` - **Windows** — `%APPDATA%\Fuze Store Hub\` - **Linux** — `~/.config/Fuze Store Hub/` Secrets (your device token and pairing keys) are encrypted with your operating system's secure store. ## Changing settings later Everything you set up is editable from **Settings** in the sidebar. Changes to network or modules trigger a quick server restart — Fuze Store Hub tells you when that happens. --- # Installing Fuze Store Hub > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub # Installing Fuze Store Hub Fuze Store Hub is a small desktop app that runs on one computer in your store. It acts as a **bridge** between your POS tablets and your printer, kitchen display, and customer-facing screen. You only need to install it once, on one computer. Your tablets and phones connect to it over your local Wi‑Fi. ![The Fuze Store Hub app window on first launch, showing the main dashboard with a connection status panel and sidebar navigation](/docs/hub/hub-app-window.png) You only need Fuze Store Hub if you want to print receipts, use a kitchen display, or show a customer-facing screen. If you are selling online or purely on mobile, you can skip this entirely. ## What you need - A Windows PC, Mac, or Linux computer that stays in the store - Wi‑Fi or wired network that your POS tablets also use - About 5 minutes ## Download the installer Open your browser and go to **fuze-store.com/downloads**. Pick the installer that matches your computer. | Computer | File | | --- | --- | | Mac (Apple Silicon — M1/M2/M3/M4) | `Fuze-Hub-arm64.dmg` | | Mac (Intel) | `Fuze-Hub-x64.dmg` | | Windows | `Fuze-Hub-Setup.exe` | | Linux (Debian / Ubuntu) | `Fuze-Hub.deb` | | Linux (other) | `Fuze-Hub.AppImage` | ![The Fuze Store Hub download page showing Mac, Windows, and Linux installer options with file sizes and download buttons](/docs/hub/hub-download-page.png) **Mac** — double-click the DMG, then drag **Fuze Store Hub** into the Applications folder. The first time you open it, right-click the icon and choose **Open** (this is a one-time Gatekeeper step). **Windows** — double-click the `.exe` and follow the installer. Create desktop and Start menu shortcuts when prompted. **Linux** — install the `.deb` with `sudo apt install ./Fuze-Hub.deb`, or make the `AppImage` executable with `chmod +x` and run it. ![The Fuze Store Hub installer on macOS showing the drag-to-Applications prompt with the app icon and Applications folder shortcut](/docs/hub/hub-installer-mac.png) Launch the app. You'll see the welcome carousel — move on to [First-Time Setup](/docs/hub/first-time-setup). ## Do I need an account? No separate account. You sign in with your existing Fuze Store login — you must be the store owner, an organization admin, or a staff member with **Hub Admin** permission. To link this computer to your store, you'll paste a short **activation key** that you generate in the mobile app. We'll walk through it in the next step. --- # Kitchen Display (KDS) > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/kitchen-display-kds # Kitchen Display (KDS) Fuze Store Hub can power a **Kitchen Display System** — a dedicated screen in the kitchen that shows every incoming order in real time, with timers, alerts, and color-coded urgency. ## Two ways to use KDS **Cloud mode (default)** — tickets sync through the Fuze Store cloud. Works even if Fuze Store Hub isn't running, as long as each kitchen device has internet. **Local mode** — tickets are stored on Fuze Store Hub's local SQLite database and pushed to the cloud when online. Recommended when your internet is unreliable, since the kitchen keeps working during outages. Enable **Local mode** by toggling **Kitchen Display sync** during setup, or later in **Settings → Modules**. ## Setting up KDS KDS needs no separate token. Once your **Fuze Store Hub is connected to your store** (during Hub setup it gets its own secure connection), the kitchen display works automatically — there's nothing to copy or paste. KDS is an add-on. Make sure it's active for your store under **Account → Add-ons** in the mobile app or the landing dashboard. (During a free trial it's included automatically.) Install and pair **Fuze Store Hub** with your store. See [First-Time Setup](/docs/hub/first-time-setup) and [Connecting to Your Store](/docs/hub/connecting-to-your-store). The Hub's connection is the only credential KDS sync needs. For **Local mode** (tickets stored on the Hub and pushed to the cloud when online — best for unreliable internet), toggle **Kitchen Display sync** in **Fuze Store Hub → Settings → Modules**. On a screen in the kitchen (an old iPad, a laptop, a Raspberry Pi, or even the same computer), open the mobile app and go to **Fuze Store → Displays → Kitchen Display**. Tickets appear the moment orders are placed at the register. ## What appears on the kitchen screen - **Ticket header**: order number, customer name or table, time placed - **Items**: quantity, modifiers, notes - **Status**: Pending → Preparing → Completed - **Timer**: elapsed since the ticket was created, color-coded by alert thresholds Long-press a ticket to **void** or **recall** it. Changes sync back to the POS. ## Monitoring sync Open **Fuze Store Hub → Kitchen Display**. You'll see: - **Last sync** — when Fuze Store Hub last pushed tickets to the cloud - **Unsynced** — how many tickets are waiting (normally 0) - **Last error** — empty unless something went wrong If **Unsynced** keeps growing, check your internet connection and use **Force sync now**. Kitchen Display is an add-on. If **Settings → Modules** has the Kitchen Display sync toggle greyed out, your store doesn't have the KDS add-on active. Enable it from **Account → Add-ons** in the mobile app or landing dashboard. --- # Pairing the Browser App > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/pairing-browser-app # Pairing the Browser App If you run Fuze Store in a **web browser** (Chrome, Edge, or Safari at `store.fuze-store.com`) on the same computer as Fuze Store Hub, you'll need to pair the browser with the Hub once. Pairing gives the browser its own short-lived **session token** scoped to that browser — the same per-device model the mobile apps use. You only need this cert-trust flow on **web**. iPhone and Android tablets pair through the in-app wizard described in [Pairing the Mobile App](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app). ## Why a separate flow? Modern browsers block insecure (`http://`) requests from a secure (`https://`) page — that's called the **mixed-content policy**. The browser app is served over HTTPS, so Fuze Store Hub also serves a parallel HTTPS endpoint at `https://localhost:18443` that the browser can reach. The catch: the certificate is **self-signed**, so Chrome warns you the first time. You accept the warning once, then exchange an 8-digit code for a session token, and you're done. ## What you'll need ## The four steps In the browser, sign in to **Fuze Store** at `store.fuze-store.com`, then go to **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub**. You'll see a **Pair this browser with Fuze Store Hub** card. Click **Get started**. ![The Configurations › Integrations › Fuze Store Hub screen in Fuze Store, showing the Pair this browser with Fuze Store Hub card with a Get started button](/docs/hub/hub-pairing-browser-preferences.png) Click **Open trust page**. A new tab opens at `https://localhost:18443/health`. Chrome shows a warning that the connection is private to your computer — that's expected. Click **Advanced** in the warning, then **Proceed to localhost (unsafe)**. You'll see a small JSON response confirming the Hub is up. Close that tab and click **Verify connection** back in the wizard. ![Google Chrome showing a "Your connection is not private" warning for localhost with the Advanced link and Proceed to localhost (unsafe) option highlighted](/docs/hub/hub-pairing-browser-cert-warning.png) "Unsafe" sounds scary, but the connection only ever leaves your computer's loopback network — it doesn't go to the internet. Chrome warns the same way for any self-signed cert. You only do this once per browser. If you need to change the Hub's HTTPS port (the default is **18443**), expand the **Advanced** section in this step and edit it before clicking Verify. On the Hub computer, open **Fuze Store Hub → Settings → Network**. Find the **Pair the browser** card and click **Generate code**. An 8-digit code appears with a 5-minute countdown. ![The Fuze Store Hub Network settings screen showing the Pair the browser card with an 8-digit one-time code and a 5-minute countdown timer](/docs/hub/hub-pairing-browser-code.png) Back in the browser, you have two ways to bring the code over: - **Type it** — read the 8 digits off the Hub and type them into the wizard. - **Scan the QR** — click **Scan QR code** in the wizard, allow camera access, and point the camera at the QR shown beside the code in the Hub. The wizard reads the code automatically. Either way, the wizard submits the code and exchanges it for a 30-day session token. The token is saved to your store preferences so it survives a tab refresh. The wizard lands on a **This browser is paired** screen. Printing, kitchen display, and customer display now work from the browser tab. Click **Save** at the bottom of Preferences to persist the change. If you ever want to pair a different browser or revoke this one, click **Disconnect** in the wizard. To rotate without losing settings, click **Re-pair** — it walks you through the same flow with a new code. ## What's actually stored? | Where | What | How long | | --- | --- | --- | | Browser preferences (cloud) | 32-byte hex session token | 30 days, then you re-pair | | Fuze Store Hub on this computer | Hash of the same token + paired-at timestamp | Until you click **Disconnect** or **Revoke all** in Hub Settings | The 8-digit pairing code itself is **single-use** and **expires after 5 minutes** — even if you typed it into the wizard, it can't be replayed. ## Common errors ## Revoking a paired browser In Hub → Settings → Network → **Pair the browser**, the card shows the count of active sessions. Click **Revoke (N)** to invalidate every paired browser at once. They'll fall back to the wizard the next time they try a Hub call. --- # Pairing the Mobile App > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app # Pairing the Mobile App This guide walks you through connecting **Fuze Store** on your phone or tablet to **Fuze Store Hub** running on your store computer. Once connected, the device prints receipts, sends kitchen tickets, and updates the customer-facing display in real time — all over your local Wi-Fi, without going through the internet. You only need this on iPhones and Android tablets. If you use Fuze Store in a **web browser**, follow [Pairing the Browser App](/docs/hub/pairing-browser-app) instead. ## Before you start ## How pairing works (in plain English) ![The Fuze Store mobile app showing the Hub Discovery list with a discovered Hub named "Counter Hub" and its local IP address](/docs/hub/hub-pairing-mobile-discovery.png) Think of pairing like sharing a Wi-Fi password — but better. You generate a short **8-digit code** in Fuze Store Hub, type it into your phone, and the Hub gives your phone a **personal key** that works only for that phone. If a phone is lost, you can revoke just that phone's key in Hub → Settings → Network. The other paired phones keep working. ## The four steps On your phone, open **Fuze Store → Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub → Setup → Pair Device**. The app starts looking for Fuze Store Hubs on your Wi-Fi. After a few seconds, your store computer should appear in the list with its name (e.g. "Counter Hub" or your computer's name). **Tap your Hub** in the list. The next step opens automatically. **Don't see your Hub?** Some networks (especially guest Wi-Fi or networks with strict isolation rules) block this kind of discovery. Tap **Enter manually** and skip to step 2. If you tapped **Enter manually**, the app shows two text fields: - **Hub IP address** — open Fuze Store Hub on the store computer, go to **Dashboard**, and read the LAN address shown at the top (looks like `192.168.1.42`). Type that into your phone. - **HTTPS port** — usually `18443`. Only change this if you customized it in the Hub. Once both are filled in, the code field below becomes active. On the **store computer**, open **Fuze Store Hub → Settings → Network → "Pair the browser" card → Generate code**. An **8-digit code** appears with a 5-minute countdown. ![The pair code generation screen in Fuze Store Hub showing an 8-digit code, a QR code, and a 5-minute countdown timer](/docs/hub/hub-pairing-mobile-code.png) Back on your phone, type the 8 digits into the code box. The app submits the code automatically as soon as you type the last digit. Codes expire after **5 minutes** and can only be used **once**. If you wait too long or mistype, just generate a new one in the Hub. You'll see a green **Paired** card with the Hub's name. The status badge at the top of the app shows **Connected** with a green dot. That's it. Receipts, kitchen tickets, and customer display updates now flow through your Hub. If you want to stop this phone from sending anything to the Hub for a while, turn **Use this Hub** off on the same screen. The phone stays paired, and queued print or kitchen work waits until you turn it back on. If you ever want to remove this phone from the Hub completely, tap **Disconnect** on the same screen. ## What the badge colors mean After pairing, a small badge appears at the top of the app showing the connection status: ![Five connection badge states shown on the Hub status button in the Fuze Store app: green Connected, yellow Reconnecting, red Hub unreachable, gray Hub paused, and no badge for Not paired](/docs/hub/hub-pairing-mobile-badge-states.png) ## Common errors ## Pairing more devices Each phone or tablet pairs **independently**. Generate a fresh code for each one. There is no limit on the number of devices. You can see every paired device in **Hub → Settings → Network**. Each row shows the device label, when it was paired, and a **Revoke** button. ## Disconnecting a device You can disconnect from either side: - **From the phone** — open the Pair Device screen, tap **Disconnect**. The phone falls back to cloud-only mode (printing and KDS still work, but route through the internet instead of the Hub). - **From the Hub** — open **Settings → Network → Pair the browser**, find the device row, and click **Revoke**. The phone will see "Disconnected" and need to be re-paired. Revoking a device immediately kicks it off the Hub. Use this if a phone is lost or stolen — the next attempt to use it will fail and prompt for a new pair code. --- # Troubleshooting > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/troubleshooting # Troubleshooting This page covers the most common issues. If yours isn't here, export a **support bundle** (see bottom of page) and send it to support. ## Can't open the app on Mac > "Fuze Store Hub cannot be opened because Apple cannot check it for malicious software." This happens on the **first** launch of an unsigned build. **Right-click** the app in Applications and choose **Open**, then click **Open** again in the dialog. macOS remembers this choice and won't ask again. ## My tablet can't find Fuze Store Hub 1. Both devices must be on the **same Wi-Fi network**. Guest networks often block device-to-device traffic — check that. 2. In Fuze Store Hub, open **Settings → Network**. Confirm **LAN sharing is ON** and the **HTTPS port is `18443`** (the default). 3. On the tablet, open **Fuze Store → Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub → Pair Device**. Your Hub should show up in the discovery list. If it doesn't, tap **Enter manually** and type the IP address shown on the Hub's Dashboard. 4. As a sanity check, on the tablet's browser open `https://:18443/health` (replace `` with the address from your Dashboard). You should see a small text response after accepting a security warning. If even the browser can't reach it, the issue is network / firewall — see step 5. 5. If still nothing, temporarily turn off your firewall on the Fuze Store Hub computer. If that fixes it, you need to allow inbound traffic on port 18443 (see the [Network section](#firewall-settings) below). ## I paired but the badge stays yellow ("Reconnecting") The phone got a session key but can't keep a steady connection back to the Hub. Usually a Wi-Fi handoff or the Hub just restarted. The app retries automatically every few seconds. If it stays yellow for more than a minute: - Restart Fuze Store Hub on the store computer. - Re-check the Wi-Fi — sometimes the phone silently jumps to a different network (e.g. cellular hotspot, guest Wi-Fi). - If the badge flips to red ("Hub unreachable"), the phone gave up. Tap the badge for a Re-pair option. ## I paired but the badge says "Hub paused" This means the device-local Hub toggle is off. The phone is still paired, but it will not send receipts, kitchen tickets, customer display updates, health checks, or local sync to Fuze Store Hub. Open **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub** and turn **Use this Hub** back on. Queued print and kitchen actions will retry after the Hub reconnects. ## I paired and the badge is green, but printing isn't working The phone is talking to the Hub but the Hub isn't reaching the printer. Check the **Printers** page in the mobile app — each printer has its own status: - **Connected** — printer is reachable. - **Offline** — Hub can see the printer is registered but isn't responding. Power-cycle the printer. - **Unknown** — Hub hasn't tried this printer yet. Send a test print from the printer detail page. ## "Connection problem" right after typing the pair code This means the Hub didn't accept the code. Three usual causes: - **Code expired** — codes live 5 minutes. Generate a fresh one in **Hub → Settings → Network**. - **Code already used** — codes are single-use. If you typed it twice or scanned a QR twice, the second attempt fails. - **Wrong Hub** — make sure the IP / hostname your phone is pairing against is actually the Hub showing the code (only matters if you have multiple Hubs on the network). ## Printer isn't found **USB printer** - Try a different USB port. Some printers are picky. - Turn the printer off and back on with the USB cable disconnected, then reconnect. - On Windows, install the manufacturer's driver first. **Network printer** - Make sure the printer has an IP address. Most thermal printers print a self-test page on boot that shows the IP. - Ping the printer from the Fuze Store Hub computer: `ping 192.168.1.XXX`. No response = network issue. - Some printers need to be added manually by IP — use **Add manually** on the Printers page. ## Receipts print cut off or garbled - Open the printer's manual and check its **paper width** — typically 58mm or 80mm. - In the mobile app, open **Configurations → Printers**, select the printer, and set **Paper width** to match. ## Kitchen tickets aren't syncing Open **Fuze Store Hub → Kitchen Display**. Check: - **Last error** — if there's a message, it usually tells you what's wrong (bad token, no internet, etc.) - **Unsynced** — if it keeps growing, your internet is down or the Hub's connection has expired - Click **Force sync now** to retry If the error says **unauthorized** or **invalid token**, re-run Hub activation — generate a fresh **activation key** in the mobile app (**Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub**) and reconnect the Hub. KDS rides the Hub's own connection, so there's no separate token to paste. ## Firewall settings If your operating system's firewall is blocking Fuze Store Hub: - **macOS** — System Settings → Network → Firewall → allow incoming connections for **Fuze Store Hub** - **Windows** — when prompted on first run, check both **Private** and **Public** networks - **Linux** (ufw) — `sudo ufw allow 18443/tcp` ## Tray icon shows red The tray icon in the menu bar reflects server health: - 🟢 Green — everything OK - 🟡 Yellow — some services degraded (e.g. cloud offline but LAN still works) - 🔴 Red — the embedded server has crashed ![The Fuze Store Hub tray icon in four states: green circle (all OK), yellow circle (some services degraded), red circle (server crashed), and grey circle (app starting up)](/docs/hub/hub-troubleshoot-tray-colors.png) Click the tray icon to open Fuze Store Hub and check **Logs** for details. Restart the app if needed. ## Still stuck? Export a support bundle Sidebar → **Logs** → **Export support bundle**. Fuze Store Hub creates a ZIP file containing up to 7 days of logs, your printer inventory, and system diagnostics. **No tokens or secrets are included.** Send the ZIP to **support@fuze-store.com** with a short description of what's wrong. --- # Updates & Maintenance > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/hub/updates-and-maintenance # Updates & Maintenance ## Automatic updates Fuze Store Hub checks for updates every few hours. When one is available: 1. You see a small notification in the app 2. The update downloads in the background (no disruption) 3. The next time you restart Fuze Store Hub, the new version takes effect ![The Fuze Store Hub update notification banner at the top of the app reading "A new version is available — Restart to update" with a Restart now button](/docs/hub/hub-updates-notification.png) You can change the update channel in **Settings → About**: - **Stable** (default) — production releases, tested for weeks - **Beta** — early access to new features, released weekly ![The Fuze Store Hub Settings › About screen showing the Update Channel dropdown with Stable selected and a Check for updates button](/docs/hub/hub-updates-channel.png) Stay on **Stable** unless you're helping us test new features. Beta can include bugs. ## Manual update check Open **Settings → About → Check for updates**. If a new version is available, it downloads and you'll be prompted to restart. ## What gets stored locally Fuze Store Hub stores everything in your OS user profile: | File | Purpose | | --- | --- | | `config.json` | Your Store ID, network settings, and feature toggles | | `secrets.json` | Encrypted device token, device ID, and pairing keys | | `data/print-queue.db` | Persistent print queue (SQLite) | | `data/kds.db` | Local kitchen tickets (SQLite) | | `data/logs/fuze-store-hub.log` | Rolling server logs (5 MB × 3 files) | Locations: - **Mac** — `~/Library/Application Support/Fuze Store Hub/` - **Windows** — `%APPDATA%\Fuze Store Hub\` - **Linux** — `~/.config/Fuze Store Hub/` ## Backing up For most users, **no backup is needed** — everything important lives in the Fuze Store cloud. The local databases are transient working copies that auto-rebuild. If you really want a backup (e.g. before a major OS upgrade), zip the entire user data folder above and keep it somewhere safe. ## Starting Fuze Store Hub automatically By default, Fuze Store Hub does **not** start when you sign in to the computer. To change that: - Open **Settings → General** - Toggle **Launch at startup** on - Optionally toggle **Start minimized to tray** so it doesn't pop up every time This is the recommended setup for store computers — Fuze Store Hub starts with the OS and lives silently in the tray. ## Uninstalling **Mac** — drag **Fuze Store Hub** from Applications to the Trash. Then optionally delete `~/Library/Application Support/Fuze Store Hub/` to remove stored preferences. **Windows** — **Start → Settings → Apps → Installed apps → Fuze Store Hub → Uninstall**. **Linux** — `sudo apt remove fuze-store-hub` (for .deb installs) or just delete the AppImage. Uninstalling does **not** affect your Fuze Store cloud data. You can reinstall any time and re-pair tablets. --- # Downloading Fuze Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/other/downloads # Downloading Fuze Store Fuze Store ships in two pieces. Most stores only need the first; bigger setups also install the second. ## 1. The Fuze Store mobile app The mobile app is your **POS terminal**. It runs on phones and tablets and is what your staff actually use to take orders. - **iOS** — install from the App Store. - **Android** — install from Google Play. - **Web** — open `app.fuze-store.com` in any modern browser (Chrome, Safari, Edge, Firefox). Useful for back-office tasks on a laptop, or for KDS / CFD displays running in a browser tab. The web build supports almost everything the native build does — POS, reports, customers, inventory — but **Bluetooth printers are native-only** because the Web Bluetooth API doesn't have ESC/POS support across all browsers. ## 2. The Fuze Store Hub desktop app The Fuze Store Hub is an **optional companion** that runs on a back-office computer in your store. It bridges your phones and tablets to local hardware: - **Thermal printers** — connect via USB, network, or serial. The Hub turns them into LAN-shared printers your mobile app can use without Bluetooth pairing. - **Kitchen Display System (KDS)** — runs the kitchen screen in offline-first mode using a local database that syncs to the cloud when online. - **Customer-Facing Display (CFD)** — drives a second screen for the customer with cart contents and totals. You only need the Hub if you have local hardware to connect. If you're running Fuze Store on phones / tablets only, with Bluetooth printers, you can skip the Hub. ## Getting the Hub installer Open the [Downloads page](/downloads) on this site. You'll find installers for: - **macOS** — universal `.dmg` (Apple Silicon + Intel). Drag the app to your Applications folder. - **Windows** — NSIS `.exe` installer. Run as administrator and follow the prompts. - **Linux** — `.AppImage` (portable, no install) or `.deb` (Debian / Ubuntu). Each download links to its installer page on the [Fuze Store Hub guide](/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub) so you can verify your system requirements before downloading. ## After installing the Hub 1. Launch the Hub. You'll be greeted by a 5-slide onboarding carousel that walks you through the basics. 2. **Sign in** with the same account you use on the mobile app. You need to be the store owner, an org owner / admin, or a staff member with the **Hub Admin** permission to sign in. 3. **Pick the store** the Hub will serve. A single Hub install can host multiple stores — each gets its own data folder, so they don't cross over. 4. **Pair your mobile devices** using a short pairing code. See [Pairing your mobile app](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app). Full walkthrough: [Installing the Fuze Store Hub](/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub). ## What if the Hub goes offline? The Hub works **offline-first** for KDS and printer routing. If your store's internet drops, your kitchen screen and printers keep working off the local database; the Hub syncs back to the cloud as soon as the connection returns. The **session-cache** the Hub keeps for sign-in is good for 30 days by default — your staff don't have to re-authenticate every shift. ## Updating The Hub updates itself in the background when a new version is released. The mobile app updates through the App Store / Google Play. ## Troubleshooting - **Installer is blocked on macOS** — open `System Settings → Privacy & Security` and click **Open Anyway** under the blocked app message. The Hub is signed by Fuze Store, but Gatekeeper occasionally complains on first launch. - **Installer is blocked on Windows** — SmartScreen may show a "Windows protected your PC" warning. Click **More info → Run anyway**. The installer is code-signed. - **Don't see your printer** — see [Adding printers](/docs/hub/adding-printers). - **Mobile pairing fails** — see [Pairing your mobile app](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app) and [Troubleshooting](/docs/hub/troubleshooting). ## Related guides - [Installing the Fuze Store Hub](/docs/hub/installing-fuze-store-hub) - [Pairing your mobile app](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app) - [Adding printers](/docs/hub/adding-printers) - [Getting Started with Fuze Store POS](/docs/getting-started) --- # How Account Subscription Works > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/other/how-account-subscription-works # How Account Subscription Works Fuze Store POS uses a subscription system to give you access to features based on your plan. Here is how subscriptions work and how to manage them. ## What is a Subscription? A subscription unlocks the features of Fuze Store POS. You pay a set monthly amount per store, and in return you get access to the tools your business needs. ## How Subscriptions Work - **Choose a Plan** -- Pick the plan that fits your business. Fuze Store offers **Basic** (the free plan), **Starter**, **Lite**, **Standard**, and **Premium**. Each plan has its own features and limits, and higher tiers unlock more features, stores, staff, and catalog capacity. - **Start Your Subscription** -- Enter your payment details and activate your plan. You will be billed automatically each month, **in advance for the upcoming month**. Your plan is a flat fee per store — Fuze Store never takes a percentage of your sales. - **Use All Features** -- Access everything included in your plan, such as sales, inventory, staff management, and more. - **Upgrade or Downgrade** -- Change your plan at any time to get more features or reduce costs. Upgrades apply immediately (you pay only the prorated difference for the rest of the cycle); downgrades take effect at your next renewal. - **Cancel Anytime** -- You can cancel your subscription. You keep access until the end of your current billing period. ## What is Included? Depending on your plan, you may get: - Unlimited sales and orders - Multiple stores or locations - Staff accounts and permissions - Advanced reports and analytics - Optional add-ons (Loyalty, SMS, Inventory, and more) Check the [pricing page](/pricing) or your account settings for a full list of features in each plan. ## How POS Pricing and Order Calculation Works Fuze Store POS handles all pricing situations while keeping things clear. Here is a summary of how the system calculates prices. ### How Each Item is Priced - **Base Price or Special Price** -- Each item starts with a base price. If a special price is active and within valid dates, the system uses it. - **Modifiers** -- Extras or options (like toppings or sizes) add their own price. - **Item Discounts** -- You can apply percentage or fixed-amount discounts to individual items. - **Tax** -- Items can have tax included in the price. If your POS is set to exclude tax, the system adjusts the price accordingly. ### How the Order Total is Calculated - **Order Discounts** -- The whole order can have custom discounts, multiple discounts, or gift card discounts (percentage or fixed amounts). - **Service and Delivery Fees** -- You can add service or delivery fees as a set amount or percentage. - **Final Calculation** -- The POS adds all items (with modifiers, discounts, and tax), subtracts order-level discounts and gift cards, then adds any fees. ### Formulas - **Per Item (Tax Inclusive):** ((Base Price or Special Price) + Modifiers - Discounts) x Quantity - **Per Item (Tax Exclusive):** (((Base Price or Special Price) + Modifiers - Discounts) x Quantity) / (1 + Tax Rate) - **Order Summary:** Subtotal of all Items - Order Discounts - Custom Discounts + Service Fee - Gift Card Discount + Delivery Fee ## Managing Your Subscription - **View Your Plan** -- See your current plan, renewal date, and payment method in account settings. - **Update Payment Info** -- Change your card or payment method at any time. - **Download Invoices** -- Get copies of past payments for your records. - **Contact Support** -- Reach out if you have questions or need help. ## Tips - Pick the plan that matches your business size and needs. - Set a reminder for your renewal date so you are not caught off guard. - Review your usage and upgrade if your business is growing. --- # How Fuze Store POS Pricing Works > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/other/how-pos-pricing-works # How Fuze Store POS Pricing Works Fuze Store POS calculates the final price for each order based on item prices, modifiers, taxes, discounts, and fees. Here is how each step works. ## Per-Item Calculation Each item in an order goes through these steps: - **Base Price or Special Price** -- The item starts with a base price. If a special price (promo) is active and within its valid dates, the system uses it instead. - **Modifiers** -- Extras or options (like extra toppings or a larger size) add their own price to the item. - **Tax** -- If the item has a tax attached and tax is set to be excluded, the system removes the tax before discounts are applied. - **Item Discounts** -- You can apply multiple discounts to an item. Each discount can be a percentage (like 10% off) or a fixed amount (like P20 off). - **Quantity** -- The item total is multiplied by the quantity ordered. ### If tax is included in the price and not excluded 1. Start with the base price (or special price). 2. Add the price of any modifiers. 3. Subtract any item discounts. 4. Multiply by the quantity. ### If tax is attached but set to be excluded 1. Start with the base price (or special price). 2. Add the price of any modifiers. 3. Remove the tax: - For percentage tax, divide by (1 + tax rate). - For fixed tax, subtract the fixed tax amount. 4. Subtract any item discounts. 5. Multiply by the quantity. ### If no tax is attached Follow the same steps above, but skip the tax removal step. ## Order Summary Calculation After all items are calculated, the system builds the order total: 1. Add up the totals for all items. 2. Subtract any order-level discounts or custom discounts. 3. Add any service fees. 4. Subtract any gift card amounts. 5. Add any delivery fees. The result is the final amount your customer pays. Every step is visible on the order screen so you can see exactly how the total was calculated. ## Example Calculations ### Example 1: Basic Item A customer orders: - 1 Burger (P200 base price) - Add Cheese modifier (P25) - 20% item discount (percentage) - 12% tax (included in price, percentage) - Quantity: 2 Calculation: 1. Base price: P200.00 2. Add modifier: P200.00 + P25.00 = P225.00 3. Apply item discount: P225.00 - P45.00 (20%) = P180.00 4. Multiply by quantity: P180.00 x 2 = P360.00 5. If tax is excluded: P360.00 / 1.12 = P321.43 If you add a P50.00 custom discount (fixed) and a P20.00 service fee (fixed) to the order: Summary = P360.00 - P50.00 + P20.00 = **P330.00** ### Example 2: No Tax Attached A customer orders: - 1 Pasta (P150 base price) - Add Garlic Bread modifier (P30) - 10% item discount (percentage) - No tax attached - Quantity: 3 Calculation: 1. Base price: P150.00 2. Add modifier: P150.00 + P30.00 = P180.00 3. Apply item discount: P180.00 - P18.00 (10%) = P162.00 4. Multiply by quantity: P162.00 x 3 = P486.00 If you add a P36.00 custom discount (fixed) and a P50.00 delivery fee (fixed): Summary = P486.00 - P36.00 + P50.00 = **P500.00** ### Example 3: Mixed Items with Multiple Fees and Discounts A customer orders: - **Item 1:** 2 Pizza (P300 each, 12% tax included) - Extra Cheese modifier (P40) - 15% item discount - **Item 2:** 1 Salad (P120, no tax) - Chicken modifier (P35) - 5% item discount - **Item 3:** 3 Iced Tea (P60 each, 12% tax included) - No modifiers or item discounts - **Item 4:** 1 Cake Slice (P90, 12% tax attached but excluded) - Fruit Topping modifier (P20) - 10% item discount Order-level adjustments: - 10% order discount (percentage) - P50 custom discount (fixed) - P30 service fee (fixed) - P40 delivery fee (fixed) - P100 gift card discount (fixed) **Item 1: Pizza (tax included)** 1. Base price: P300.00 2. Add modifier: P300.00 + P40.00 = P340.00 3. Apply discount: P340.00 - P51.00 (15%) = P289.00 4. Multiply by quantity: P289.00 x 2 = P578.00 **Item 2: Salad (no tax)** 1. Base price: P120.00 2. Add modifier: P120.00 + P35.00 = P155.00 3. Apply discount: P155.00 - P7.75 (5%) = P147.25 4. Quantity: P147.25 x 1 = P147.25 **Item 3: Iced Tea (tax included)** 1. Base price: P60.00 2. No modifiers or discounts. 3. Quantity: P60.00 x 3 = P180.00 **Item 4: Cake Slice (tax excluded)** 1. Base price: P90.00 2. Add modifier: P90.00 + P20.00 = P110.00 3. Remove tax: P110.00 / 1.12 = P98.21 4. Apply discount: P98.21 - P9.82 (10%) = P88.39 5. Quantity: P88.39 x 1 = P88.39 **Subtotal:** P578.00 + P147.25 + P180.00 + P88.39 = P993.64 **Apply order-level discounts:** 1. 10% order discount: P993.64 - P99.36 = P894.28 2. Custom discount: P894.28 - P50.00 = P844.28 **Add service fee:** P844.28 + P30.00 = P874.28 **Subtract gift card:** P874.28 - P100.00 = P774.28 **Add delivery fee:** P774.28 + P40.00 = **P814.28** ## Tips - You can see a full breakdown of pricing, tax, discounts, and fees on the order screen before completing the sale. - Make sure your tax rates, discounts, and fees are set up correctly in settings. - Discounts can be applied to the entire order or to individual items. - Gift cards are subtracted from the total after service fees. - The POS keeps a record of all calculations for reporting. --- # How to Add Your Store Address > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/adding-store-address # How to Add Your Store Address Adding your store address ensures it appears on receipts and keeps your store settings accurate. Follow these steps to set it up. ![The Store Address form in the Fuze Store account dashboard showing Street Address, City, State, Postal Code, and Country fields](/docs/store/add-store-address-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Store Settings.** Select **Store Settings** from the menu list. 3. **Go to Store Address.** Select **Store Address** from the menu list. 4. **Edit your address.** Enter your store's full address using the fields below. 5. **Save changes.** Click **Save**. Your store address now appears on receipts and in your store info. ## Field Explanations | Field | What It Means | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Address Line 1** | The primary street address for your store. | **Yes** | 123 Main Street | | **Address Line 2** | An additional address line (suite, floor, etc.). | No | Suite 100 | | **City** | The city where your store is located. | **Yes** | Manila | | **Province** | The province or region where your store is located. | **Yes** | Metro Manila | | **Postal Code** | The postal code for your store's location. | **Yes** | 1000 | | **Country** | The country where your store is located. | **Yes** | Philippines | ## Tips - Make sure your address is complete and accurate for receipts and deliveries. - You can update your address later if you move or open a new location. --- # Connecting ChatGPT > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-chatgpt # Connecting ChatGPT This guide connects **ChatGPT** to your Fuze Store account with a custom connector. Adding a custom connector in ChatGPT requires a paid ChatGPT plan (**Plus, Pro, Business, or Enterprise**). The free plan cannot add custom MCP connectors. This is separate from the paid Fuze Store AI Connections add-on. Plans and availability are set by OpenAI and can change. ## Before You Start - You are signed into ChatGPT on the **web** with a paid plan. Custom connectors / developer mode are web-only. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` ## Connect In ChatGPT, open **Settings → Connectors**. If you don't see custom connectors, enable **Developer mode** in Settings first. Click **Add** (custom connector) and paste your MCP Server URL. ChatGPT launches the OAuth flow. Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the requested permissions, and **Approve**. ChatGPT shows the connector as connected. Enable it in a chat to start asking questions. ## Ask Your First Question - "What were my sales yesterday?" - "Which products sold the most this week?" - "Compare this month's revenue to last month." ## If Something Goes Wrong If you cannot add a connector, confirm your ChatGPT plan supports custom connectors and that Developer mode is enabled. For Fuze-side issues, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting Codex CLI](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-codex) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting Claude Code > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-code # Connecting Claude Code This guide connects **Claude Code** (Anthropic's terminal coding assistant) to your Fuze Store account with one command. Claude Code requires a paid Claude plan (**Pro** or **Max**) or an Anthropic API key — there is no free Claude Code tier. This is separate from the paid Fuze Store AI Connections add-on. Pricing and plans are set by Anthropic and can change. ## Before You Start - **Claude Code** is installed and you are signed in with a paid Claude plan or API key. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` ## Connect **1. Run the install command** in any terminal where Claude Code is installed (substitute your MCP Server URL): ```bash claude mcp add --transport http fuze-store https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` **2. Authorize in the browser.** Claude Code opens a browser for the OAuth handshake. Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the permissions, and **Approve**. The connection is now live. ## Ask Your First Question - "What were my total sales last week?" - "List my best-selling products this month." - "How many orders did I process today?" ## If Something Goes Wrong If the command fails or the browser approval does not complete, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). Confirm you are signed into a paid Claude plan and into Fuze Store in the browser. - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting Claude Desktop](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-desktop) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting Claude Desktop > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-desktop # Connecting Claude Desktop This guide connects **Claude Desktop** to your Fuze Store account using the fast URL-first flow. You paste one link, approve the permissions in your browser, and Claude can answer questions about your orders, sales, products, and customers. ## Before You Start - **Claude Desktop** is installed on your computer. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. - Claude Desktop's custom connectors work on Claude's **free** plan, though Anthropic sets its own limits on how many you can add and may change them over time. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**. It looks like: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` This URL is unique to one store. The store is set by the URL — there is no store picker on the consent screen. ## Connect In Claude Desktop, click your profile, then **Settings → Connectors**. Click **Add custom connector** and paste your MCP Server URL into the **Remote MCP server URL** field. Claude opens a browser tab. If you are not signed into Fuze Store, sign in now. Review the requested permissions and tap **Approve**. The browser returns to Claude Desktop showing **Connected**. The URL-first flow needs no Client ID or Client Secret — Claude Desktop registers itself automatically. You only need a pre-minted Client ID and Secret for tools that cannot open a browser; see [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). ## Ask Your First Question - "What were yesterday's sales at my main store?" - "Show me the top 5 products this week." - "Compare this month's revenue to last month." - "Which day of the week has the highest average order value?" Claude reads only the data you approved and answers in plain language. ## If Something Goes Wrong If the connection fails, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). The most common issues are not being signed into Fuze Store in the browser, the add-on being off, or pasting a URL for the wrong store. - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting Claude Code](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-code) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting Codex CLI > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-codex # Connecting Codex CLI This guide connects **Codex CLI** (OpenAI's terminal coding assistant) to your Fuze Store account. Codex CLI requires a paid ChatGPT plan (**Plus, Pro, Business, Edu, or Enterprise**) or an OpenAI API key with billing enabled — there is no free path. This is separate from the paid Fuze Store AI Connections add-on. Plans are set by OpenAI and can change. ## Before You Start - **Codex CLI** is installed and you are signed in with a paid ChatGPT plan or an API key. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` ## Connect **1. Edit `~/.codex/config.toml`.** Append the block below to the end of the file (substitute your MCP Server URL): ```toml [mcp_servers.fuze-store] transport = "http" url = "https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/" ``` **2. Complete the OAuth login.** Run the login command — it opens a browser for the consent flow: ```bash codex mcp login fuze-store ``` **3. Approve in the browser.** Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the permissions, and **Approve**. ## Ask Your First Question - "What were my sales yesterday?" - "List my best-selling products this month." - "How many orders are open right now?" ## If Something Goes Wrong If login fails, confirm you are signed into a paid ChatGPT plan or have an API key with billing on. For Fuze-side issues, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting ChatGPT](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-chatgpt) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting Cursor > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-cursor # Connecting Cursor This guide connects **Cursor** to your Fuze Store account. Cursor supports MCP on all plans, including the **free** tier. ## Before You Start - **Cursor** is installed. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` ## Connect The quickest path is the **Install in Cursor** button on the Connect screen in the Fuze Store app — it opens Cursor with the URL pre-filled. To set it up by hand instead: **1. Open Cursor Settings → MCP.** **2. Add the server.** Add the block below to `~/.cursor/mcp.json` (substitute your MCP Server URL), then restart Cursor: ```json { "mcpServers": { "fuze-store": { "url": "https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/" } } } ``` **3. Approve in the browser.** Cursor opens a browser for the OAuth handshake. Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the permissions, and **Approve**. ## Ask Your First Question - "What were my top-selling products this week?" - "How many orders did I process today?" - "What's my average order value this month?" ## If Something Goes Wrong If Cursor does not list the server, confirm the JSON is valid and that you restarted Cursor. For Fuze-side issues, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting VS Code](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-vscode) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting Other MCP Tools > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-other-tools # Connecting Other MCP Tools Fuze Store works with **any** AI tool that supports the **Model Context Protocol (MCP)** and OAuth2 with PKCE — not just the tools with a named preset. Most clients only need the server URL; they auto-discover the OAuth endpoints and register themselves. ## Before You Start - An MCP-capable AI client that accepts a remote/HTTP MCP server URL. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. - Some AI tools require their own paid account to add a connector — check [the overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview#does-the-ai-tool-need-a-paid-account) for the current list. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` This URL is unique to one store. The store is set by the URL — there is no store picker on the consent screen. ## Connect In your AI tool, add a **remote / custom MCP server** and paste the MCP Server URL. The exact menu varies by tool (often Settings → Connectors, MCP, or a config file). The tool discovers the OAuth endpoints and registers itself automatically (RFC 7591 Dynamic Client Registration). It then opens your browser to the Fuze Store consent screen. Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the requested permissions, and **Approve**. Server-to-server scripts and tools that can't complete a browser sign-in need a pre-minted **Client ID** and **Client Secret**. Create one under **Configurations → MCP → Credentials**, then see [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). ## If Something Goes Wrong If the tool can't discover the server, confirm it supports remote MCP over HTTP and OAuth2 PKCE. For Fuze-side issues, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting VS Code > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-vscode # Connecting VS Code This guide connects **VS Code** to your Fuze Store account through GitHub Copilot's MCP support. It works with **Copilot Free**. ## Before You Start - **VS Code** (version 1.99 or later) with **GitHub Copilot** enabled. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` ## Connect The quickest path is the **Install in VS Code** button on the Connect screen in the Fuze Store app — it opens VS Code's MCP install dialog with the URL pre-filled. To set it up by hand instead: **1. Add the server.** Add the block below to `.vscode/mcp.json` in your workspace (substitute your MCP Server URL): ```json { "servers": { "fuze-store": { "type": "http", "url": "https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/" } } } ``` **2. Start the server.** Run **MCP: List Servers** from the command palette and start the Fuze Store server. **3. Approve in the browser.** VS Code opens a browser for the OAuth handshake. Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the permissions, and **Approve**. ## Ask Your First Question In Copilot Chat (agent mode), try: - "What were yesterday's sales?" - "List my low-stock products." - "Which staff member had the most sales this week?" ## If Something Goes Wrong If the server does not appear, confirm the JSON is valid and that Copilot agent mode is enabled. For Fuze-side issues, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting Windsurf](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-windsurf) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Connecting Windsurf > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-windsurf # Connecting Windsurf This guide connects **Windsurf** to your Fuze Store account. Windsurf supports MCP on its **free** tier (subject to its own agent quota). ## Before You Start - **Windsurf** is installed. - You have **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - The **AI Connections** add-on is active on that store. ## Get Your MCP URL In the Fuze Store app, open **Configurations → MCP → Connect an assistant** and copy the **MCP Server URL**: ```text https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/ ``` ## Connect **1. Open the raw config.** Go to **Settings → MCP → View raw config**. Windsurf stores servers in `mcp_config.json`. **2. Add the server.** Paste the block below (substitute your MCP Server URL), save, then restart Windsurf: ```json { "mcpServers": { "fuze-store": { "serverUrl": "https://api.fuze-store.com/mcp/store/" } } } ``` **3. Approve in the browser.** Windsurf opens a browser for the OAuth handshake. Sign into Fuze Store if prompted, review the permissions, and **Approve**. ## Ask Your First Question - "What were my total sales last week?" - "Show me my top products this month." - "How many new customers did I add today?" ## If Something Goes Wrong If the server does not connect, confirm the JSON is valid and that you restarted Windsurf. For Fuze-side issues, see the troubleshooting section of [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth). - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting Cursor](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-cursor) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # AI Connections Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/overview # AI Connections Overview AI assistants like Claude Desktop and ChatGPT can read your store data and answer questions about your business in plain language. The AI Connections feature lets you grant an AI tool secure, read-only access to specific parts of your store — orders, reports, products, customers, inventory — and revoke that access at any time. ## What are AI Connections? An AI Connection is a secure link between an external AI tool and your Fuze Store account. You decide which AI tool gets access, what it can read, and when to disconnect it. The AI tool reads your data to answer your questions. It cannot create, edit, or delete anything. ## What the AI Can Answer Once connected, you can ask your AI assistant questions like: - "What were my top-selling products last month?" - "Show me my sales trend for this quarter." - "Which day of the week has the highest revenue at my main store?" - "How many orders did I process today?" - "What is my average order value for dine-in customers?" The AI reads the data you approved and responds in plain language. ## What Permissions Can the AI Get? When you create an AI Connection, you choose which permissions to grant. You can grant as few or as many as you need. The AI tool only sees the data you explicitly approve. Every permission except **Catalog Import** is read-only. Catalog Import is the one write permission: it can create and update catalog items, only after showing you a preview and getting your approval in the chat — it can never delete anything, and it can't touch orders, money, or settings. ## How the Connection Works Setting up an AI Connection uses an industry-standard flow called **OAuth2 with PKCE**. You don't need to understand the details — Fuze Store has a short list of **presets** for popular AI tools (Claude Desktop, Claude Code, ChatGPT, Cursor) that auto-fill the technical fields for you. Just pick the preset matching your AI tool and the form takes care of the rest. Here is what happens from your side: You create a new AI Connection in Fuze Store. Pick the preset for your AI tool, give it a name, and choose the permissions you want to grant. You copy your Client ID (and Client Secret, if your connection is Confidential) from the one-time reveal dialog and paste them into your AI tool's connector form. You start the connection from the AI tool. Your browser opens a Fuze Store consent screen. The consent screen shows which store and which permissions the AI is asking for. You review and approve. The AI tool is now connected. You can start asking questions. You can revoke access at any time from your AI Connections list. ## Public vs Confidential Connections When you create a connection, you pick a **Connection Type**: - **Public** (default, recommended) — For desktop AI apps like Claude Desktop and ChatGPT. No secret is issued. The connection uses PKCE for security. - **Confidential** — For server-to-server scripts and automated integrations. A Client Secret is issued and shown only once. If you are not sure, pick **Public**. It is the right choice for nearly every AI tool. ## Security and Privacy - **Your password is never shared.** The AI never sees your Fuze Store credentials. - **The AI only sees what you approve.** You review the exact list of permissions on the consent screen before approving. - **Store-scoped access.** If you own multiple stores, you pick exactly one store per connection. - **Revoke any time.** One click removes the AI's access immediately. - **Read-only.** The AI cannot place orders, edit products, or change settings. Every permission is opt-in. Grant only what the AI needs. You can always create multiple connections with different permission sets and revoke them independently. ## Supported AI Tools Any AI tool that supports the **Model Context Protocol (MCP)** and OAuth2 PKCE can connect to Fuze Store. The in-app connect guide has presets for: - **Claude Desktop** and **Claude Code** by Anthropic - **ChatGPT** and **Codex CLI** by OpenAI - **Cursor**, **VS Code**, and **Windsurf** - Any custom MCP client built by developers ## Does the AI Tool Need a Paid Account? The Fuze Store **AI Connections add-on is paid** (the badge at the top of this page). Separately, **some AI tools require their own paid account** on the tool's side before you can add a custom MCP connector. This is set by each AI vendor, not by Fuze Store, and can change over time. - **ChatGPT** — adding a custom connector needs a paid ChatGPT plan (Plus, Pro, Business, or Enterprise). The free plan can't add custom MCP connectors. - **Claude Code** — needs a paid Claude plan (Pro or Max) or an Anthropic API key. There is no free Claude Code tier. - **Codex CLI** — needs a paid ChatGPT plan or an OpenAI API key with billing enabled. **Claude Desktop**, **Cursor**, **VS Code**, and **Windsurf** can add a Fuze Store connection on their free tiers (some impose their own usage limits). You still need the paid Fuze Store AI Connections add-on either way. - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Connecting Claude Desktop](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-desktop) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Setting Up AI Access > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth # Setting Up AI Access This guide walks you through creating a new AI Connection, approving it from your browser, and connecting it to your AI tool. For a dedicated Claude Desktop walkthrough, see [Connecting Claude Desktop](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-desktop). ## Before You Start - You need **Owner** or **Admin** access to the store you want to connect. - You need the AI tool's **redirect URI**. This is a URL the AI tool gives you for its own connector (look in its documentation — Claude Desktop and ChatGPT both list theirs). - The **AI Connections** add-on must be active on your store. ## Creating a New Connection Open the sidebar menu and go to **Store Settings** → **AI Connections**. Tap **Create**. A full-screen form opens with three sections: **Basics**, **Client**, and **Access**. Enter a descriptive **Name** like "Claude Desktop - Finance Review". You will see this name later in the list. Pick a **Preset**. Choose Claude Desktop, Claude Code, ChatGPT, Cursor, or Custom. The preset auto-fills the redirect URI and the Public/Confidential setting for you — you can still edit them afterwards. Confirm or edit the **Redirect URIs**. For Claude Desktop and ChatGPT, paste the URL their connector dialog gave you. For Claude Code and Cursor, the preset already fills in the loopback URL each CLI uses. You can add up to 5 URIs. Confirm the **Connection Type**. **Public** (PKCE, no secret) is the right choice for desktop AI apps and CLI tools. **Confidential** (issues a client secret) is only for server-to-server scripts. Select the **Permissions** the AI needs. Grant only what you are comfortable sharing. Tap **Create**. You will see your Client ID (and Client Secret, if Confidential) in a one-time reveal dialog — copy them before closing it. For **Claude Code** and **Cursor**, the preset fills in a `http://127.0.0.1:/callback` loopback redirect URI that both CLI tools use out of the box, and sets the connection to Public (PKCE). For **Claude Desktop** and **ChatGPT**, the preset also sets Public (PKCE) and leaves the redirect URI blank so you can paste the URL their "Add custom connector" dialog gave you. Pick **Custom** if your AI tool is not in the list. **Public** connections use PKCE (a cryptographic proof-key exchange) and do not issue a client secret — they are simpler and fully supported by every modern AI tool. **Confidential** connections issue a client secret you paste alongside the Client ID; they are meant for server-to-server scripts and backend integrations that can safely store a secret. The preset picks a sensible default for each AI tool; you can always toggle it. If you chose **Confidential**, the Client Secret is displayed exactly once after you create the connection. Copy it immediately and store it somewhere safe. If you lose it, you must delete the connection and create a new one. ## Form Field Reference ## Approving the Connection After the connection exists in Fuze Store and you have your Client ID, switch to your AI tool to finish the handshake. Paste the **Client ID** into your AI tool's connector form. Paste the Secret too, if you chose Confidential. Start the connection from your AI tool. It opens your default browser. You land on a Fuze Store consent screen showing the client name, the store, and the list of requested permissions. The store is already chosen for you — each connection is tied to one specific store, so there is no store picker to fill in. Review the permissions carefully. If anything looks wrong, tap **Deny**. Tap **Approve**. The browser returns to your AI tool, which shows "Connected". Start asking questions. The AI will now read the data you approved. If the consent screen asks you to log in, enter your Fuze Store credentials. Once you are signed in, the consent flow resumes automatically. You only need to do this once per session. ## Managing Your Connections The AI Connections list shows every connection you have created. Each entry includes the name, connection type, and a badge list of its permissions. ### Revoking a Connection Go to **Store Settings** → **AI Connections**. Find the connection you want to remove. Tap **Revoke** and confirm. Revoking removes all access tokens immediately. The AI tool will lose access within seconds. You can always create a new connection later. ### When to Revoke - The AI tool is no longer in use. - You suspect credentials have been compromised. - You want to grant different permissions — revoke and create a new connection. - A staff member who set up the connection has left the team. ## Troubleshooting **"Invalid client" in the AI tool** Your Client ID is wrong. Double-check it matches exactly what Fuze Store shows in the AI Connections list. **"redirect_uri mismatch"** The redirect URI you entered in the AI tool must exactly match one of the URIs you saved on the Fuze Store side. Check for typos, trailing slashes, and http vs https. **"No eligible stores" or an add-on banner on the consent screen** The store this connection points to does not have the AI Connections add-on active. Add it to that store from **Account** → **Add-ons**, then try connecting again. **Nothing happens when the AI tool opens a browser window** You need to be signed into your Fuze Store account in the browser. Open [fuze-store.com](/) in a new tab, sign in, then retry the connection. - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Connecting Claude Desktop](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-desktop) - [Understanding Permissions](/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes) --- # Understanding Permissions > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/ai-connections/understanding-scopes # Understanding Permissions When you create an AI Connection, you decide exactly what the AI tool can read. This guide explains each permission in plain language so you can grant only what the AI needs — and no more. ## Store Info **Permission code:** `read:store` Gives the AI access to your store's profile, staff list, and general settings. Use this when you want the AI to know who works at your store, what the store is named, or how it is configured. **What the AI can see:** - Store name, address, and contact info - Staff members and their roles - Store preferences and settings **Example questions:** - "Who are the staff members at my Cebu branch?" - "What service modes does my store support?" ## Orders **Permission code:** `read:orders` Gives the AI access to your order history, including line items and statuses. This is the foundation for almost every business question an AI assistant can answer. **What the AI can see:** - Order history (filter by date, store, status) - Line items on each order - Order status: New, Processing, Ready, Completed, etc. **Example questions:** - "How many orders did I process yesterday?" - "Show me all canceled orders this week." - "What is my average order value for dine-in customers?" ## Reports **Permission code:** `read:reports` Gives the AI access to sales reports, transaction summaries, and analytics. Pair this with Orders for the most powerful business-analysis persona. **What the AI can see:** - Sales reports by date range - Transaction summaries - Analytics and aggregated metrics **Example questions:** - "What was my total revenue last week?" - "Show me a sales summary for March." - "Which day of the week has the highest revenue?" ## Products **Permission code:** `read:products` Gives the AI access to your product catalog, prices, and descriptions. Use this when you want the AI to answer questions about what you sell. **What the AI can see:** - Product catalog (name, description, category) - Prices and pricing tiers - Product attributes and modifiers **Example questions:** - "What products cost more than ₱500?" - "List all products in the Beverages category." - "Which products have a discount applied?" ## Customers **Permission code:** `read:customers` Gives the AI access to customer profiles and purchase history. Use this for customer-insights and loyalty questions. **What the AI can see:** - Customer profiles (name, contact, address) - Purchase history per customer - Customer loyalty data (if enabled) **Example questions:** - "Who are my top 10 customers by total spend?" - "How many repeat customers do I have?" - "Show me the purchase history for customer Juan Dela Cruz." ## Inventory **Permission code:** `read:inventory` Gives the AI access to stock levels and inventory locations. Use this for operational questions about what needs to be restocked. **What the AI can see:** - Stock levels per product - Inventory locations - Stock status (in stock, low, out of stock) **Example questions:** - "What products are running low right now?" - "How much stock do I have for SKU ABC-123?" - "List all out-of-stock products." ## Financials **Permission code:** `read:financials` Gives the AI access to sensitive financial figures: cost of goods sold, gross margin, expenses, tax, cash variance, valuation, and profit-and-loss. Grant this only to AI tools you trust to handle revenue-level numbers. **What the AI can see:** - COGS, gross margin, and inventory valuation - Expense entries and category breakdowns - Tax summaries and payment reconciliations - Cash variance, session variance history, and P&L snapshots **Example questions:** - "What is my gross margin by product category for last month?" - "Show me the cash variance trend across the last 30 closed sessions." - "Which expense categories grew the most this quarter?" ## Operations **Permission code:** `read:operations` Gives the AI access to operational data: cashier sessions, events and bookings, and kitchen-display performance. Pair this with `read:orders` for end-of-shift and service-flow questions. **What the AI can see:** - Currently open cashier session and historical session totals - Events, bookings, and staff schedules - Kitchen Display System (KDS) ticket throughput and timing **Example questions:** - "How is the kitchen pacing today compared to last Friday?" - "What is the status of the current cashier session?" - "Which upcoming bookings need confirmation?" ## Staff **Permission code:** `read:staff` Gives the AI access to per-staff sales, refunds, and discount activity. This includes employee names alongside performance figures, so treat it like PII. **What the AI can see:** - Per-staff sales totals and order counts - Refund and discount activity attributed to staff - Staff profile fields used in performance reports **Example questions:** - "Who are my top 3 staff by sales this week?" - "Which staff member issued the most discounts last month?" - "List orders handled by staff member Maria." ## Catalog Import (write) **Permission code:** `write:catalog` The only write permission. It lets the AI **import a catalog for you** — you share a menu photo, price list, or supplier catalog with your AI assistant, it extracts the items, shows you a preview of exactly what would be created, updated, or skipped, and only writes to your catalog after you approve the preview in the chat. Nothing is ever deleted, and existing items are never overwritten unless you explicitly ask for updates. **What the AI can do:** - Create categories, products, services, modifier groups, and taxes from a document you share - Show a create/update/skip preview before anything is written - Import everything in one all-or-nothing transaction after your approval **Example requests:** - "Here's a photo of my menu — import it into my catalog." - "Import this supplier price list, but don't touch anything that already exists." Because this permission writes data, the approval screen always shows it as a checkbox you can untick — grant it only to AI tools you trust. ## Choosing the Right Permissions You don't need to grant every permission. Match the permissions to the persona you want the AI to play. ## The Principle of Least Privilege A good security habit is to grant the **minimum permissions** required for the task at hand. If the AI only needs to answer order-level questions, don't also grant inventory and customers. You can always create a second connection with more permissions later. Fewer permissions means: - A smaller impact if credentials are ever compromised. - Less data the AI can accidentally reference when answering unrelated questions. - Cleaner audit trails when reviewing what the AI has accessed. You can create multiple AI Connections with different permission bundles and revoke them independently. There is no limit on the number of connections per store. - [AI Connections Overview](/docs/store/ai-connections/overview) - [Setting Up AI Access](/docs/store/ai-connections/setting-up-oauth) - [Connecting Claude Desktop](/docs/store/ai-connections/connecting-claude-desktop) --- # How to Create a New Unit > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit # How to Create a New Unit Units represent specific spots in your store -- like tables, rooms, or seats. Creating units lets you assign orders to exact locations and track service across your space. ![The Create Unit form in the Fuze Store app showing Unit Name and Area Assignment fields](/docs/store/area/create-unit-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Units** to view your current list of units. 4. Click the **Add Unit** button at the top right. 5. Fill in the unit details: - **Name** -- Give the unit a clear name or number (e.g., "Table 1," "Room 2," or "Seat A"). - **Capacity** -- Set the maximum number of people the unit can hold (e.g., 4). - **Area** -- Select the area this unit belongs to (e.g., "Balcony" or "VIP Area"). 6. Click **Save**. The new unit appears under the selected area and is ready for orders. ## Tips - Use simple, clear names so staff can identify each unit quickly. - An area can hold many units (e.g., several tables in "Al Fresco"). - Start with the units you use daily, then add more as needed. - You can always edit or delete units later if your layout changes. ## Related Guides - [Area and Unit Overview](/docs/store/area/overview) - [How to Create an Area](/docs/store/area/creating-an-area) - [How to Update a Unit](/docs/store/area/updating-a-unit) - [How to Delete a Unit](/docs/store/area/deleting-unit) --- # How to Create a New Area > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/creating-an-area # How to Create a New Area Creating areas helps you organize your store into sections like dining zones, service rooms, or retail floors. Once an area exists, you can add units (tables, rooms, seats) to it. ![The Create Area form in the Fuze Store app showing the Area Name field and an optional Description field](/docs/store/area/create-area-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Areas** to view your current list of areas. 4. Click the **Add Area** button at the top right. 5. Fill in the area details: - **Name** -- Give the area a clear name (e.g., "Al Fresco," "VIP Area," or "Washing Area"). - **Description** -- Optionally add a short description (e.g., "Outdoor seating area with umbrellas"). 6. Click **Save**. Your new area appears in the list and is ready for units. ## Tips - Use clear, simple names so staff can recognize areas at a glance. - Start with the main areas you use daily, then add more as needed. - You can always edit or delete areas later if your layout changes. ## Related Guides - [Area and Unit Overview](/docs/store/area/overview) - [How to Update an Area](/docs/store/area/updating-an-area) - [How to Delete an Area](/docs/store/area/deleting-area) - [How to Create a Unit](/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit) - [How to Update a Unit](/docs/store/area/updating-a-unit) - [How to Delete a Unit](/docs/store/area/deleting-unit) --- # How to Delete an Area > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/deleting-area # How to Delete an Area If you no longer use an area (e.g., "Al Fresco," "VIP Area," or "Balcony"), you can remove it from your POS system. This keeps your list clean and your team focused on active spaces. ## Step-by-Step Guide ### Option 1: Delete from the Areas List 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Areas** to view your current list of areas. 4. Find the area you want to delete by scrolling or searching. 5. Click the **Delete** icon (trash can) next to the area's name. 6. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ### Option 2: Delete from the Area Details Page 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Areas** to view your list. 4. Find the area you want to delete. 5. Click the **Edit** button to open its details page. 6. Click the **Delete** button on the details page. 7. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ## What Happens When You Delete an Area? - The area is removed from your list. - Units belonging to that area become unassigned. You need to reassign them to another area. - You can always create a new area later if your layout changes. ## Tips - Double-check before deleting. Deleted areas cannot be restored. - Only delete areas you are sure you no longer need. - If you are unsure, consider editing the area instead. - Let your team know about layout changes so everyone stays informed. ## Related Guides - [Area and Unit Overview](/docs/store/area/overview) - [How to Create an Area](/docs/store/area/creating-an-area) - [How to Update an Area](/docs/store/area/updating-an-area) - [How to Create a Unit](/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit) - [How to Update a Unit](/docs/store/area/updating-a-unit) - [How to Delete a Unit](/docs/store/area/deleting-unit) --- # How to Delete a Unit > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/deleting-unit # How to Delete a Unit If you no longer use a specific table, room, or seat, you can remove it from your POS system. This keeps your unit list clean and prevents confusion. ## Step-by-Step Guide ### Option 1: Delete from the Units List 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Units** to view your current list of units. 4. Find the unit you want to delete by scrolling or searching. 5. Click the **Delete** icon (trash can) next to the unit's name. 6. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ### Option 2: Delete from the Unit Details Page 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Units** to view your list of units. 4. Find the unit you want to delete. 5. Click the **Edit** button to open its details page. 6. Click the **Delete** button on the details page. 7. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ## What Happens When You Delete a Unit? - The unit is removed from your list and cannot be used for new orders. - Past orders linked to that unit remain in your reports. - You can always create a new unit later if your layout changes. ## Tips - Double-check before deleting. Deleted units cannot be restored. - Only delete units you are sure you no longer need. - If you are unsure, consider editing the unit instead. - Let your team know about changes so everyone stays informed. ## Related Guides - [Area and Unit Overview](/docs/store/area/overview) - [How to Create a Unit](/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit) - [How to Update a Unit](/docs/store/area/updating-a-unit) --- # Area and Units Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/overview # Area and Units Overview Areas and units help you organize your store's physical spaces. Whether you run a cafe, spa, retail shop, or car wash, you can map your real layout into the POS system. This keeps orders tied to specific locations and helps your team stay on top of service. ## What is an Area? An area represents a section or zone in your store. You group related units under an area. Examples: - Al fresco area in a restaurant - VIP lounge in a bar - 2nd floor in a retail store - Main area in a cafe - Washing area in a car wash Name your areas however makes sense for your business. ## What is a Unit? A unit is a specific spot within an area. It represents one physical location where service happens. Examples: - Table 5 in the al fresco area - VIP Room 1 in the VIP lounge - Fitting Room 2 on the 2nd floor - Counter 1 in the main area - Wash Bay 3 in the washing area Name your units however makes sense for your business. ## Why Use Areas and Units? - **Stay organized** -- See which units are available or busy at a glance. - **Improve service** -- Help staff quickly find customers and manage orders. - **Track activity** -- Monitor orders and service by location. - **Stay flexible** -- Adjust your layout anytime without system disruptions. - **Speed up delivery** -- Assign orders to specific units for fast, accurate service. ## What You Can Do - **Add areas** to match your store layout. - **Edit areas** when names or details change. - **Delete areas** you no longer use. - **Add units** within areas to represent individual spots. - **Edit units** to update names, capacity, or assigned area. - **Delete units** you no longer need. - **Assign orders** to units for location-based tracking. ## Field Reference **Area fields:** | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --------------- | ---------------------------------- | -------- | --------- | | **Name** | The area name | Yes | Al Fresco | | **Description** | A short description about the area | No | | **Unit fields:** | Field | Description | Required | Example | | ------------ | ----------------------------- | -------- | --------- | | **Name** | The unit name | Yes | Table 1 | | **Capacity** | How many can fit in the unit | Yes | 4 | | **Area** | The area this unit belongs to | Yes | Al Fresco | ## Tips - Name units clearly so staff can find them fast (e.g., "Table 1," "VIP Room"). - Organize areas to match your physical store layout. - Update areas and units as your business grows or changes. - Remove unused areas and units to keep the system clean. - Assign orders to the correct units for accurate tracking. ## Related Guides - [How to Create an Area](/docs/store/area/creating-an-area) - [How to Update an Area](/docs/store/area/updating-an-area) - [How to Delete an Area](/docs/store/area/deleting-area) - [How to Create a Unit](/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit) - [How to Update a Unit](/docs/store/area/updating-a-unit) - [How to Delete a Unit](/docs/store/area/deleting-unit) --- # How to Update a Unit > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/updating-a-unit # How to Update a Unit A unit is a specific spot within an area -- like a table, room, or seat. You can update its name, capacity, or assigned area whenever your layout changes. ![The Edit Unit form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Unit Name and Area Assignment fields with a Save button](/docs/store/area/edit-unit-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Units** to view your current list of units. 4. Find the unit you want to update by scrolling or using the search bar. 5. Click the **Edit** button next to the unit's name. 6. Update the details: - **Name** -- Change the unit's name if needed (e.g., rename "Table 1" to "VIP Table"). - **Capacity** -- Adjust how many people the unit can hold. - **Area** -- Move the unit to a different area if your layout has changed. 7. Click **Save**. Your changes take effect right away. ## Tips - Update unit details whenever your physical layout changes. - Use clear, simple names so staff can find units quickly. - Review your units regularly, especially after renovations. - Let your team know about changes so everyone stays aligned. ## Related Guides - [Area and Unit Overview](/docs/store/area/overview) - [How to Create a Unit](/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit) - [How to Delete a Unit](/docs/store/area/deleting-unit) - [How to Create an Area](/docs/store/area/creating-an-area) - [How to Delete an Area](/docs/store/area/deleting-area) --- # How to Update an Area > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/area/updating-an-area # How to Update an Area You can rename an area, change its description, or adjust details anytime your store layout changes. ![The Edit Area form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Area Name and Description fields with a Save button](/docs/store/area/edit-area-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. 3. Click **Areas** to view your current list of areas. 4. Find the area you want to update using the search bar or by scrolling. 5. Click the **Edit** button next to the area's name. 6. Update the details: - **Name** -- Change the area name (e.g., "Al Fresco," "VIP Area," or "Washing Area"). - **Description** -- Optionally update the description. 7. Click **Save**. Your changes take effect right away. ## Tips - Use clear, simple names so staff can recognize areas quickly. - Update area names or details whenever your business layout changes. - Remove areas you no longer use to keep the list organized. ## Related Guides - [Area and Unit Overview](/docs/store/area/overview) - [How to Create an Area](/docs/store/area/creating-an-area) - [How to Delete an Area](/docs/store/area/deleting-area) - [How to Create a Unit](/docs/store/area/creating-a-unit) - [How to Delete a Unit](/docs/store/area/deleting-unit) --- # Cash Drawer Movements (Cash In / Cash Out) > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements # Cash Drawer Movements Not every cash movement is a sale. Mid-shift, you might: - Add ₱2,000 to the drawer from the safe to give as change (a **Cash In**). - Pay a delivery rider ₱350 out of the till (a **Cash Out**). - Send the day's surplus to the back office before close (a **Cash Out**). If you don't log these, your end-of-day variance will be wrong — your drawer will look short or over for reasons no one can explain. Drawer Movements give you a clean place to record every cash flow that isn't an order or refund. ## Two paths for Cash Out Fuze Store routes Cash Out differently depending on whether you have the **Expenses** addon: | Setup | Cash Out flow | | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Expenses addon active** | The Cash Out dialog records the payout as a **Cash expense** automatically — you enter the amount and a reason, and Fuze Store logs an approved Cash expense attached to the current session. It rolls into your end-of-day reconciliation (as a payout) automatically. | | **Expenses addon inactive** | Cash Out goes through the **Drawer Movement** bottom sheet directly. Logged against the active session. | Cash In **always** goes through the Drawer Movement bottom sheet, regardless of whether you have Expenses. Expenses by design captures outflows only — drawer top-ups don't fit that shape. This dual-path design means you never log the same cash movement twice. With Expenses, your accountant sees the payout in the expense ledger. Without Expenses, you still get clean reconciliation through Drawer Movements. ## Logging a Cash In Sidebar → **Store Sessions** → **Drawer**. (Or tap the Drawer icon directly from the active session.) The Drawer Movement bottom sheet opens. Use a positive number — Fuze Store carries the direction in the **In / Out** label, not the sign. Short, clear, factual: "Change top-up from safe", "Manager float", "Carry-over from morning shift". Your future self will thank you when you're reconciling next month. Done. The movement is now linked to the active session and will show on your end-of-day Z-report. ## Logging a Cash Out Sidebar → **Store Sessions** → **Drawer**. What happens next depends on whether you have the Expenses addon: - **With Expenses** — the Cash Out dialog opens. Enter the amount and a reason, then Save. Fuze Store records it as an approved **Cash expense** attached to the active session — no separate expense form to fill. It counts as a payout in your end-of-day reconciliation. - **Without Expenses** — the Drawer Movement bottom sheet opens. Enter the amount and a reason. Save. The act of logging the movement should immediately follow handing over the cash, not the other way around. Memory is lossy. ## What ends up on the Z-report When you close the session, the Z-report will include: - **Total Cash In** — sum of every Cash In during the session. - **Total Cash Out** — sum of every Cash Out, regardless of which path it took. - **Per-movement detail** — each individual movement with reason and amount. Your **expected cash** is computed as `opening_cash + cash_sales − total_cash_out + total_cash_in`. If you logged everything, your variance should be tiny. ## Tips - **Log the moment cash leaves or enters the drawer.** Five minutes later you've already forgotten the rider's name; an hour later you've forgotten the amount. - **Use specific reasons.** "Petty cash" tells you nothing. "Lalamove rider — Order #12453" lets you trace it back if there's a dispute. - **Don't use Cash Out for refunds.** Refunds have their own flow — they auto-deduct from the cash totals through the transaction record. Logging a refund as a Cash Out would double-count it. - **Restrict drawer-movement permissions.** Only staff with Sessions permission can record movements. Don't loosen that — it's your audit trail. ## Related guides - [Using Store Sessions](/docs/store/using-store-session) - [Closing the Day with the Z-Report](/docs/store/closing-end-of-day) - [Expenses Overview](/docs/store/expenses/overview) - [Cash Variance Thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds) --- # Cash Variance Thresholds > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds # Cash Variance Thresholds A cash variance — the gap between what your drawer should hold and what's actually there at close — is a normal part of running a store. What matters is how big the gap is, whether it's growing, and what your store does about it. Variance thresholds let you set policy so the response is automatic. ## The three thresholds | Threshold | Default (PHP) | What happens when variance crosses it | | --------------- | ------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Minor** | ₱50 | Below this, no warning shows on the close screen. Treated as routine. | | **Review** | ₱500 | Orange banner on close. Cashier must pick a **variance reason** from a dropdown before they can finalize the close. | | **Escalation** | ₱5,000 | Red banner. Reason is required, plus a free-text **explanation**. Manager and store owner are notified automatically. | These thresholds are **soft** — closing is never blocked. The thresholds drive the warning level, the prompts, and the notification, not whether you can close. ## Setting per-store thresholds Sign in as the store owner (or an org owner / admin). Sidebar → **Configurations** → **Preferences** → **Store**. Scroll to the **Cash Variance** card. Enter your **Minor**, **Review**, and **Escalation** thresholds in your store's currency. They should be in ascending order — Fuze Store will warn if not. Save the preference. New thresholds apply to the next session close. ## How to pick the right thresholds There's no universal answer — it depends on your average ticket size and how much cash flows through your drawer per shift. A reasonable starting point: - **Minor** = roughly 0.1–0.2% of a typical day's cash sales. Small enough to be ignored, big enough to flag a counting issue. - **Review** = roughly 1% of a typical day's cash sales. Big enough to deserve an explanation; small enough to expect routinely. - **Escalation** = roughly 5% of a typical day's cash sales OR a single high-denomination loss (e.g. ₱5,000 / ₱10,000). Big enough that you want a manager looking at it before the next shift. Tighten over time. If your store consistently runs near zero variance, drop **Minor** to ₱20 — you'll catch issues earlier. If you're routinely over the **Review** threshold from genuine miscounts, raise it temporarily and invest in counting training. ## Variance reasons When a cashier crosses **Review**, they pick from this list: - **Wrong change given** — most common cause of small variance. - **Counterfeit bill** — a rejected or lost bill. - **Drawer skim** — cash removed from the drawer, flagged for management review. - **Miscount** — drawer was counted incorrectly at open or close. - **Bank deposit** — cash pulled from the drawer for a bank deposit. - **Other** — requires a free-text explanation. The reason gets persisted with the closed session and shows on the Z-report. ## Who gets notified on escalation When variance crosses the **Escalation** threshold: - The store owner receives a notification through Fuze Store's real-time channel. - Any staff with the **Hub Admin** permission also get notified (via the Reverb event `store.session.variance_escalated`). - The closed session is flagged in **Session History** so a manager can drill in later. Email notification on escalation is on the roadmap; today the notification is in-app only. ## Tips - **Don't react to a single bad shift.** A ₱600 variance once a month is noise. A ₱200 variance every weekend on the same staff is a pattern worth investigating. - **Pair this with [Staff Performance](/docs/store/reports/staff-performance-report)** — variance per cashier is a different signal than variance per shift. - **Document the policy.** When you set the thresholds, write down what they mean operationally ("over Review, the cashier signs the close sheet alongside the closing manager"). Otherwise the prompt becomes meaningless paperwork. ## Related guides - [Using Store Sessions](/docs/store/using-store-session) - [Closing the Day with the Z-Report](/docs/store/closing-end-of-day) - [Cash Drawer Movements](/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements) - [Cash Variance Report](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Staff Performance Report](/docs/store/reports/staff-performance-report) --- # How to Add a Category > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/category/creating-a-category # How to Add a Category Categories help you organize products and services so staff and customers can find what they need. You might create categories like "Drinks", "Snacks", or "Packages" -- whatever fits your business. ![The Create Category form in the Fuze Store app showing Category Name, Description, and optional Image upload fields](/docs/store/category/create-category-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Categories** -- Select **Categories** from the menu list. 3. **Add a category** -- Press the **Add Category** button at the top right of the category list page. 4. **Fill in the details** -- Enter the information for your new category. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/category/overview#field-explanations) for what each field means. - **Enable** -- Keep this category active and visible (default is Yes). - **Include in Menu** -- Show this category in your POS and digital menus (default is Yes). - **Category Name** -- The name displayed in the app and menus (for example, "Drinks"). - **Code** -- A short code for internal use (for example, "drinks"). - **Parent Category** -- Choose a parent if this is a sub-category (optional). - **Description** -- A brief note about what the category contains (for example, "All types of beverages"). - **Color** -- Pick a color to organize or highlight this category (for example, #FF5733). - **Image** -- Upload an image or icon (optional). 5. **Save** -- Click **Save**. Your new category appears instantly in the POS and menus. ## Tips - Make sure each **Category Name** is unique and easy to understand. - Codes should not contain spaces (for example, use "hot-drinks" instead of "hot drinks"). - Add images and colors to make categories stand out for staff and customers. - You can always edit or remove categories later as your offerings change. ## Related Guides - [Category Overview](/docs/store/category/overview) - [How to Update a Category](/docs/store/category/updating-a-category) - [How to Delete a Category](/docs/store/category/deleting-a-category) --- # How to Delete a Category > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/category/deleting-a-category # How to Delete a Category If you no longer need a category -- maybe you stopped offering certain products or want to tidy up your menu -- you can remove it in a few clicks. There are two ways to delete a category. ## Option 1: Delete from the Category List 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Categories** -- Select **Categories** from the menu list. 3. **Find the category** -- Locate the category you want to delete (for example, "Snacks"). 4. **Delete** -- Click the trash bin icon in the action column. 5. **Confirm** -- A confirmation prompt appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## Option 2: Delete from the Category Details 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Categories** -- Select **Categories** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a category** -- Click the category you want to delete (for example, "Drinks"). 4. **Delete** -- Click the trash bin icon at the bottom of the page. 5. **Confirm** -- A confirmation prompt appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## What Happens When You Delete a Category - The category is removed from your POS and menus right away. - Products or services in that category are **not** deleted. They simply lose their category grouping. - You can always create a new category later if needed. ## Tips - **Deletion is permanent** -- double-check before you confirm. - If you only want to hide a category temporarily, make it inactive instead of deleting it. - Remove unused categories regularly to keep your catalog organized. ## Related Guides - [Category Overview](/docs/store/category/overview) - [How to Create a Category](/docs/store/category/creating-a-category) - [How to Update a Category](/docs/store/category/updating-a-category) --- # Category Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/category/overview # Category Overview Categories let you organize products, services, and bundles into logical groups. This makes browsing, searching, and checkout faster for both your staff and your customers. ## What is a Category? A **category** is a group of related items -- such as products, services, or bundles. Use categories to: - Organize items in the POS for faster checkout - Structure digital menus or catalogs (QR menus, online stores) - Create nested hierarchies (for example, Drinks > Coffee > Iced Coffee) - Apply colors or icons for quick visual recognition - Filter and report on sales by category - Control which items appear in different sales channels **Examples:** - **Food and Beverage:** Drinks, Snacks, Main Courses - **Retail:** Apparel, Accessories, Electronics - **Services:** Haircut, Massage, Car Wash ## Key Benefits - **Faster navigation** -- Staff and customers find items quickly. - **Flexible organization** -- Support for multi-level nesting suits complex menus. - **Visual customization** -- Colors and icons help match your brand or highlight popular groups. - **Menu control** -- Include or exclude categories from digital menus easily. - **Analytics** -- Track sales performance by category. ## Field Explanations Here is what each field means when creating or editing a category. The **Image** field appears prominently at the top of the form. You can upload an image or icon that represents the category visually. | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable** | Keep this category active and visible in the app. | Yes | Yes | | **Include in Menu** | Show this category in your POS and digital menus. | No | Yes | | **Image** | An image or icon for the category, displayed at the top of the form. | No | -- | | **Name** | The name displayed in the app and menus. | Yes | Massage Therapy | | **Code** | A short code for internal use (usually auto-filled). | No | massage-therapy | | **Description** | A brief note about what the category contains. | No | Relaxing massages for stress relief | | **Color** | A color to help organize or highlight the category. | No | #FF5733 | | **Parent Category** | Set a parent if this is a sub-category. You can pick from a dropdown of existing categories. | No | Massage | ## Best Practices - Use clear, descriptive names. - Group similar items together. - Apply colors and icons consistently to aid recognition. - Review and update categories regularly as your offerings change. - Avoid too many nested levels to keep menus simple. ## Related Guides - [How to Create a Category](/docs/store/category/creating-a-category) - [How to Update a Category](/docs/store/category/updating-a-category) - [How to Delete a Category](/docs/store/category/deleting-a-category) --- # How to Update a Category > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/category/updating-a-category # How to Update a Category Keep your categories current so your POS and menus always reflect what you offer. You can change a category's name, color, image, or any other detail at any time. ![The Edit Category form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Category Name and Description fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/category/edit-category-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Categories** -- Select **Categories** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a category** -- Click the category you want to edit (for example, "Drinks"). 4. **Edit the details** -- Update any field as needed. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/category/overview#field-explanations) for what each field means. - **Enable** -- Keep this category active and visible (default is Yes). - **Include in Menu** -- Show this category in your POS and digital menus (default is Yes). - **Category Name** -- The name displayed in the app and menus. - **Code** -- A short code for internal use. - **Parent Category** -- Choose a parent if this is a sub-category (optional). - **Description** -- A brief note about what the category contains. - **Color** -- Pick a color to organize or highlight this category. - **Image** -- Upload an image or icon (optional). 5. **Save** -- Click **Save**. Your changes appear instantly in the POS and menus. ## Tips - Changes take effect right away after saving. - Use clear names and images so staff and customers can find things easily. - Use colors to make important categories stand out. - Leave optional fields blank if you are unsure what to enter. ## Related Guides - [Category Overview](/docs/store/category/overview) - [How to Create a Category](/docs/store/category/creating-a-category) - [How to Delete a Category](/docs/store/category/deleting-a-category) --- # Closing the Day with the Z-Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/closing-end-of-day # Closing the Day with the Z-Report Closing the day means more than locking the door. It's the moment you reconcile what your POS thinks happened with what's actually in your drawer — and produce the **Z-report** that captures the day's numbers for your records, your accountant, and any audit that may follow. This guide walks you through the close, what the Z-report contains, and what to do when your variance isn't zero. ## Before you close Make sure these things are true: - **All open orders are handled.** Either complete them or move them to **On Hold** so they survive the close. - **All payments are recorded.** POS payments are recorded the moment you take them — there is no gateway holding anything "pending". Just make sure every order that was paid has its payment logged, so the tender totals match your drawer. - **All drawer movements are logged.** If a rider was paid out of the till, record it as a [Cash Out](/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements) before you close. You can't add it after. ## Step-by-step close Sidebar → **Store Sessions**. The active session shows at the top. You'll see the **closing reconciliation** screen with running totals: opening cash, cash sales, payouts, payins, and the **expected cash** in your drawer. Take the cash out, count it, then count it again. Don't trust the first count. Type the total. If you want to be extra-rigorous, tap **Enter denomination breakdown** and put in counts per denomination (1000 × 5, 500 × 4, ...). That field exists exactly for catching miscounts — entering it twice and getting different totals tells you to count again. Fuze Store computes `cash_variance = closing_cash − expected_cash` and shows it prominently: - **Green** if variance is below your store's **Minor** threshold (default ₱50). - **Orange** if it's above **Minor** but below **Review** (default ₱500). You'll need to pick a reason. - **Red** if it's above **Escalation** (default ₱5,000). You'll need a reason and a note, and your manager / owner gets notified automatically. Your owner can adjust these thresholds — see [Cash Variance Thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds). The picker offers `WRONG_CHANGE`, `COUNTERFEIT`, `DRAWER_SKIM`, `MISCOUNT`, `BANK_DEPOSIT`, `OTHER`. Pick the closest match and add a short note if `OTHER` or if the variance escalates. Be honest — repeated patterns are how managers spot real problems. Done. Your closed session is now in **Session History**. Open the closed session from **Session History → Detail**. Two actions: - **Print Report** — sends a Z-report to your default Bluetooth thermal printer. Use the same printer you'd use for receipts. - **Share Report** — shares a markdown summary via your phone's share sheet. Useful for emailing your accountant or sending to head office. The Z-report is BIR-friendly. It includes opening and closing receipt numbers, total voids, tender breakdown, drawer movements, and the variance with reason / note. ## What's on the Z-report | Section | Fields | | ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Store header | Store name, address, TIN. | | Session window | Open time, close time, cashier name. | | Cash | Opening cash, closing cash, expected cash, variance, variance reason / note, optional denomination breakdown. | | Tenders | Sales totals by payment method (cash, GCash, Maya, ...). | | Orders | First and last order number, total orders, total discounts, total service charge, total voids and void amount. | | Drawer movements | Cash In total, Cash Out total, plus the per-movement detail. | ## Variance escalation If your variance crosses the **Escalation** threshold: - A red banner shows on the close screen. - A `variance_reason` and `variance_explanation` are required. - Your store owner and managers are notified automatically through Fuze Store's real-time channel. - The closed session is flagged in **Session History** for follow-up. Closing is **never blocked**. Even a ₱100,000 variance closes if you provide a reason and explanation. That's deliberate — you can't fix what you can't close. ## Tips - **Don't reuse a session across staff handovers.** Have the outgoing cashier close their session, then have the incoming cashier open a new one with the carried-over cash as opening cash. - **A ₱20 short isn't a thing to ignore.** It's a thing to investigate this week. Repeated small variances are usually a process issue, not a counting issue. - **A consistent over** (e.g. always ₱50 over by close) usually means an under-rung promo or a missed refund. Audit your discount and refund logs. - **The denomination breakdown is optional but cheap.** Two extra minutes at close saves an hour of "where did the ₱500 go" the next morning. ## Related guides - [Using Store Sessions](/docs/store/using-store-session) - [Cash Drawer Movements](/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements) - [Cash Variance Thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds) - [Session History Detail](/docs/store/session-history-detail) - [Cash Variance Report](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # How to Create a Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/creating-a-store # How to Create a Store A store is where you manage your products, staff, sales, and everything else in Fuze Store POS. You can create one in under a minute. ![The Create Store form in the Fuze Store account dashboard showing Store Name, Store Type, Currency, and Timezone fields](/docs/store/create-store-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the Menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Account** -- Select **Account** from the menu. 3. **Go to Stores** -- Click **Stores** in the Account section. 4. **Add a Store** -- Press the **Add Store** button at the top right. 5. **Pick a business-type template (optional)** -- Choose a template that matches your business (Restaurant, Cafe, Retail, Salon, Car Wash, and more) to get a head start. The template pre-fills your settings, common taxes, and starter staff roles. If you'd rather start from scratch, leave **Custom** selected — it's the default and sets nothing up for you. 6. **Review the Configuration** -- If you picked a template, a short Configuration step shows a few high-impact settings (like tax and service fees) already filled in. Adjust anything you like, or accept the defaults. 7. **Fill in the Details** -- Enter your store information (see the field table below). 8. **Save** -- Click **Save**. Your new store appears instantly in your POS and store list. A template is just a shortcut, never a lock-in. Everything it sets up — taxes, fees, roles, preferences — can be changed afterward on your **Preferences** and **Settings** screens. Learn more in [Store Setup Templates](/docs/store/store-setup-templates). **On the free Basic plan, some modules are turned off.** Taxes, Importing data, Exporting data, and Email notifications need a paid plan. Selling at the POS is always unlimited, even on the free plan. If you pick a template on the free plan, tax-related setup is skipped until you upgrade. ## Field Descriptions | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Store Name** | The name displayed throughout the app. | Yes | | Fuze Coffee Shop | | **Logo** | An image that represents your store. | No | | | | **Currency** | The currency your store uses. | Yes | PHP | PHP (not editable) | | **Country** | The country where your store operates. | Yes | PH | Philippines (not editable) | | **Classifications** | The types of items you sell. | Yes | Food, Item, Service, Virtual | Item, Service | | **Service** | How you fulfill orders. | Yes | Delivery, In Store, Pick Up, Service, Take Out | Delivery, In Store, Take Out | ## Tips - Choose a **store name** that is unique and easy to recognize. - Select the classifications and services that match your business. - Add a logo to personalize your store. - You can edit or remove stores later if your business changes. ## Related Guides - [Adding Store Address](/docs/store/adding-store-address) - [Setting Up Store Preferences](/docs/store/setup-your-store-preference) - [Switching Stores](/docs/store/switching-stores) - [Updating Store Information](/docs/store/updating-store-info) - [Creating a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [Creating a Service](/docs/store/service/creating-a-service) - [Using Store Sessions](/docs/store/using-store-session) --- # How to Add a Customer to Your Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer/adding-customer-to-store # How to Add a Customer to Your Store Adding customers helps you track sales, offer personalized service, and build lasting relationships. Follow these steps to add a new customer. ![The Add Customer form in the Fuze Store app showing First Name, Last Name, Email, Phone, and Birthday fields](/docs/store/customer/add-customer-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Customers** from the menu. You will see all your existing customers here. 3. Click the **Add Customer** button at the top right of the customer list. 4. Enter the customer's information. See the [field explanations](/docs/store/customer/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 5. Click **Save**. The new customer will appear in your list and can be used for orders, loyalty programs, and more. ## Tips - You only need a name to add a customer. More details help you serve them better. - Use the **Notes** field for anything special about the customer (e.g., "Prefers window seat"). - Adding a phone or email lets you send digital receipts and promos. - You can always edit or delete customer info later. - Encourage staff to add new customers at checkout for loyalty programs. ## Best Practices - Double-check spelling to avoid duplicate entries. - Ask for permission before adding contact details for marketing. - Use birthdays and notes to personalize service and build loyalty. - Keep customer info up to date for smooth communication. --- # How to Delete a Customer > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer/deleting-customer # How to Delete a Customer Sometimes you need to remove a customer from your list -- maybe they are a duplicate, or you want to clean up your records. There are two ways to delete a customer. ## Option 1: Delete from the Customer List 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Customers** from the menu. 3. Use the filter or scroll to find the customer you want to delete. 4. Click the **Delete** button in the action column. 5. Confirm the deletion by clicking **Yes** or **Confirm**. The customer is permanently removed. ## Option 2: Delete from the Customer Profile 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Customers** from the menu. 3. Find the customer you want to delete. 4. Click **View Details** in the action column to open their profile. 5. Click the **Delete** button on the profile page. 6. Confirm the deletion by clicking **Yes** or **Confirm**. The customer is permanently removed. ## Tips - Double-check before deleting -- a deleted customer cannot be restored. - Only delete customers you no longer need (e.g., duplicates or test entries). - If a customer asks to be removed, deleting their info respects their privacy. - You can always add a customer again later if needed. ## Best Practices - Keep your customer list clean by removing old or unused entries. - Respect privacy -- delete customer info when requested. - If you are unsure, consider editing the customer instead of deleting. --- # Managing Customers > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer/managing-customers # Managing Customers Keeping track of your customers helps you offer personalized service and build loyalty. This guide covers the key actions you can take with your customer list. ## What Does "Managing Customers" Mean? Managing customers means adding, updating, and organizing the people who shop at your store. It helps you remember preferences, send special offers, and make every visit feel personal. ## Searching or Filtering Customers 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Customers** from the menu. 3. Click the **Filter** button to show filtering options. 4. Search for a specific customer by name or phone number. 5. Click on a customer's name to see their profile and purchase history. ## Adding a Customer 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Customers** from the menu. 3. Click **Add Customer** and fill in their details (name, phone, etc.). 4. Press **Save**. The customer is now in your system. For the full walkthrough, see [How to Add a Customer](/docs/store/customer/adding-customer-to-store). ## Editing Customer Information 1. Find the customer in your list using search if needed. 2. Click their name to open their profile. 3. Update any details such as phone, email, or notes. 4. Click **Save** to keep your changes. For the full walkthrough, see [How to Update Customer Info](/docs/store/customer/updating-customer-info). ## Deleting a Customer 1. Go to the customer's profile. 2. Click **Delete**. 3. Confirm the deletion. The customer will be removed from your list. For the full walkthrough, see [How to Delete a Customer](/docs/store/customer/deleting-customer). ## Tips for Managing Customers - **Add customers at checkout** to build your list quickly. - **Use notes** for special requests (e.g., "Allergic to peanuts"). - **Keep info updated** for smooth communication and service. - **Respect privacy** -- always ask before adding contact details for marketing. - **Use search and filters** to quickly find any customer. ## Why Manage Customers? - Offer loyalty rewards and personalized service. - Send digital receipts and special offers. - Make every customer feel valued and remembered. --- # Customer Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer/overview # Customer Overview Customer management lets you keep track of everyone who shops at your store. Whether they are regulars, first-timers, or VIPs, having their details on hand helps you deliver better service and build stronger relationships. ## Why Add Customers? - **Personalized service** -- Remember birthdays, preferences, and special requests. - **Faster checkout** -- Find returning customers quickly for speedy service. - **Loyalty and rewards** -- Offer points, discounts, or promos to encourage repeat visits. - **Better communication** -- Send digital receipts, updates, and special offers. ## What You Can Do - **Add new customers** -- Add someone at checkout or from the customer list. - **Edit customer info** -- Update names, contact details, or notes anytime. - **Delete customers** -- Remove old or duplicate entries with one click. - **View your customer list** -- See all customers in one place with search and filters. ## Field Explanations ### General Info | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **First Name** | The customer's first name | Yes | Maria | | **Last Name** | The customer's last name | Yes | Santos | | **Phone Number** | Contact number for receipts and updates | | 0917 123 4567 | | **Gender** | Gender for personalized service | | Female | | **Email** | Email address for receipts and promos | | maria@email.com | | **Birthday** | Used to send greetings or offers | | 1990-05-15 | | **Address** | Useful for delivery or records (see below) | | 123 Main St, Manila | ### Address Info | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Address Line 1 / Street** | Street address | Yes | 123 Main St | | **Address Line 2** | Additional address details (e.g., apartment or unit number) | No | Apt 4B | | **Neighborhood** | The neighborhood or barangay | Yes | Brgy. San Antonio | | **City** | City | Yes | Manila | | **Province** | Province (may show as "State/Province") | Yes | Metro Manila | | **Postal Code** | Postal code | No | 1000 | | **Country** | Country | Yes | Philippines | You only need a name to get started. The more details you add, the better you can serve your customers. ## Tips - Encourage staff to add new customers at checkout. - Use the notes field for anything special (e.g., "Loves caramel latte"). - Keep info up to date for smooth communication. - Respect privacy -- ask before adding contact details for marketing. --- # How to Update Customer Information > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer/updating-customer-info # How to Update Customer Information Keeping customer details current helps you provide the best service and keeps your records organized. Follow these steps to update a customer's information. ![The Edit Customer form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled First Name, Last Name, Email, and Phone fields with a Save button](/docs/store/customer/edit-customer-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Customers** from the menu. You will see all your existing customers here. 3. Use the search bar or scroll to find the customer you want to update. 4. Click on the customer's name to open their profile. 5. Change any details you need -- name, phone, email, birthday, address, or notes. See the [field explanations](/docs/store/customer/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 6. Click **Save**. The updated information is stored instantly and used for future orders, receipts, and communications. ## Tips - Update customer info whenever they change their phone, email, or address. - Use the **Notes** field for special requests or preferences (e.g., "Prefers soy milk"). - Keep birthdays and contact details current to send greetings and offers. - You can always edit or delete customer info later. - Encourage staff to verify customer details at checkout. ## Best Practices - Double-check spelling and numbers to avoid mistakes. - Respect privacy -- ask before updating contact details for marketing. - Use notes and birthdays to personalize service and build loyalty. --- # Customer Facing Display Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer-display/overview # Customer Facing Display Overview The Customer Facing Display (CFD) turns a second device into a live customer screen during checkout. Your customers see their cart items, totals, and payment status in real time while you process their order. ## What is the Customer Facing Display? The CFD is a dedicated screen that faces your customer during a POS transaction. It connects to your POS register over your store's local Wi-Fi through **Fuze Store Hub** and updates instantly as you add items, apply discounts, or process payments. You run the display on a separate tablet, monitor, or any device with a web browser. ## Key Features - **Live cart view.** Customers see items, quantities, modifiers, and totals as you ring them up. - **Payment status.** The screen shows when payment is processing, succeeded, or failed. - **Post-transaction summary.** After checkout, a receipt-style summary shows the order number, items, and change due. - **Queue display.** When idle, the screen can show a "Now Serving" queue with estimated wait times. - **Privacy controls.** Mask customer names and identifiers on the display for privacy. - **Works without internet.** Updates travel over your local Wi-Fi through Fuze Store Hub, so the display keeps working during internet outages. ## Display States The CFD moves through four states during a transaction: | State | What the Customer Sees | |-------|----------------------| | **Idle** | Your store logo, a customer queue, or both (configurable) | | **Active Order** | Live cart with items, modifiers, discounts, taxes, and grand total | | **Payment** | Payment processing status | | **Summary** | Order confirmation with items, payments, and change due | After the summary displays for a configurable duration, the screen returns to idle automatically. ## Requirements - An active **Customer Facing Display** add-on on your store - A second device (tablet, monitor, or any screen with a browser) - **Fuze Store Hub** running on a store computer, with your POS device paired to it - The CFD device and your POS device on the **same local Wi-Fi network** The CFD updates over your local Wi-Fi through Fuze Store Hub — there is no cloud or internet sync. If the Hub isn't running and paired (or **Use this Hub** is turned off on the POS), the display won't update. See [Customer-Facing Display on Fuze Store Hub](/docs/hub/customer-facing-display-cfd). ## How It Connects The display syncs over your store's local Wi-Fi through **Fuze Store Hub**: the POS sends each cart and payment update to the Hub, which relays it to the customer screen. Updates never leave your shop, so they arrive instantly and keep working even during an internet outage — as long as both devices stay on the same network as the Hub. ## Related Guides - [Setting Up CFD](/docs/store/customer-display/setting-up-cfd) - [Add-ons Overview](/docs/account/addons/overview) --- # Setting Up CFD > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer-display/setting-up-cfd # Setting Up CFD Follow these steps to get your Customer Facing Display running. The CFD only works over your local Wi-Fi through **Fuze Store Hub** — there is no cloud sync. Before you start, make sure Fuze Store Hub is installed and running on a store computer and your POS device is paired to it. See [First-Time Setup](/docs/hub/first-time-setup). ## Activate the Add-on Go to **Account** and open **Add-ons**. Find **Customer Facing Display** in the add-on catalog. Press **Activate** and confirm. The add-on is billed per store per month. Go to your store's **Add-ons** section and enable CFD for the store. ## Open the Display On your second device (tablet or monitor), open the Fuze Store app or web browser. Navigate to the **Displays** section from your store settings. Select **Customer Facing Display** to launch the display screen. The display connects over your local Wi-Fi through **Fuze Store Hub**. Make sure the Hub is running and your POS device is paired to it. A connection badge in the corner shows whether the display is connected to Fuze Store Hub on your local network. ## Configure Preferences You can customize how the display behaves from your store's **Display Settings**: ### Idle Mode Choose what the display shows when no transaction is active: | Mode | Description | |------|-------------| | **Auto** | Automatically rotates between your store logo and the queue display | | **Queue** | Always shows the customer queue with "Now Serving" and waiting positions | | **Logo** | Always shows your store logo | ### Queue Settings - **Enable queue display** — Show or hide the queue on the idle screen. - **Mask identifiers** — Hide customer names and details for privacy. - **Show estimated wait** — Display estimated wait times next to queue entries. - **Max visible entries** — Limit how many queue entries appear on screen. ### Privacy - **Mask customer name** — Replace customer names with initials on the cart view during checkout. ### Post-Transaction - **Display duration** — How long the order summary stays on screen before returning to idle. ## Troubleshooting ### Display not connecting 1. Make sure **Fuze Store Hub** is running on your store computer and your POS device is paired to it. 2. Make sure the CFD device and your POS device are on the same Wi-Fi network as the Hub. 3. Check that the CFD add-on is active on your store. 4. Confirm **Use this Hub** is turned on for the POS device, then refresh the display page on the second device. ### Cart not updating 1. Verify the connection badge shows a green status. 2. Make sure you are using the POS register on the same store. 3. Try refreshing the display screen. ## Related Guides - [Customer Facing Display Overview](/docs/store/customer-display/overview) - [Add-ons Overview](/docs/account/addons/overview) - [Store Preferences](/docs/store/setup-your-store-preference) --- # Customer Visibility & Operating Hours > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/customer-visibility-and-hours Fuze gives your customers three free, always-on surfaces — no add-on required: - A **public store directory** where customers can find your store, profile, and menu. - **Operating hours** on your public profile, with a live "open now" indicator. - **Live order-status pages** behind the QR codes printed on receipts, laundry claim stubs, and queue tickets. All of it is controlled from your store's Preferences screen in the Fuze Store app. ## Show or hide your store in the customer directory In the Fuze Store app, go to **Configurations → Preferences** and open the **Store** tab. The **Customer App** section has a single switch: **Show my store in the customer app**. It is **on by default** — new stores are discoverable from day one. Turn the switch off if you don't want your store listed. Hiding your store removes it from the public directory **and** hides your public profile and menu — visitors get a "not found" response, indistinguishable from a store that doesn't exist. Changes can take up to **5 minutes** to appear publicly — the directory, profile, and menu are cached briefly for speed. Your own app always shows the saved setting immediately. ## Set your weekly operating hours On the same **Store** tab, find **Operating Hours**. Each day of the week has its own row. Use the switch at the end of a row to mark the day **open or closed**. Open days show two time pickers — opening and closing time. Days you leave switched off display as "Closed" on your public profile. If your closing time is earlier than your opening time (for example 10:00 PM – 2:00 AM), Fuze treats it as an **overnight window** that spills into the next day — the "open now" indicator stays accurate past midnight. Your public profile now shows the weekly schedule and computes **Open now / Closed** live, in your store's own timezone. If you never configure hours, your profile simply omits them — customers see no schedule rather than a wrong one. ## The live order-status page (what your customers see) Every receipt (and laundry claim stub or queue ticket) you print carries a QR code. When a customer scans it with their phone camera, they land on a live status page showing: - Your store name and the order number. - A progress timeline — **Placed → Being prepared → Ready for pickup → Completed**. - The items on the order and any **balance due** (useful for pay-on-pickup workflows like laundry). - For queue tickets: their live **position in line** and how many parties are ahead. The page refreshes itself automatically — customers stop calling to ask "is it ready yet?". You can also include the live status link in your order SMS notifications: edit any order message template under **Configurations → SMS → Message templates** and add the `{{statusUrl}}` placeholder. Note that the link makes the message longer — a typical "order ready" text with the link uses **2 SMS segments** (2 wallet points) instead of 1. ## Frequently asked questions **Does this cost anything?** No. Directory listing, public profile, menu, operating hours, and live status pages are free on every plan, including the free Basic plan. **Can I hide the status pages but stay in the directory?** Yes — they are separate switches. Directory/profile/menu visibility follows the **Customer App** toggle; the printed-QR status pages are on by default and can be disabled separately by support if needed. **What exactly is public on my menu?** Only what a customer needs: item names, descriptions, prices, photos, and availability. Internal data — costs, SKUs, barcodes, stock levels, tax setup — is never exposed. --- # Dashboard Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/dashboard/overview # Dashboard Overview The Dashboard is the first screen you see after logging in. It gives owners and staff a command-center view of how the store is performing right now. ## What You See on the Dashboard The Dashboard displays your most important business numbers in one place. You can check performance, operational pressure, inventory risk, and customer momentum without digging through menus. ### Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) | Metric | What It Tells You | | ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | **Total Sales** | The total revenue earned in the selected period. | | **Order Count** | The number of completed orders. | | **Average Order Value** | The average amount spent per order. | | **Refunds** | The total value of refunded orders. | | **Net Sales** | Sales after discounts and refunds. | | **Discounts** | Discounts applied during the selected period. | ### Smart Insights Smart Insights highlights the most important things to act on, such as sales dropping against the previous period, high refund or discount activity, low-stock best sellers, busy upcoming hours, table pressure, or register session attention. These insights are rules-based today and designed to become AI-assisted later. ### Operations and Inventory The dashboard also summarizes active orders, peak hour, table occupancy, open register session, low-stock items, urgent restocks, recent orders, best sellers, payment mix, customer mix, and refund activity. Store Pulse cards use color to show health. Green means the metric is healthy, yellow means it needs monitoring, and red means staff should check it. These numbers update in real time as new orders come in. ## Filtering by Date Range You can change the date range to view performance for a specific period. - **Today** -- See sales and orders for the current day. - **This Week** -- View a summary of the past seven days. - **This Month** -- Check your monthly performance. - **Custom Range** -- Pick any start and end date you want. ## Comparing Performance You can compare the current period against a previous one. This helps you spot trends and growth patterns. For example, compare this week to last week. The Dashboard highlights whether your sales went up or down. ## Tips for Using the Dashboard - **Check it daily** to stay on top of your sales. - **Use date filters** to review specific time periods. - **Compare periods** to understand seasonal trends. - **Look at average order value** to gauge customer spending. - **Use Smart Insights** to decide what needs attention first. - **Open Reports** when a dashboard card needs deeper investigation. ## Related Guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/sales-report) - [Using the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) - [Using Store Sessions](/docs/store/using-store-session) --- # How to Apply a Discount to an Order > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/discount/applying-discount-to-order # How to Apply a Discount to an Order You can apply discounts to individual items, the entire order, or enter a custom amount at checkout. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Register** under the **POS** section. 3. Add items to the order as usual. 4. Apply the discount: - **Per item** -- select the item you want to discount, find the discount section, and choose a discount from the list (for example, "10% Off" or "Summer Sale"). - **Entire order** -- go to **Summary**, click the **Menu** button, and select **Discount**. Choose the discount you want to apply. - **Custom discount** -- go to **Summary**, click the **Menu** button, and select **Custom Discount**. Enter the amount or percentage you want to deduct. 5. Review the order to confirm the discount and total are correct. 6. Complete the sale. The receipt will show the discount and the customer's savings. ## Tips - Double-check the discount before completing the order. - You can apply discounts to the whole order or individual items. - Enter promo codes in the discount section if a customer has one. - You can remove or change a discount before finalizing the sale. ## Best Practices - Train staff on how to apply and explain discounts at checkout. - Review your discounts regularly to keep offers current. - Track which discounts are most popular to guide future promotions. --- # How to Create a Discount > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/discount/creating-a-discount # How to Create a Discount Follow these steps to set up a new discount for your store. ![The Create Discount form in the Fuze Store app showing Discount Name, Type (Percentage or Fixed Amount), Value, and Applicable Items fields](/docs/store/discount/create-discount-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Discounts**. 3. Click the **Add Discount** button. 4. Fill in the discount details: - **Enable** -- turn the toggle on to make the discount active. - **Name** -- give the discount a clear name (for example, "10% Off Drinks"). - **Code** -- (optional) set a code customers can enter to claim the discount. - **Rate Type** -- choose Fixed or Percentage. - **Rate** -- enter the amount or percentage to deduct. - **Description** -- (optional) add a short explanation. - **Start Date** -- set when the discount becomes active. - **End Date** -- set when the discount expires. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/discount/overview#field-explanations) for more details on each field. 5. Click **Save**. The discount is now available for future sales. ## Tips - Use clear names so staff and customers recognize the offer. - Double-check discount values to avoid giving away too much. - Set start and end dates for limited-time promotions. - You can edit or remove discounts later as your needs change. ## Best Practices - Review your discounts regularly to keep offers relevant. - Train staff on how to apply and explain discounts at checkout. - Track which discounts perform best to plan future promotions. --- # How to Delete a Discount > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/discount/deleting-discount # How to Delete a Discount When a discount is no longer needed, you can remove it to keep your list clean. There are two ways to do this. ## Step-by-Step Guide ### Option 1: Delete from the Discount List 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Discounts** to see your current list of offers. 3. Click the **Delete** button next to the discount you want to remove. 4. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ### Option 2: Delete from Within a Discount Record 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Discounts** to see your current list of offers. 3. Click on the discount you want to remove. 4. Click the **Delete** button on the detail page. 5. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ## What Happens When You Delete a Discount? - The discount is removed from your list and no longer applies to new sales. - Past sales and reports still show the discount as it was at the time of sale. - You can create a new discount later if your needs change. ## Tips - Deleted discounts cannot be restored. Double-check before confirming. - Only delete discounts you are certain you no longer need. - If you are unsure, consider editing or disabling the discount instead. - Remove outdated discounts to keep your list manageable. ## Best Practices - Review your discounts regularly and remove any that are no longer in use. - Use clear names so staff can find and manage discounts easily. - Communicate changes to your team so everyone stays up to date. --- # Discount Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/discount/overview # Discount Overview Discounts help you attract customers, reward loyalty, and move inventory. Your POS system makes it easy to create, manage, and apply them. ## What Is a Discount? A **discount** is a price reduction on a product, service, or order. It can be a percentage (like 10% off), a fixed amount (like P50 off), or a special offer. Fuze Store calculates and applies discounts automatically at checkout. ## Why Offer Discounts? - **Attract new customers** with special deals. - **Reward loyalty** to keep regulars coming back. - **Move inventory** by clearing old stock with limited-time offers. - **Increase sales** by encouraging customers to buy more. ## How Discounts Work in Your POS - **Automatic or manual** -- set discounts to apply automatically or add them at checkout. - **Flexible scope** -- apply discounts to specific products, categories, or the entire order. - **Stackable or single use** -- decide whether discounts can be combined. - **Transparent receipts** -- every receipt shows the discount and savings. ## Field Explanations When you create or edit a discount, the **Country** and **Currency** fields are auto-populated from your store settings. You do not need to enter them manually. | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable** | Whether the discount is active | Yes | Yes, No | Yes | | **Name** | The discount name shown on receipts | Yes | Any text | Summer Sale | | **Code** | A unique code that staff enter or customers use to apply the discount | Yes | Any text without spaces | SUMMER2025 | | **Description** | A short explanation of the discount | No | Any text | 10% off drinks | | **Rate Type** | How the discount is calculated | Yes | Fixed, Percentage | Percentage | | **Rate** | The amount or percentage to deduct | Yes | Any number | 10 | | **Start Date** | When the discount becomes active | No | Any date | 2025-06-01 | | **End Date** | When the discount expires | No | Any date | 2025-07-01 | | **Status** | The current state of the discount, computed by the system based on dates and enable state | -- | Active, Expired, Scheduled | Active | The **Status** field is not something you set directly. The system determines it automatically. For example, a discount with a future start date shows as "Scheduled." A discount past its end date shows as "Expired." ## Tips - Use clear names and descriptions so staff and customers know the offer. - Set start and end dates for limited-time promotions. - Double-check discount values to avoid giving away too much. - You can edit or remove discounts at any time. ## Best Practices - Review your discounts regularly to keep offers fresh. - Train staff on how to apply and explain discounts at checkout. - Track which discounts perform best to guide future promotions. - Keep discount records for easy reporting. --- # How to Update a Discount > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/discount/updating-a-discount # How to Update a Discount You can change a discount's name, rate, dates, or any other detail at any time. Updates take effect immediately for new sales. ![The Edit Discount form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Discount Name, Type, and Value fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/discount/edit-discount-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Discounts** to see your current list of offers. 3. Click on the discount you want to update. 4. Edit the fields you need to change: - **Enable** -- turn the toggle on or off to activate or deactivate the discount. - **Name** -- update the display name. - **Code** -- (optional) change or add a promo code. - **Rate Type** -- switch between Fixed and Percentage. - **Rate** -- update the amount or percentage. - **Description** -- (optional) revise the explanation. - **Start Date** -- change when the discount becomes active. - **End Date** -- change when the discount expires. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/discount/overview#field-explanations) for more details on each field. 5. Click **Save**. Your changes apply to new sales right away. ## Tips - Double-check your changes before saving to avoid errors. - Ask your manager if you are unsure about a setting. - You can edit or remove discounts later as your offers change. - Use clear names so staff and customers understand the discount. ## Best Practices - Review your discounts regularly, especially after menu or price changes. - Train staff on how to apply and explain discounts at checkout. - Keep a record of discount changes for reporting purposes. --- # Approving Expenses > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/expenses/approving-expenses # Approving Expenses Every expense starts as **Pending**. A manager with approval permission reviews it and either approves or rejects it. This gives you a simple audit trail of who authorized each cost. ## The Approval Workflow An expense moves through three states: | Status | Meaning | | ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------- | | **Pending** | Recorded, waiting for a manager to review | | **Approved** | Reviewed and authorized — counts as a posted record | | **Rejected** | Reviewed and declined | ## Approving or Rejecting 1. Open the sidebar menu and go to **Expenses**. 2. Tap a **Pending** expense to open its details. 3. Press **Approve Expense** or **Reject Expense**. 4. Confirm. The status updates and the reviewer's name is recorded under **Approved By** / **Rejected By**. A rejected expense is locked — it cannot be edited afterward. ## Separate Approver (Optional) By default, anyone with approval permission can approve any pending expense — including one they recorded themselves. If you want stronger control, you can require a **separate approver** so the person who created an expense cannot approve their own. Turn this on under **Preferences → Expenses** when you have more than one approver. With it on, a manager who records an expense must have a different manager approve it. ## Removing an Approved Expense Pending and rejected expenses can be deleted directly. An **approved** expense is a posted financial record, so it is protected: - You must provide a **reason** when removing it — the reason and who removed it are kept for the audit trail. - An approved expense that was part of a **closed cashier session** can no longer be removed, because its amount is already counted in that session's totals. Removing an approved expense keeps a record — it is a reversal, not a silent delete. Always note why you are removing it. ## Tips - **Review promptly.** Approve or reject expenses regularly so reports stay accurate. - **Use rejection, not deletion.** Rejecting keeps the record; deleting an approved expense should be rare and always have a reason. - **Require a separate approver** for stronger spending control once you have multiple managers. ## Related Guides - [Creating an Expense](/docs/store/expenses/creating-an-expense) - [Managing Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/managing-expenses) - [Expense Tracking Overview](/docs/store/expenses/overview) --- # Creating an Expense > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/expenses/creating-an-expense # Creating an Expense You can record a new expense in just a few steps. Each entry captures the amount, category, date, and an optional description and receipt. A receipt can be a photo **or** a PDF document. ![The Create Expense form in the Fuze Store app showing the Receipts picker, Amount, Category, Date, and Description fields](/docs/store/expenses/create-expense-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu and go to **Expenses**. 2. Press the **Add Expense** button. 3. Fill in the expense details (see fields below). 4. Press **Save** to record the expense. Your new expense appears in the expense list immediately. ## Expense Fields | Field | Required | Description | Example | | --------------- | -------- | --------------------------------------- | ------------------------- | | **Amount** | Yes | The total cost of the expense | 1,500 | | **Category** | Yes | The type of expense | Supplies | | **Date** | Yes | When the expense occurred | 2026-03-22 | | **Description** | No | A brief note about the expense | Monthly cleaning supplies | | **Receipt** | No | A photo or PDF of the receipt | receipt.jpg / invoice.pdf | Managers who can approve expenses also see a **Status** field on the form, letting them record an expense as already approved. Everyone else's expenses start as **Pending** and wait for approval. ## Entering the Amount Enter the exact amount you spent. Use the number keypad or type the value directly. The currency matches your store's configured currency. ## Selecting a Category Choose the category that best matches the expense. Categories help you organize and filter expenses later. If none of the existing categories fit, you can [create a custom category](/docs/store/expenses/managing-categories) under **Configurations → Expense Categories**. ## Adding a Description The description field is optional but helpful. Use it to note what the expense was for. Keep descriptions short and specific. For example, "Paper bags for takeout orders" is more useful than "Supplies." ## Attaching a Receipt You can attach receipts for record-keeping — either a photo or a PDF document. 1. Press **Pick Images** to choose or capture a photo (JPG, JPEG, PNG, or GIF). 2. Or press **Pick Documents** to attach a PDF. 3. Each file must be under 2 MB. The receipt saves with the expense entry. Attaching receipts helps you keep proof of purchases. This is useful for accounting and tax purposes. ## Setting the Date The date defaults to today. You can change it to record an expense from a previous date. This is useful when logging expenses after the fact. ## Tips - **Record expenses promptly.** Log expenses as they happen to avoid forgetting. - **Be specific in descriptions.** Clear notes save time when reviewing later. - **Always attach receipts.** Digital receipts are easier to find than paper ones. - **Double-check the amount.** Make sure the number matches your receipt. ## Related Guides - [Expense Tracking Overview](/docs/store/expenses/overview) - [Managing Expense Categories](/docs/store/expenses/managing-categories) - [Managing Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/managing-expenses) - [Approving Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/approving-expenses) --- # Managing Expense Categories > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/expenses/managing-categories # Managing Expense Categories Categories are the labels you assign to each expense — Supplies, Rent, Utilities, Salaries, and so on. Setting up a few clear categories up front makes it easy to record expenses consistently and to filter and total your spending later. ## Where to Find Them Go to **Configurations → Expense Categories**. From here you can see every category, add new ones, edit them, and turn the ones you no longer use on or off. ## Creating a Category 1. Open **Configurations → Expense Categories**. 2. Press **Add** (the **+** button). 3. Fill in the fields: | Field | Required | Description | Example | | --------------- | -------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | | **Status** | — | Whether the category is **Active** and available when recording expenses | Active | | **Name** | Yes | What the category is called | Supplies | | **Color** | Yes | A color swatch so the category is easy to spot in lists and reports | Blue | | **Description** | No | An optional note explaining what belongs in this category | Coffee beans, cups, napkins | 4. Press **Save**. The new category is immediately available on the Create Expense form. Keep your category list short and meaningful — a handful of well-named categories is far easier to work with than dozens of overlapping ones. You can always add more later. ## Editing a Category 1. Open **Configurations → Expense Categories**. 2. Tap the category you want to change. 3. Update the name, color, or description. 4. Press **Save**. Editing a category updates it everywhere, including on expenses that already use it. ## Active vs. Inactive Use the **Status** toggle to control whether a category appears when recording a new expense: - **Active** — shows up in the category picker on the Create Expense form. - **Inactive** — hidden from the picker, but past expenses keep their label and still appear in reports. When you stop using a category, **deactivate it instead of deleting it**. Deactivating cleans up the picker while preserving the history and totals of every expense already filed under it. ## Deleting a Category If you created a category by mistake and nothing is filed under it, you can delete it: 1. Open **Configurations → Expense Categories**. 2. Open the category (or use the delete action in the list). 3. Confirm the deletion. Deleting is permanent. For any category you have actually used, deactivate it instead — that keeps your past expenses and reports intact. ## Tips - **Set up categories before you start recording expenses** so every entry lands in the right place from day one. - **Use distinct colors** for your most common categories to scan lists and summaries faster. - **Review your categories occasionally** and deactivate the ones you no longer use to keep the picker tidy. ## Related Guides - [Creating an Expense](/docs/store/expenses/creating-an-expense) - [Managing Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/managing-expenses) - [Approving Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/approving-expenses) - [Expense Tracking Overview](/docs/store/expenses/overview) --- # Managing Expenses > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/expenses/managing-expenses # Managing Expenses After you record expenses, you can view, filter, edit, and delete them at any time. The expense list gives you a clear view of all your business spending. ## Viewing the Expense List 1. Open the sidebar menu and go to **Expenses**. 2. You see a list of all recorded expenses, sorted by date (newest first). Each entry shows the amount, category, date, and description. Press any expense to view its full details, including any attached receipt. ## Filtering Expenses Filters are always visible at the top of the Expenses page — no dialog required. They apply in real time as you make selections. ### Filter Controls | Control | Description | | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Search bar** | Type to search expenses by description or keyword | | **Status tabs** | Filter by expense status (All, Pending, Approved, Rejected, etc.) | | **Date range** | Select a preset period or a custom start and end date | ### How to Apply Filters 1. Open the **Expenses** page from the sidebar. 2. Use the search bar to find expenses by keyword. 3. Tap a **status tab** to filter by status. 4. Select a **date range** to narrow results to a specific period. 5. The list updates instantly as you change any filter. To clear all active filters, tap **Clear Filters** — this button appears next to the status tabs whenever a filter is active. ## Editing an Expense You can update any expense entry if you need to correct a mistake or add more detail. 1. Find the expense in the list and press it to open. 2. Press the **Edit** button. 3. Update the fields you want to change (amount, category, date, description, or receipt). 4. Press **Save**. Changes apply immediately. The expense list reflects the updated information. ## Deleting an Expense You can remove an expense entry that was recorded by mistake or is no longer needed. 1. Find the expense in the list and press it to open. 2. Press the **Delete** button. 3. Confirm the deletion. Pending and rejected expenses are removed directly. An **approved** expense is a posted record — removing it asks for a **reason** and keeps an audit trail, and it cannot be removed once it belongs to a closed cashier session. See [Approving Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/approving-expenses). ## Reviewing Expense Totals At the top of the Expenses page, you can see a summary of your total spending. This summary updates based on your active filters. Use it to quickly check how much you spent in a given time period or category. ## Tips - **Review expenses weekly.** Regular reviews help you catch errors early. - **Use date filters for monthly reports.** Filter by month to see spending trends. - **Check categories for accuracy.** Make sure each expense is in the right category. - **Keep receipts attached.** If you forgot to attach a receipt, edit the expense to add it later. ## Related Guides - [Expense Tracking Overview](/docs/store/expenses/overview) - [Creating an Expense](/docs/store/expenses/creating-an-expense) - [Approving Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/approving-expenses) - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Expense Tracking Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/expenses/overview # Expense Tracking Overview Understanding your costs is essential to running a profitable business. The Expense Tracking feature lets you record, categorize, and review all your business expenses directly in your POS. ## What is Expense Tracking? Expense tracking lets you log money your business spends. You record each expense with an amount, category, date, and optional receipt. This gives you a clear picture of where your money goes. Your POS stores all expense data alongside your sales data. This makes it easy to compare income and costs in one place. ## Why Track Expenses? - **Know your true profit.** Revenue alone does not tell the full story. Subtract expenses to see real profit. - **Spot spending patterns.** Identify which categories cost the most over time. - **Prepare for tax season.** Keep organized records of deductible business expenses. - **Make better decisions.** Use expense data to cut unnecessary costs and invest wisely. ## What You Can Track You can record any type of business expense. Common examples include: | Category | Examples | | ------------------ | --------------------------------------------- | | **Supplies** | Packaging, cleaning products, office supplies | | **Rent** | Monthly store or office rent | | **Utilities** | Electricity, water, internet | | **Inventory** | Stock purchases, raw materials | | **Marketing** | Ads, flyers, social media promotions | | **Maintenance** | Equipment repairs, store upkeep | | **Transportation** | Delivery costs, fuel, vehicle maintenance | | **Other** | Miscellaneous or one-time costs | ## Key Features - **Categorize expenses.** Group spending by type for easy analysis. - **Attach receipts.** Take a photo of your receipt and attach it to the record. - **Filter and search.** Find expenses by date range, category, or keyword. - **View totals.** See total spending by category or time period. - **Edit anytime.** Update or correct expense entries as needed. ## How Expenses Help Profit Calculations When you track both sales and expenses, your POS can show you a clearer picture of profitability. Your reports factor in recorded expenses to calculate net profit alongside gross revenue. ## Related Guides - [Managing Expense Categories](/docs/store/expenses/managing-categories) - [Creating an Expense](/docs/store/expenses/creating-an-expense) - [Managing Expenses](/docs/store/expenses/managing-expenses) - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Exporting Your Store Data > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/export/overview # Exporting Your Store Data You can export your store data from Fuze Store POS at any time. This is useful for creating backups, moving data to another system, or keeping offline records. ## How to Export Data 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Export Data** from the Store screen. 4. Choose the type of data you want to export (such as products, customers, or categories). 5. Click **Download**. Your data will be saved as a CSV or Excel file. ## What You Can Export - Products - Categories - Customers - Services - Discounts - Taxes - Modifiers - Product Stocks - Areas - Roles - Gift Cards - Staff Check the menu for all available export types. ## Tips - Export your data regularly to maintain up-to-date backups. - Use exported files as templates when preparing data for import. - Store backup files in a safe location outside of your POS device. ## Related Guides - [Getting Started Guide](/docs/getting-started) - [How to Add Products](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [How to Add Customers](/docs/store/customer/adding-customer-to-store) - [How to Import Data](/docs/store/import/overview) --- # How to Apply a Gift Card to an Order > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/gift-card/applying-gift-cards-to-order # How to Apply a Gift Card to an Order Customers can use a gift card to pay for part or all of their order at checkout. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Register** under the **POS** section. 3. Add items to the order as usual. 4. Go to the **Gift Cards** section. 5. Enter the gift card code. The system displays the card details once the code is recognized. 6. Click **Apply** to use the gift card for this order. 7. Review the order to confirm the gift card has been applied and the total is correct. 8. Complete the sale. The receipt will show the gift card payment and any remaining balance. ## Tips - Double-check the gift card code before applying. - You can use more than one gift card on a single order. - If a gift card does not cover the full amount, choose another payment method for the remainder. - You can remove or change the payment method before finalizing the sale. ## Best Practices - Train staff on how to apply and check gift card balances at checkout. - Remind customers to keep their gift card codes safe. - Track gift card usage to measure promotion performance. - Keep records of gift card payments for reporting. --- # How to Create a Gift Card > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/gift-card/creating-a-gift-card # How to Create a Gift Card Follow these steps to add a new gift card to your store. ![The New Gift Card form in the Fuze Store app showing Enable, Amount, Max Usage, Code, Description, and Expires At fields](/docs/store/gift-card/create-gift-card-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Gift Cards**. 3. Click the **New Gift Card** button. 4. Fill in the gift card details: - **Enable** -- turn the toggle on to make the gift card active. - **Amount** -- enter the value to load onto the card. - **Max Usage** -- set the maximum number of times the card can be redeemed. Leave it at **0 for unlimited** use. - **Code** -- enter a unique code (for example, "GC2025"). - **Description** -- (optional) add a short description (for example, "Gift card for special occasions"). - **Expires At** -- (optional) set when the gift card expires. Leave it blank for a card that never expires. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/gift-card/overview#field-explanations) for more details on each field. 5. Click **Save**. The gift card is now ready to sell or give to customers. ## Tips - Use clear names and codes so staff and customers recognize each card. - Double-check the value and code before saving. - Set start and end dates for seasonal or limited-time gift cards. - You can edit or disable gift cards later as your needs change. ## Best Practices - Review your gift card options regularly to keep them appealing. - Train staff on how to sell, redeem, and check gift card balances. - Track which gift cards perform best to plan future promotions. --- # How to Delete a Gift Card > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/gift-card/deleting-gift-card # How to Delete a Gift Card When a gift card is no longer needed, you can remove it to keep your list clean. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Gift Cards** to see your current list. 3. Find the gift card you want to delete and click its **Delete** button. 4. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ## What Happens When You Delete a Gift Card? - The gift card disappears from your list and can no longer be used for new sales or redemptions. - Its records are **preserved, not erased** — past sales, redemptions, and reports still show the gift card as it was at the time of use. - You can create a new gift card later if your needs change. ## Tips - Deleted gift cards cannot be restored. Double-check before confirming. - Only delete gift cards you are certain you no longer need. - If you are unsure, consider editing or disabling the gift card instead. - Remove outdated gift cards to keep your list manageable. ## Best Practices - Review your gift cards regularly and remove any that are no longer in use. - Use clear names so staff can find and manage gift cards easily. - Communicate changes to your team so everyone stays up to date. --- # Gift Card Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/gift-card/overview # Gift Card Overview Gift cards let your customers prepay for products and services. They drive repeat visits, attract new shoppers, and make great gifts. Your POS system tracks balances and redemptions automatically. ## What Is a Gift Card? A **gift card** is a prepaid card or digital code that works like cash in your store. Customers buy them as gifts, rewards, or store credit. Fuze Store tracks each card's balance and handles redemptions at checkout. ## Why Offer Gift Cards? - **Attract new customers** who receive gift cards from friends or family. - **Boost sales** since customers often spend more than the card's value. - **Encourage loyalty** by giving customers a reason to return. - **Simplify gifting** for your customers. ## How Gift Cards Work in Your POS - **Quick setup** -- create and sell gift cards in a few clicks. - **Flexible formats** -- offer physical cards, digital codes, or both. - **Automatic tracking** -- the system manages balances and redemptions. - **Clear receipts** -- every receipt shows gift card usage and remaining balance. ## Field Explanations | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable** | Whether the gift card is active | Yes | On | | **Amount** | The value loaded onto the card | Yes | 500 | | **Max Usage** | Maximum number of times it can be redeemed. Leave at **0 for unlimited**. | No | 1 | | **Code** | The unique code for the gift card (unique per store) | Yes | GC2025 | | **Description** | A short description of the gift card | No | Birthday Gift | | **Expires At** | When the gift card expires (leave blank for no expiry) | No | 2025-12-31 1:30 PM | ## Tips - Use clear names and codes so staff and customers recognize each card. - Set an expiry date for seasonal or limited-time gift cards (leave it blank for cards that never expire). - Double-check values and codes before saving. - You can edit or disable gift cards at any time. ## Best Practices - Review your gift card offerings regularly to keep them appealing. - Train staff on how to sell, redeem, and check gift card balances. - Track which gift cards perform best to guide future promotions. - Keep records of gift card sales and redemptions for reporting. --- # How to Update a Gift Card > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/gift-card/updating-a-gift-card # How to Update a Gift Card You can change a gift card's amount, code, expiry, or any other detail at any time. Updates take effect immediately. ![The Edit Gift Card form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Amount and Code fields with a Save button](/docs/store/gift-card/edit-gift-card-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Gift Cards** to see your current list. 3. Click the **Edit** button on the gift card you want to update. 4. Edit the fields you need to change: - **Enable** -- turn the toggle on or off to activate or deactivate the card. - **Amount** -- update the value loaded onto the card. - **Max Usage** -- update how many times the card can be redeemed (0 = unlimited). - **Code** -- change the unique code. - **Description** -- (optional) revise the description. - **Expires At** -- (optional) change when the card expires, or clear it for no expiry. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/gift-card/overview#field-explanations) for more details on each field. 5. Click **Save**. Your changes take effect right away. ## Tips - Double-check your changes before saving to avoid errors. - Ask your manager if you are unsure about a setting. - You can edit or disable gift cards later as your needs change. - Use clear names and codes so staff and customers recognize each card. ## Best Practices - Review your gift cards regularly, especially after product or price changes. - Train staff on how to sell, redeem, and check gift card balances. - Keep a record of gift card changes for reporting purposes. --- # Importing Areas > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/areas # Importing Areas You can import areas and their units into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your floor layout in bulk. Areas represent sections of your store (like "Al Fresco" or "Main Hall"), and units represent individual spots within those areas (like tables or seats). ![The Import Areas dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Areas** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Areas.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your areas and units will be added to the store. ## Field Reference The import file contains both **area** rows and **unit** rows. Set the **type** column to indicate which each row represents. | Field | Description | Required | Applies To | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the area or unit. Leave blank to create new. | | Both | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **code** | Unique code for the area. | | AREA | | al-fresco | | **type** | Whether this row is an area or a unit. | **Yes** | Both | AREA, UNIT | AREA | | **name** | Name of the area or unit. | **Yes** | Both | | Al Fresco | | **description** | A brief description of the area. | | AREA | | | | **capacity** | How many people can fit in the unit. | **Yes** | UNIT | Numeric value | 5 | | **status** | Current status of the unit. | **Yes** | UNIT | AVAILABLE, UNAVAILABLE, OCCUPIED, RESERVED | AVAILABLE | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Each unit row in the file belongs to the area row directly above it. - Keep area and unit names clear so staff can identify them quickly. --- # Importing Categories > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/categories # Importing Categories You can import categories into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your category structure in bulk. This is useful when migrating from another system or reorganizing your store. ![The Import Categories dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Categories** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Categories.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your categories will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Categories import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the category. Leave empty to create a new category. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **parent_id** | UUID of the parent category. Leave empty if none. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174001 | | **code** | Short code for internal use. Also serves as an identifier. An existing code updates the matching category. | | | massage-therapy | | **name** | Name of the category. | **Yes** | | Massage Therapy | | **color** | Hex color that represents the category. | | | #FF5733 | | **description** | A short note about the category. | | | Relaxing massages for stress relief | | **is_active** | Whether the category is active. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **is_include_in_menu** | Whether the category appears on the POS Register screen. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Use clear, descriptive names for your categories. - Keep your category structure organized for easier management. --- # Importing Discounts > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/discounts # Importing Discounts You can import discounts into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your discount rules in bulk. This works for adding new promotions or migrating discount data from another system. ![The Import Discounts dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Discounts** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Discounts.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your discounts will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Discounts import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the discount. Leave empty to create a new entry. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **code** | Short code for internal use. Also serves as an identifier. An existing code updates the matching discount. | | | pwd-discount | | **name** | Name of the discount. | **Yes** | | PWD Discount | | **description** | A short note about the discount. | | | Discount for Persons with Disabilities | | **is_active** | Whether the discount is active. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **rate** | The discount rate value. | **Yes** | | 20 | | **rate_type** | Whether the rate is a percentage or a fixed amount. | **Yes** | FIXED, PERCENTAGE | PERCENTAGE | | **duration_from** | Start date for the discount (ISO 8601 format). | | ISO 8601 date | 2023-01-01 | | **duration_to** | End date for the discount (ISO 8601 format). | | ISO 8601 date | 2023-12-31 | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Use clear, descriptive names for your discounts. - Set start and end dates to control when discounts are valid. --- # Importing Gift Cards > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/gift-cards # Importing Gift Cards You can import gift cards into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your gift card inventory in bulk. This is useful when creating many gift cards at once or migrating from another system. ![The Import Gift Cards dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Gift Cards** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Gift Cards.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your gift cards will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Gift Cards import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the gift card. Leave empty to create a new gift card. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **code** | Short code for internal use. Also serves as an identifier. An existing code updates the matching gift card. | | | EARLYBIRD | | **amount** | The monetary value of the gift card. | **Yes** | Any number | 100 | | **description** | A short note about the gift card. | | | Gift Card for early bird customers | | **max_usage** | Maximum number of times the gift card can be used. | | Any number | 100 | | **usage_count** | Number of times the gift card has already been used. | | Any number | 0 | | **is_active** | Whether the gift card is active. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **expires_at** | Expiry date and time for the gift card (ISO datetime format). | | ISO Datetime | 2024-12-31T23:59:59Z | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Set expiry dates to control when gift cards stop being valid. - Use unique, memorable codes so customers can redeem them easily. --- # Importing Modifiers > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/modifiers # Importing Modifiers You can import modifiers into Fuze Store POS to set up or update product and service extras in bulk. Modifiers let you offer options like sizes, toppings, or add-ons. ![The Import Modifiers dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Modifiers** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Modifiers.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your modifiers will be added to the store. ## Field Reference The import file contains both **modifier** rows and **option** rows. Set the **modifier_type** column to indicate which type each row represents. | Field | Description | Required | Applies To | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the modifier or option. Leave blank to create new. | | Both | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **code** | Unique code for the modifier. | | MODIFIER | | mod-001 | | **modifier_type** | Whether this row is a modifier or an option. | **Yes** | Both | MODIFIER, OPTION | MODIFIER | | **name** | Name of the modifier or option. | **Yes** | Both | | Massage Pressure | | **label** | Display label on receipts and POS Register. Defaults to **name** if empty. | | Both | | Massage Pressure | | **is_active** | Whether the modifier is active. | **Yes** | MODIFIER | YES, NO | YES | | **is_required** | Whether the modifier is required on an item. | **Yes** | MODIFIER | YES, NO | NO | | **is_visible_on_front** | Whether the modifier is visible on the POS front. | **Yes** | MODIFIER | YES, NO | YES | | **type** | Selection type for the modifier. | **Yes** | MODIFIER | SINGLE, MULTIPLE | SINGLE | | **min_options** | Minimum number of options the customer must select. | **Yes**, if type is **MULTIPLE** | MODIFIER | | 1 | | **max_options** | Maximum number of options the customer can select. | **Yes**, if type is **MULTIPLE** | MODIFIER | | 3 | | **is_selected** | Whether the option is selected by default. | | OPTION | YES, NO | NO | | **base_price** | Price for the option. | **Yes** | OPTION | | 12.50 | | **ordering** | Display order of the option. | | OPTION | | 1 | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Each option row in the file belongs to the modifier row directly above it. - Use clear names so staff can quickly identify each modifier and option. --- # Importing Your Store Data > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/overview # Importing Your Store Data You can bring your data into Fuze Store POS in just a few steps. This works whether you are migrating from another system, updating items in bulk, or restoring a backup. ## How to Import Data 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose the **Type** of data you want to import from the dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. 5. Click **Import**. Your data will be added to the store. ## What You Can Import - Products - Categories - Customers - Services - Discounts - Taxes - Modifiers - Product Stocks - Areas - Roles - Gift Cards - Staff Check the menu for all available import types. ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Export your data regularly as a backup. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. ## Related Guides - [Getting Started Guide](/docs/getting-started) - [How to Add Products](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [How to Add Customers](/docs/store/customer/adding-customer-to-store) - [How to Export Reports](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Importing Product Stocks > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/product-stocks # Importing Product Stocks You can import product stock levels into Fuze Store POS to quickly update your inventory. This is useful for bulk stock adjustments or migrating inventory data from another system. ![The Import Product Stocks dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area, a Download Template button, and a location selection dropdown](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Product Stocks** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Product Stocks.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your stock data will be updated in the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Product Stocks import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the product. Leave empty to create a new product. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **sku** | Stock Keeping Unit. A unique code for each product. | | | SKU-12345 | | **name** | Name of the product. | **Yes** | | Grilled Chicken | | **manage_inventory** | Whether inventory tracking is enabled. | **Yes** | YES, NO | NO | | **quantity** | Quantity in stock. | **Yes**, if manage_inventory is **Yes** | | 100 | | **low_stock_level** | Threshold for low stock alerts. | | | 10 | | **stock_status** | Current stock status. | **Yes**, if manage_inventory is **Yes** | IN_STOCK, OUT_OF_STOCK | IN_STOCK | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Keep stock quantities accurate to prevent overselling. - Set low stock levels so you get alerts before running out. --- # Importing Products > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/products # Importing Products You can import products into Fuze Store POS to quickly set up or update your inventory. This works for migrating from another system or adding many items at once. ![The Import Products dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area, a Download Template button, and a column mapping preview](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Products** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Products.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your products will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Products import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the product. Leave empty to create a new product. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **sku** | Stock Keeping Unit. A unique code for each product. | | | SKU-12345 | | **enable_product** | Whether the product is active in the store. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **availability** | Product availability status. | **Yes** | AVAILABLE, UNAVAILABLE | AVAILABLE | | **name** | Name of the product. | **Yes** | | Grilled Chicken | | **type** | Type of product. | **Yes** | SIMPLE, BUNDLE | simple | | **bundle_item_ids** | Pipe-separated list of product IDs or SKUs in the bundle. | **Yes**, if type is **BUNDLE** | | SKU-123\|SKU-124 | | **category_ids** | Pipe-separated list of category IDs or codes. | | | chickens\|best-sellers | | **description** | Description of the product. | | | Delicious grilled chicken | | **weight** | Weight of the product. | | | 1.5 | | **weight_unit** | Unit of weight. | | g, kg, lb, oz | kg | | **manage_inventory** | Whether inventory tracking is enabled. | **Yes** | YES, NO | NO | | **quantity** | Quantity in stock. | **Yes**, if manage_inventory is **Yes** | | 100 | | **low_stock_level** | Threshold for low stock alerts. | | | 10 | | **stock_status** | Current stock status. | **Yes**, if manage_inventory is **Yes** | IN_STOCK, OUT_OF_STOCK | IN_STOCK | | **modifier_ids** | Pipe-separated list of modifier IDs or codes. | | | chicken-part\|chicken-size | | **price** | Selling price of the product (tax included). | **Yes** | | 79.99 | | **cost** | Cost price of the product. | | | 10.00 | | **enable_special_price** | Whether the special price is enabled. | | YES, NO | NO | | **special_price** | Special discounted price. | | | 7.99 | | **special_price_from** | Start date for the special price (ISO format). | | | 2024-06-01 | | **special_price_to** | End date for the special price (ISO format). | | | 2024-06-30 | | **tax_class** | Tax class name or code. | | TAXABLE_GOODS, NONE | NONE | | **tax_id** | Tax UUID associated with the product. | **Yes**, if tax_class is **TAXABLE_GOODS** | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614173000 | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Keep product names and SKUs consistent across your inventory. - Update your product data regularly to reflect current prices and stock levels. --- # Importing Roles > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/roles # Importing Roles You can import roles into Fuze Store POS to set up or update staff access levels in bulk. Each role defines which parts of the system a staff member can access. ![The Import Roles dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Roles** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Roles.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your roles will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Roles import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the role. Leave empty to create a new role. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **code** | Short code for internal use. Also serves as an identifier. An existing code updates the matching role. | | | Cashier | | **name** | Name of the role. | **Yes** | | Cashier | | **description** | A short note about the role. | | | Responsible for handling customer transactions | | **is_active** | Whether the role is active. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **permissions** | Pipe-separated list of permissions. See the full list below. | **Yes** | See list below | store\|category_view\|product\|service\|staff_view | ## List of Permissions - **superadmin** -- Full access to all features and settings - **store** -- Manage store settings (includes all store_ permissions) - **store_modify** -- Modify store settings - **store_preferences_modify** -- Change store preferences - **store_export** -- Export store data - **store_import** -- Import store data - **store_dashboard_view** -- View the store dashboard - **area** -- Manage store areas (includes all area_ permissions) - **area_view** -- View areas and units - **area_modify** -- Modify areas and units - **area_delete** -- Delete areas and units - **billing_history** -- Manage billing history (includes all billing_history_ permissions) - **billing_history_view** -- View billing history - **billing_history_download** -- Download billing history - **category** -- Manage categories (includes all category_ permissions) - **category_view** -- View categories - **category_modify** -- Modify categories - **category_delete** -- Delete categories - **customer** -- Manage customers (includes all customer_ permissions) - **customer_view** -- View customers - **customer_modify** -- Modify customers - **customer_delete** -- Delete customers - **discount** -- Manage discounts (includes all discount_ permissions) - **discount_view** -- View discounts - **discount_modify** -- Modify discounts - **discount_delete** -- Delete discounts - **event** -- Manage events (includes all event_ permissions) - **event_view** -- View events - **event_modify** -- Modify events - **event_delete** -- Delete events - **gift_card** -- Manage gift cards (includes all gift_card_ permissions) - **gift_card_view** -- View gift cards - **gift_card_modify** -- Modify gift cards - **gift_card_delete** -- Delete gift cards - **invitation** -- Manage invitations (includes all invitation_ permissions) - **invitation_view** -- View invitations - **invitation_modify** -- Modify invitations - **invitation_delete** -- Delete invitations - **item** -- Manage items (includes all item_ permissions) - **item_view** -- View items - **item_modify** -- Modify items - **item_delete** -- Delete items - **order** -- Manage orders (includes all order_ permissions) - **order_view** -- View orders - **order_create** -- Create new orders - **order_modify** -- Modify orders - **payment_method** -- Manage payment methods (includes all payment_method_ permissions) - **payment_method_view** -- View payment methods - **payment_method_modify** -- Modify payment methods - **refund** -- Manage refunds (includes all refund_ permissions) - **refund_view** -- View refunds - **refund_modify** -- Modify refunds - **report** -- Manage reports (includes all report_ permissions) - **report_view** -- View reports - **report_download** -- Download reports - **role** -- Manage roles (includes all role_ permissions) - **role_view** -- View roles - **role_modify** -- Modify roles - **role_delete** -- Delete roles - **session** -- Manage sessions (includes all session_ permissions) - **session_modify** -- Modify sessions - **staff** -- Manage staff (includes all staff_ permissions) - **staff_view** -- View staff - **staff_modify** -- Modify staff - **staff_delete** -- Delete staff - **subscription** -- Manage subscription (includes all subscription_ permissions) - **subscription_view** -- View subscription details - **tax** -- Manage taxes (includes all tax_ permissions) - **tax_view** -- View taxes - **tax_modify** -- Modify taxes - **tax_delete** -- Delete taxes - **transaction** -- Manage transactions (includes all transaction_ permissions) - **transaction_view** -- View transactions - **transaction_modify** -- Modify transactions - **waiting_list** -- Manage waiting list (includes all waiting_list_ permissions) - **waiting_list_view** -- View waiting list - **waiting_list_modify** -- Modify waiting list ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Use clear, descriptive names for your roles. - Assign only the permissions each role actually needs. --- # Importing Services > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/services # Importing Services You can import services into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your service catalog in bulk. This works for migrating from another system or adding many services at once. ![The Import Services dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Services** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Services.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your services will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Services import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the service. Leave empty to create a new service. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **sku** | Stock Keeping Unit. A unique code for each service. | | | SKU-4567 | | **enable_service** | Whether the service is active in the store. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **availability** | Service availability status. | **Yes** | AVAILABLE, UNAVAILABLE | AVAILABLE | | **name** | Name of the service. | **Yes** | | Thai Massage | | **type** | Type of service. | **Yes** | SIMPLE, BUNDLE | simple | | **bundle_item_ids** | Pipe-separated list of service IDs or SKUs in the bundle. | **Yes**, if type is **BUNDLE** | | SKU-456\|SKU-789 | | **category_ids** | Pipe-separated list of category IDs or codes. | | | massages\|best-sellers | | **description** | Description of the service. | | | | | **duration** | Duration of the service. | **Yes** | | 1.5 | | **duration_period** | Unit of duration. | **Yes** | MINUTE, HOUR, DAY, WEEK, MONTH, YEAR | HOUR | | **modifier_ids** | Pipe-separated list of modifier IDs or codes. | | | pressure-type | | **price** | Selling price of the service (tax included). | **Yes** | | 1199.00 | | **cost** | Cost price of the service. | | | 0.00 | | **enable_special_price** | Whether the special price is enabled. | | YES, NO | YES | | **special_price** | Special discounted price. | | | 899.00 | | **special_price_from** | Start date for the special price (ISO format). | | | 2024-06-01 | | **special_price_to** | End date for the special price (ISO format). | | | 2024-06-30 | | **tax_class** | Tax class name or code. | | TAXABLE_GOODS, NONE | NONE | | **tax_id** | Tax UUID associated with the service. | **Yes**, if tax_class is **TAXABLE_GOODS** | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614173000 | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Keep service names and pricing consistent across your catalog. - Update your service information regularly to reflect current offerings. --- # Importing Staff > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/staffs # Importing Staff You can import staff members into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your team in bulk. This is useful when onboarding multiple employees or migrating from another system. ![The Import Staff dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Staffs** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Staffs.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your staff members will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Staff import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the staff member. Leave empty to create a new entry. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **role_id** | UUID or code identifier of the role to assign. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174001 or barista | | **first_name** | First name of the staff member. | **Yes** | | John | | **last_name** | Last name of the staff member. | **Yes** | | Doe | | **email** | Email address of the staff member. | | | john.doe@email.com | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Make sure each staff member has the correct role assigned. - Keep staff records up to date as your team changes. --- # Importing Taxes > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import/taxes # Importing Taxes You can import tax rates into Fuze Store POS to set up or update your tax configuration in bulk. This is useful when migrating from another system or adding new tax rules. ![The Import Taxes dialog in the Fuze Store app showing a CSV file upload area and a Download Template button](/docs/store/import/import-upload-dialog.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Go to **Store** and select **Store** from the list. 3. Select **Import** from the Store screen. 4. Fill in the import form: - Choose **Taxes** from the Type dropdown. - Upload your file in **CSV** or **Excel** format. > See [Sample Taxes.xlsx](#) for reference. 5. Click **Import**. Your tax rates will be added to the store. ## Field Reference Here are the columns in the Taxes import file: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **id** | UUID identifier for the tax. Leave empty to create a new entry. | | | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **name** | Name of the tax. | **Yes** | | General VAT | | **description** | A short note about the tax. | | | General VAT of the Philippines | | **is_active** | Whether the tax is active. | **Yes** | YES, NO | YES | | **rate** | The tax rate value. | **Yes** | | 20 | | **rate_type** | Whether the rate is a percentage or a fixed amount. | **Yes** | FIXED, PERCENTAGE | PERCENTAGE | | **currency** | ISO currency code for the tax. | **Yes** | ISO Currency Code | PHP | | **country** | ISO country code the tax applies to. | **Yes** | ISO Country Code | PH | ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - Use descriptive names so you can identify each tax quickly. - Keep your tax structure organized and review it regularly. --- # How to Import or Export Store Data > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/import-export-data # How to Import or Export Store Data You can move data in and out of Fuze Store POS in a few steps. Use export to create backups or move data to another system. Use import to add or update data in bulk. ## How to Export Data 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store Settings** from the menu. 3. Click **Export Data**. 4. Choose the type of data you want to export (products, categories, services, etc.). 5. Click **Download**. Your data will be saved as a CSV or Excel file. ## How to Import Data 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store Settings** from the menu. 3. Click **Import Data**. 4. Click **Upload** and choose your file (CSV or Excel format). - Select the correct data type you want to import (products, customers, etc.). 5. Click **Import**. Your data will be added to the store. ## Tips - Review your data before importing to avoid errors. - Export your data regularly for backups. - Download a sample export file first if you are unsure about formatting. - You can import and export products, customers, and more. Check the menu for all options. ## Related Guides - [Getting Started Guide](/docs/getting-started) - [How to Add Products](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [How to Add Customers](/docs/store/customer/adding-customer-to-store) - [How to Export Reports](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Inventory Approvals & Permissions > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/approvals-and-permissions # Inventory Approvals & Permissions Larger stores often want a second set of eyes on inventory actions that move money or stock. Fuze Store offers two controls for this: **manager approval** for high-value actions and **location-scoped permissions** that limit which locations a staff member can work in. Manager approval requires the **Staff Operations** add-on in addition to Inventory Management. If Staff Operations is off, inventory works without any approval step — nothing is blocked. ## Manager Approval (Segregation of Duties) When Staff Operations is active, you can require a manager to approve two sensitive inventory actions: | Action | When Approval Applies | | --- | --- | | **Placing a purchase order** | When the order total is at or above your configured threshold. | | **Adjusting stock** | When the adjustment quantity is at or above your configured threshold. | ### How an Approval Works A cashier or clerk places a large purchase order or makes a stock adjustment. If the action is over the threshold and the staff member can't authorize it themselves, Fuze Store pauses the action and prompts for a manager's PIN. A manager enters their PIN on the same screen — the staff member never has to log out. The action then completes automatically. Owners and managers can authorize these actions themselves. A clerk with only inventory edit access needs a manager's approval. For purchase-order placing, you can require that the approver is a **different** person than the one who created the order. ### Configuring Thresholds Approval thresholds and which actions require sign-off are set per store. By default, both placing a purchase order and adjusting stock require manager approval, and placing a purchase order additionally requires that the approver is a **different** person than the one who created it. You can set a quantity threshold so only stock adjustments above it need sign-off. Adjust these to match how much you trust your front-line staff. ## Location-Scoped Permissions If you run more than one location, you can limit a staff member to the locations they actually work in. Once a staff member is assigned to specific locations, they can only **receive purchase orders**, **ship or receive transfers**, or **adjust stock** at those locations. | Situation | Behavior | | --- | --- | | **Staff member has no assignments** | Unrestricted — they can work at any location. | | **Single-location store** | No restriction applies — there is nothing to scope. | | **Owner** | Always unrestricted, regardless of assignments. | | **Staff assigned to specific locations** | Limited to those locations only. Acting elsewhere is blocked. | This keeps a clerk at your downtown branch from accidentally — or intentionally — adjusting stock at your warehouse. ## Related Guides - [Purchase Orders](/docs/store/inventory/purchase-orders) - [Stock Transfers](/docs/store/inventory/stock-transfers) - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) --- # Low-Stock Alerts & Auto-Reorder > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/low-stock-and-reorder # Low-Stock Alerts & Auto-Reorder Fuze Store can warn you before a product runs out — and, optionally, draft a purchase order automatically when stock drops too low. Both features are controlled from **Preferences → Store** under the inventory settings. ## Low-Stock Alerts When a product's stock falls to or below its **low-stock threshold**, Fuze Store flags it and can email the store owner. On the product's inventory settings, set the **low-stock level** — the quantity at which the product should be flagged. In **Preferences → Store**, turn on **Low-stock alerts**. When products drop below their thresholds, the owner receives a **single digest email** listing every low item in one table — not one email per product. The digest is de-duplicated, so you won't be re-emailed about the same item repeatedly within a short window. Each product is only re-alerted after a cool-down period. ## Auto-Reorder Auto-reorder drafts a purchase order automatically when a product crosses its reorder point, so replenishment is one approval away instead of a manual rebuild. On each product you want auto-reordered, set its **preferred supplier** and the **reorder quantity** to draft. In **Preferences → Store**, turn on **Auto-reorder**. Each day, Fuze Store groups low products by supplier and drafts a purchase order for each. The drafts wait in **Purchase Orders** for you to review and place. Auto-reorder only drafts orders — it never places them on its own. You always review and place the draft yourself. ## Plan Requirements Both low-stock alerts and auto-reorder are part of the **Inventory Management** add-on. If the add-on is inactive, these settings are hidden and no alerts or drafts are generated. Your thresholds and preferences are preserved, so everything resumes the moment the add-on is active again. ## Related Guides - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) - [Purchase Orders](/docs/store/inventory/purchase-orders) - [Suppliers](/docs/store/inventory/suppliers) - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) --- # Inventory Management Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/overview # Inventory Management Overview Inventory Management is one of the few add-ons **not** unlocked during a free trial. To use it, purchase the add-on on any paid plan. Fuze Store includes built-in inventory management tools. You can track stock for every product, get alerts when stock runs low, and manage inventory across multiple locations. ## Key Features | Feature | What It Does | | --- | --- | | **Stock Tracking** | Monitor current stock levels for each product. | | **Low-Stock Alerts** | Get notified when a product falls below a set threshold. | | **Multi-Location Support** | Track stock separately for each store location. | | **Automatic Deduction** | Stock decreases automatically when orders are completed. | | **Stock Transfers** | Move stock between locations as needed. | ## How Inventory Works When you create a product, you can set an initial stock quantity. Every time a customer completes an order, the system deducts the sold items from your stock count. You can view current stock levels from the product detail screen at any time. ## Low-Stock Alerts You can set a minimum stock threshold for each product. When stock drops to or below that number, the system flags the product as low stock. This helps you reorder before you run out. ## Multi-Location Inventory If you operate from multiple locations, you can track stock for each one independently. This gives you a clear picture of what is available at each site. ## Getting Started with Inventory 1. **Enable stock tracking** when creating or editing a product. 2. **Set initial quantities** for each product. 3. **Set low-stock thresholds** to receive alerts. 4. **Review stock levels** regularly from the product list or inventory screen. ## Related Guides - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) - [Stock Transfers](/docs/store/inventory/stock-transfers) - [Purchase Orders](/docs/store/inventory/purchase-orders) - [Suppliers](/docs/store/inventory/suppliers) - [Stock Counts](/docs/store/inventory/stock-counts) - [Low-Stock Alerts & Auto-Reorder](/docs/store/inventory/low-stock-and-reorder) - [Approvals & Permissions](/docs/store/inventory/approvals-and-permissions) - [Creating a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Purchase Orders > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/purchase-orders # Purchase Orders A purchase order (PO) is a record of stock you are ordering from a supplier. You create a draft, place it with the supplier, and then receive the items into a location when they arrive. Receiving a PO updates your stock levels and recalculates each product's average cost. ## The Purchase Order Lifecycle | Status | What It Means | | --- | --- | | **Draft** | The order is being prepared. You can still edit items and quantities. | | **Placed** | The order has been sent to the supplier. It is now awaiting delivery. | | **Partially Received** | Some — but not all — of the ordered items have arrived. | | **Received** | All items have arrived and stock has been updated. | | **Cancelled** | The order was cancelled before completion. | ## Creating a Purchase Order Go to **Inventory → Purchase Orders** and tap **New Purchase Order**. Pick the supplier from the **supplier picker**. The supplier's name and email fill in automatically. If you haven't added the supplier yet, create it first under **Inventory → Suppliers**. Select the location that will receive the stock. Add each product you are ordering. For every line, set the **unit cost** (shown in your store currency) and the **quantity** using the stepper. Review the order total and save. The PO is created in **Draft** status. ## Placing the Order When the draft is ready, open it and tap **Place**. This marks the order as sent to the supplier and locks the items so quantities stay accurate while you wait for delivery. If your store uses **manager approval** for purchasing, placing a large order may require a manager's PIN approval before it is sent. See [Approvals & Permissions](/docs/store/inventory/approvals-and-permissions). ## Receiving Stock When the delivery arrives, receive the order to update your stock. Find the order in the Purchase Orders list and open it. The receive form lists every outstanding line with the quantity still expected. Each line defaults to the full outstanding quantity. If only part of the order arrived, lower the received quantity for that line — this is a **partial receive**. Stock increases at the destination location and each product's **weighted average cost** is recalculated from the unit costs on the order. If you received only part of the order, the PO moves to **Partially Received**. Receive the rest later when it arrives. ## Cancelling an Order You can cancel a Draft or Placed order that is no longer needed. Cancelling does not change stock — it only closes the order. A received order cannot be cancelled. ## Related Guides - [Suppliers](/docs/store/inventory/suppliers) - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) - [Low-Stock Alerts & Auto-Reorder](/docs/store/inventory/low-stock-and-reorder) - [Approvals & Permissions](/docs/store/inventory/approvals-and-permissions) - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) --- # Stock Counts > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/stock-counts # Stock Counts A stock count (also called a stock take) is a physical count of what you actually have on hand, compared against what the system thinks you have. Running counts regularly keeps your stock levels accurate and surfaces shrinkage, miscounts, or unrecorded waste. ## How a Stock Count Works | Status | What It Means | | --- | --- | | **Draft** | The count has been created but not started. | | **In Progress** | You are recording counted quantities for each product. | | **Completed** | The count is finished and variances are applied to stock. | | **Cancelled** | The count was abandoned without changing stock. | ## Running a Count Go to **Inventory → Stock Counts** and tap **New Count**. Choose the location you are counting. Tap **Start**. The count moves to **In Progress** and lists the products to be counted. For each product, enter the quantity you physically counted on the shelf. The system shows the expected quantity alongside so you can spot differences. A **variance** is the difference between the expected and counted quantity. A negative variance means you have less than expected (shrinkage); a positive variance means more. Tap **Complete**. The system adjusts each product's stock to match your counted quantities and records the variance for your records. Count during quiet hours or when the store is closed so stock isn't moving while you count. ## Reviewing Variances After completing a count, review the variances to understand where stock was lost or gained. Large or repeated variances on the same product are worth investigating — they can point to theft, breakage, or receiving errors. ## Related Guides - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) - [Purchase Orders](/docs/store/inventory/purchase-orders) - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Stock Tracking > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking # Stock Tracking Stock tracking lets you monitor how much of each product you have on hand. The system keeps your counts accurate by deducting stock automatically when orders are completed. ## Setting Initial Stock Quantities You set the starting stock quantity when you create a new product. 1. Go to **Products** from the sidebar menu. 2. Tap **Add Product** or edit an existing product. 3. Find the **Stock** or **Inventory** section. 4. Enter the initial quantity on hand. 5. Save the product. You can update this number at any time by editing the product. ## Viewing Current Stock You can check the current stock level for any product from its detail screen. 1. Go to **Products** from the sidebar menu. 2. Tap on the product you want to check. 3. View the **Stock** field to see the current quantity. Products with low stock are highlighted so you can spot them quickly. ## How Automatic Deduction Works The system adjusts stock counts for you. Here is how it works: - A customer places an order that includes the product. - The order is marked as completed. - The system subtracts the ordered quantity from the product's stock. You do not need to update stock manually after each sale. ## Setting Low-Stock Thresholds You can define a minimum stock level for each product. When stock reaches that number, the product appears in your low-stock alerts. 1. Edit the product. 2. Set the **Low Stock Threshold** value. 3. Save your changes. ## Tips for Accurate Stock Tracking - **Set quantities carefully** when first adding products. - **Do regular stock counts** to verify system numbers match reality. - **Adjust stock manually** if you receive new shipments or find discrepancies. - **Use low-stock alerts** so you never run out of popular items. ## Related Guides - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) - [Stock Transfers](/docs/store/inventory/stock-transfers) - [Creating a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [Item Report](/docs/store/reports/item-report) --- # Stock Transfers > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/stock-transfers # Stock Transfers Stock transfers let you move inventory from one location to another. This is useful when one location is running low and another has surplus stock. ## When to Use Stock Transfers - One location is low on a product while another has extra. - You are opening a new location and need to distribute inventory. - You want to balance stock levels across all your stores. ## How to Create a Transfer Request Follow these steps to transfer stock between locations. 1. Go to **Inventory** or **Stock Transfers** from the sidebar menu. 2. Tap **New Transfer**. 3. Select the **source location** (where stock is coming from). 4. Select the **destination location** (where stock is going). 5. Add the products and quantities you want to transfer. 6. Review the details and submit the transfer request. ## Approving a Transfer Transfers may require approval before they take effect. 1. Open the pending transfer from the transfer list. 2. Review the products, quantities, and locations. 3. Tap **Approve** to confirm the transfer. 4. Stock levels update automatically at both locations. If a transfer looks incorrect, you can reject it with a note. ## Tracking Transfer History You can view all past transfers from the transfer history screen. Each record shows: | Detail | Description | | --- | --- | | **Transfer ID** | A unique reference number for the transfer. | | **Date** | When the transfer was created. | | **Source** | The location that sent the stock. | | **Destination** | The location that received the stock. | | **Items** | The products and quantities transferred. | | **Status** | Whether the transfer is pending, approved, or rejected. | ## Tips for Managing Transfers - **Review transfers regularly** to keep all locations well stocked. - **Approve quickly** so stock levels stay accurate across locations. - **Use transfer history** to spot patterns in how stock moves. - **Plan ahead** for busy seasons by transferring stock early. ## Related Guides - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) - [Creating a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) --- # Suppliers > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/inventory/suppliers # Suppliers Suppliers are the vendors you order stock from. Keeping a supplier list lets you attach a vendor to a purchase order in one tap instead of retyping contact details each time. ## Adding a Supplier Go to **Inventory → Suppliers** and tap **New Supplier**. Fill in the supplier's information. The supplier is now available in the supplier picker when you create a purchase order. ## Supplier Fields ## Editing or Removing a Supplier Open any supplier from the list to edit its details. You can also delete a supplier you no longer order from. Deleting a supplier does not change any past purchase orders — they keep the supplier details that were recorded at the time. ## Using Suppliers on Purchase Orders When you create a purchase order, the **supplier picker** is searchable — start typing to filter the list. Selecting a supplier fills in the name and email automatically. ## Related Guides - [Purchase Orders](/docs/store/inventory/purchase-orders) - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) - [Stock Tracking](/docs/store/inventory/stock-tracking) --- # Managing Loyalty Tiers > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/loyalty/managing-tiers # Managing Loyalty Tiers Loyalty tiers define the reward levels in your program. You can create new tiers, edit existing ones, delete tiers you no longer need, and view which customers belong to each tier. ![The Loyalty Tier form in the Fuze Store app showing Tier Name, Points Threshold, and Multiplier fields](/docs/store/loyalty/loyalty-tier-form.png) ## Viewing Your Tiers 1. Open the sidebar menu and go to **Store Settings**. 2. Select **Loyalty Program**. 3. Go to the **Tiers** section. You see a list of all your tiers, sorted by point threshold from lowest to highest. | Column | Description | | --- | --- | | **Name** | The display name of the tier | | **Point Threshold** | Minimum points needed to reach this tier | | **Multiplier** | Points earning multiplier for this tier (e.g., 2x means double points) | | **Customers** | Number of customers currently in this tier | ## Creating a New Tier 1. In the Tiers section, press **Add Tier**. 2. Enter a **Name** for the tier (for example, "Platinum"). 3. Set the **Point Threshold**. This is the minimum number of points a customer needs. 4. Set the **Multiplier**. This determines how fast customers in this tier earn points (e.g., 1.5x means 50% more points per purchase). 5. Press **Save**. The new tier appears in the list. Customers who already meet the point threshold move into this tier automatically. ### Tier Fields | Field | Required | Description | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Name** | Yes | A clear name for the tier | Gold | | **Point Threshold** | Yes | Minimum points to qualify | 1,000 | | **Multiplier** | Yes | Points earning multiplier (0.01 to 99.99) | 1.5 | ## Editing a Tier 1. Find the tier you want to change in the list. 2. Press the **Edit** button on that tier. 3. Update the name, point threshold, or multiplier as needed. 4. Press **Save**. Changes take effect immediately. If you lower a point threshold, more customers may qualify. If you raise it, some customers may move to a lower tier. ## Deleting a Tier 1. Find the tier you want to remove. 2. Press the **Delete** button. 3. Confirm the deletion. Customers in a deleted tier move to the next lower tier based on their point balance. You cannot delete a tier if it is the only one in your program. ## Viewing Customers in a Tier You can see which customers belong to a specific tier. 1. Press a tier name to open its details. 2. Go to the **Customers** tab. 3. You see a list of all customers currently in that tier. This helps you understand how your customers are distributed across tiers. You can also use this view to identify your most loyal customers. ## Tips - **Use clear names.** Customers see tier names in their profile. Choose names that feel rewarding. - **Space thresholds evenly.** Make each tier feel achievable but meaningful. - **Review regularly.** If most customers sit in one tier, adjust your thresholds. - **Limit the number of tiers.** Three to five tiers work best for most businesses. ## Related Guides - [Loyalty Program Overview](/docs/store/loyalty/overview) - [Setting Up a Loyalty Program](/docs/store/loyalty/setting-up-loyalty) - [Customer Overview](/docs/store/customer/overview) --- # Loyalty Program Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/loyalty/overview # Loyalty Program Overview Reward your best customers and keep them coming back. The Loyalty Program feature lets you create a points-based rewards system with multiple tiers. Customers earn points from every purchase and earn them faster as they move up to higher tiers. The Loyalty Program is available as an **add-on feature** for your Fuze Store subscription. ## What is the Loyalty Program? A loyalty program encourages repeat purchases by rewarding customers with points. You define how customers earn points and how those points convert to rewards. The more they shop, the more they earn. Your POS tracks everything automatically. You do not need to calculate points or manage tiers manually. ## How Tiers Work Tiers let you create different levels of rewards. Each tier has a name, a point threshold, and a **points multiplier**. When a customer reaches the required points, they move up to the next tier and start earning points faster. Here is an example of a three-tier setup: | Tier | Points Required | Points Multiplier | | --- | --- | --- | | **Bronze** | 0 | 1x | | **Silver** | 500 | 1.5x | | **Gold** | 1,500 | 2x | A higher multiplier means a customer in that tier earns more points for the same spend — your way of rewarding loyalty. You can create as many tiers as you need and name them anything that fits your brand. ## How Customers Earn and Redeem Points Customers earn points on every completed purchase based on the **earning rate** you set — for example, 1 point per ₱1 spent — multiplied by their current tier's multiplier. Points are added automatically. To reward customers, you set a **redemption rate**: each point is worth a fixed amount of store credit (for example, ₱0.50 per point) that they can apply to a future purchase once they reach your **minimum redemption** threshold. You control the earning rate, redemption rate, and thresholds, and can change them at any time. ## Key Benefits - **Increase repeat visits.** Customers return to earn more points. - **Reward your best customers.** Higher tiers get better perks. - **Track everything automatically.** The POS handles point calculations and tier upgrades. - **Customize freely.** Set your own tiers, earning rate, and redemption value. - **Simple for customers.** They see their points and tier in their profile. ## Who Should Use This Feature? The Loyalty Program works well for any business with repeat customers. Retail shops, cafes, restaurants, and service providers all benefit from rewarding loyal customers. ## Getting Started To start using the Loyalty Program, you need to enable it in your store settings and configure your tiers and point rules. See the setup guide for step-by-step instructions. ## Related Guides - [Setting Up a Loyalty Program](/docs/store/loyalty/setting-up-loyalty) - [Managing Loyalty Tiers](/docs/store/loyalty/managing-tiers) - [Creating a Discount](/docs/store/discount/creating-a-discount) - [Customer Overview](/docs/store/customer/overview) --- # Setting Up a Loyalty Program > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/loyalty/setting-up-loyalty # Setting Up a Loyalty Program You can set up a loyalty program in just a few minutes. This guide walks you through enabling the feature, setting your earning and redemption rates, and defining tiers. ![The Loyalty Program setup form in the Fuze Store app showing Program Name, Points Per Currency Unit, and Redemption Rate fields](/docs/store/loyalty/loyalty-setup-form.png) ## Before You Start Make sure you have the Loyalty Program add-on enabled on your subscription. You also need **Owner** or **Admin** access to your store. ## Step 1: Enable the Loyalty Program 1. Open the sidebar menu and go to **Store Settings**. 2. Select **Loyalty Program** from the settings list. 3. Toggle the **Enable Loyalty Program** switch to on. 4. Press **Save** to confirm. Your store now supports loyalty points. Next, you need to define your tiers and rules. ## Step 2: Set Your Point Rules Point rules determine how customers collect points and how much those points are worth. 1. In the Loyalty Program settings, set the **earning rate** — how many points a customer earns per ₱1 spent. 2. Set the **redemption rate** — how much store credit each point is worth when redeemed. 3. Set the **minimum redemption points** — the fewest points a customer must have before they can redeem. 4. Optionally set **points expiry** and the **tier evaluation window** (in months). 5. Press **Save**. | Setting | Description | Example | | --- | --- | --- | | **Earning Rate** | Points earned per ₱1 spent | 1 point per ₱1 | | **Redemption Rate** | Store credit value of each point | ₱0.50 per point | | **Minimum Redemption Points** | Fewest points needed to redeem | 100 | | **Points Expiry** | Months before unused points expire (optional) | 12 | ## Step 3: Define Your Tiers Tiers give structure to your loyalty program. Each tier has a name, a point threshold, and a points multiplier. 1. Go to the **Tiers** section in Loyalty Program settings. 2. Press **Add Tier**. 3. Enter the tier **Name** (for example, "Bronze"). 4. Set the **Point Threshold** (the minimum points needed to reach this tier). 5. Set the **Multiplier** (how fast customers in this tier earn points — for example, 1.5x). 6. Press **Save**. Repeat this process for each tier you want to create. Start with the lowest tier and work up. ## Step 4: Review and Activate After you finish setting up tiers and rules, review your configuration: - Check that tiers are in the correct order by point threshold. - Confirm each tier's multiplier matches how much you want to reward it. - Make sure the earning and redemption rates are reasonable for your price range. Your loyalty program is now live. Customers start earning points on their next purchase. ## Tips - **Start simple.** Two or three tiers work well for most businesses. - **Communicate clearly.** Let customers know about the program at the register. - **Review regularly.** Adjust point rules and tier multipliers based on customer activity. ## Related Guides - [Loyalty Program Overview](/docs/store/loyalty/overview) - [Managing Loyalty Tiers](/docs/store/loyalty/managing-tiers) - [Setup Your Store Preferences](/docs/store/setup-your-store-preference) --- # Creating a Modifier > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/modifier/creating-a-modifier # Creating a Modifier Modifiers let you offer extra choices or add-ons for your products and services. These include sizes, toppings, flavors, or special requests. Follow these steps to add a new modifier. ![The Create Modifier form in the Fuze Store app showing Modifier Group Name, Selection Type (single or multiple), and individual modifier option fields with price adjustments](/docs/store/modifier/create-modifier-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Modifiers.** Select **Modifiers** from the menu list. 3. **Add a modifier.** Press the **New Modifier** button at the top right of the modifier list page. 4. **Fill in the details.** Enter the information for your new modifier. See [Modifier Overview](/docs/store/modifier/overview) for what each field means. 5. **Save.** Click **Save**. Your new modifier is available for use with products and services right away. ## Tips - Use clear, simple names for modifiers and their options (for example, "Size: Small, Medium, Large"). - Group similar modifiers together for easier selection during checkout. - Only add modifiers that provide real value or choice for your customers. - Use pricing on modifiers to encourage upselling, such as extra toppings or premium add-ons. - You can always edit or remove modifiers later if your menu changes. ## Related Guides - [Modifier Overview](/docs/store/modifier/overview) - [How to Update a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/updating-a-modifier) - [How to Delete a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/deleting-a-modifier) --- # How to Delete a Modifier > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/modifier/deleting-a-modifier # How to Delete a Modifier When you no longer need a modifier, you can remove it from your POS system. There are two ways to delete a modifier. ## Option 1: Delete from the Modifier List 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Modifiers.** Select **Modifiers** from the menu list. 3. **Find the modifier.** Locate the modifier you want to delete (for example, "Extra Cheese"). 4. **Delete.** Click the **Delete** button (trash bin icon) in the action column. 5. **Confirm.** A confirmation message appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## Option 2: Delete from the Modifier Details 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Modifiers.** Select **Modifiers** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a modifier.** Click the modifier you want to delete. 4. **Delete.** Click the **Delete** button (trash bin icon) on the modifier details page. 5. **Confirm.** A confirmation message appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## What Happens When You Delete a Modifier - The modifier is removed from your POS and menus immediately. - Products or services using this modifier lose the option, but are not deleted themselves. - You can always create a new modifier later if needed. ## Tips - Double-check before deleting. A deleted modifier cannot be restored. - If you just want to hide a modifier temporarily, consider disabling it instead of deleting it. - Keep your modifier list organized by removing options you no longer use. - Review related products or services to make sure nothing is left broken. ## Related Guides - [Modifier Overview](/docs/store/modifier/overview) - [How to Create a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/creating-a-modifier) - [How to Update a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/updating-a-modifier) --- # Modifier Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/modifier/overview # Modifier Overview The **Modifier** feature lets you add extra options or customizations to your products and services. Modifiers make it easy for customers to personalize their orders and for staff to handle special requests. Use them for things like add-ons, sizes, flavors, toppings, or any extra choices you want to offer. ## What is a Modifier? A **modifier** is an option or add-on attached to a product or service. Modifiers let you offer more choices without cluttering your main catalog. For example, you can let customers choose a drink size, add extra cheese to a pizza, or select aromatherapy for a massage. **Examples:** - **Food and Beverage:** Size (Small, Medium, Large), Extra Shot, Toppings (Pepperoni, Mushrooms) - **Retail:** Gift Wrapping, Custom Engraving - **Services:** Add-on (Hot Stones for Massage), Extra Time, Premium Products ## Key Benefits - **Personalized experience** -- Let customers customize orders to fit their needs. - **Easy upselling** -- Offer add-ons and extras to increase sales. - **Organized catalog** -- Keep your main product and service list clean by using modifiers for options. - **Flexible setup** -- Use modifiers for both products and services across food, retail, and appointments. - **Quick selection** -- Staff can easily add modifiers during checkout, speeding up service. ## Field Explanations Below is a breakdown of every field available when creating or editing a modifier. | Field | What it Means | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable** | Controls whether this modifier is active | **Yes** | Yes, No | Yes | | **Name** | The modifier name | **Yes** | Any text | Drink Sizes | | **Label** | The label shown on the product or service | No | Any text | Sizes | | **Code** | Unique identifier for tracking (no spaces) | No | Any text without spaces | MOD-EXTRACHEESE | | **Required** | Whether the customer must select this modifier when ordering | **Yes** | Yes, No | Yes | | **Visible on Customer View** | Whether the modifier is visible during ordering (no effect currently) | **Yes** | Yes, No | No | | **Type** | How the modifier is applied | **Yes** | Single, Multiple | Single | | **Min Options** | Minimum number of options the customer must select (Multiple type only) | **Yes** | Any number | 1 | | **Max Options** | Maximum number of options the customer can select (Multiple type only) | **Yes** | Any number | 2 | | **Options** | List of choices for the modifier (see table below) | **Yes** | -- | Small, Medium, Large | ### Modifier Option Fields Each option within a modifier has its own fields. | Field | What it Means | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Selected** | Whether this option is selected by default | **Yes** | Yes, No | Yes | | **Label** | Display name of the option | **Yes** | Any text | Small | | **Base Price** | Extra cost added when this option is selected | **Yes** | Any number | 10 | ### Important Notes - Options are the individual choices within a modifier. For example, a "Drink Sizes" modifier might have options for "Small", "Medium", and "Large". Each option can have its own price adjustment. - Options display in the order you set. Adjust the display order as needed. - If you set **Required** to **Yes**, customers must select at least one option before completing their order. - If you set **Enable** to **No**, the modifier becomes inactive and unavailable for selection. - If you set **Type** to **Single**, customers can choose only one option. If set to **Multiple**, they can select multiple options within the limits set by **Min Options** and **Max Options**. ## Best Practices - Use clear, simple names for modifiers and options. - Group similar modifiers together for easier selection. - Only add modifiers that provide real value or choice for your customers. - Review and update modifiers regularly to match your current menu or service list. - Use pricing on modifiers to encourage upselling, such as extra toppings. ## Related Guides - [How to Add a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/creating-a-modifier) - [How to Update a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/updating-a-modifier) - [How to Delete a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/deleting-a-modifier) - [Product Overview](/docs/store/product/overview) - [Service Overview](/docs/store/service/overview) --- # How to Update a Modifier > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/modifier/updating-a-modifier # How to Update a Modifier Keep your modifiers up to date so your POS always offers the right choices and add-ons. You can change a modifier's name, options, pricing, or any other detail at any time. ![The Edit Modifier form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Modifier Name and Options fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/modifier/edit-modifier-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Modifiers.** Select **Modifiers** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a modifier.** Click the modifier you want to edit (for example, "Extra Cheese"). 4. **Edit details.** Update any fields as needed. See [Modifier Overview](/docs/store/modifier/overview) for what each field means. 5. **Save.** Click **Save**. Your updates appear instantly in your POS and menus. ## Tips - Changes show up right away after you save. - Use clear names and descriptions so staff and customers can easily understand the options. - Add or remove options as your menu or services change. - Adjust prices for add-ons to encourage upselling. - Leave optional fields blank if you are not sure what to enter. - Make sure each modifier name is unique and descriptive. - Group similar modifiers together for easier selection. ## Related Guides - [Modifier Overview](/docs/store/modifier/overview) - [How to Create a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/creating-a-modifier) - [How to Delete a Modifier](/docs/store/modifier/deleting-a-modifier) --- # Order Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/order/overview # Order Overview The **Order** feature is your central hub for managing every sale, booking, and transaction. Whether you are ringing up a coffee, booking a service, or processing a return, the Orders section keeps everything organized. ## What is an Order? An **order** is any sale, booking, or transaction made through your POS system. Orders can include single items, multiple products, services, or special requests. Each order tracks what was sold, who bought it, how it was paid for, and which staff member handled it. **Real-life examples:** - **Food and Beverage** -- A customer orders a latte and a croissant at the counter. - **Retail** -- Someone buys a t-shirt and a gift card in one transaction. - **Services** -- A client books a massage for next Saturday. ## Why Use the Orders Feature - **All sales in one place** -- View every sale, booking, or return in a single list. - **Fast checkout** -- Add items, apply discounts, and accept payments quickly. - **Flexible payments** -- Accept cash, card, gift cards, or split payments. - **Easy refunds** -- Process returns or adjust orders in a few clicks. - **Customer service** -- Look up past orders to answer questions or handle exchanges. - **Staff accountability** -- See which team member handled each order. ## Field Explanations Here is what each field means on an order: | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Order ID** | Unique UUID identifier for the order | Yes (auto-generated) | bafc576c-7f8d-4e2c-864e-bdb2a85ea05d | | **Order Number** | Human-readable order number | Yes (auto-generated) | 100234 | | **Currency** | Currency used for the order, based on your store settings | Yes (auto-generated) | USD | | **Items** | Products or services included in the order. See [Products](/docs/store/product/overview) or [Services](/docs/store/service/overview). | Yes | Latte, Croissant | | **Notes** | Special instructions or comments | No | No sugar in coffee | | **Service Mode** | How the order will be fulfilled (Dine-in, Delivery, Pick Up, Take Away, or Service) | No | Dine-in | | **Discounts** | Discounts applied to the order. See [Discount Overview](/docs/store/discount/overview). | No | 10% off Latte | | **Customer** | The customer attached to the order. See [Customer Overview](/docs/store/customer/overview). | No | John Doe | | **Event** | The event attached to the order. See [Event Overview](/docs/store/pos/event/overview). | No | Birthday Party | | **Exclude Tax** | Whether the order is tax-exempt | Yes | No | | **Subtotal** | Total price before taxes and fees | Yes (auto-computed) | $8.50 | | **Total Discount Amount** | Sum of all discounts applied | Yes (auto-computed) | $0.85 | | **Total Tax Amount** | Sum of all taxes applied | Yes (auto-computed) | $0.85 | | **Total Gift Amount** | Gift card amounts applied | Yes (auto-computed) | $0.85 | | **Delivery Fee** | Fee for delivery service | Yes (auto-computed) | $5.00 | | **Service Fee** | Fee for service provided | Yes (auto-computed) | $2.00 | | **Grand Total** | Final amount due for the order | Yes (auto-computed) | $16.35 | | **Total Paid** | The amount the customer has actually paid | Yes (auto-computed) | $16.35 | | **Total Refunded** | The total amount refunded for this order | Yes (auto-computed) | $0.00 | | **Change** | The change given back to the customer | Yes (auto-computed) | $3.65 | | **Paid Status** | Whether the order is fully paid, partially paid, or unpaid | Yes (auto-computed) | Fully Paid | | **Refund Status** | Whether the order has been refunded | Yes (auto-computed) | Not Refunded | | **Created At** | Date and time the order was created | Yes (auto-generated) | 2025-07-10 14:32 | | **Updated At** | Date and time the order was last modified | Yes (auto-generated) | 2025-07-10 15:00 | ## Order Status Lifecycle Every order follows a status lifecycle. Here are the available statuses in order: 1. **New** -- The order has just been created. 2. **Pending** -- The order is waiting to be confirmed or acted on. 3. **On Hold** -- The order is paused and waiting for further action. 4. **Processing** -- The order is actively being prepared or fulfilled. 5. **Ready** -- The order is prepared and waiting for the customer. 6. **Shipped** -- The order has been dispatched for delivery. 7. **Completed** -- The order has been fully fulfilled and closed out. 8. **Canceled** -- The order was canceled before completion. 9. **Closed** -- The order has been closed and finalized. 10. **Voided** -- Every line item was voided before payment (a terminal state, distinct from Canceled). A typical order moves from **New** through **Pending**, **Processing**, and **Ready**, then ends at **Completed**. You can place an order **On Hold** at any point if you need to pause it. Orders that are no longer needed can be marked as **Canceled** or **Closed**. ## Best Practices - Double-check order details before completing a sale or booking. - Use the notes field for special requests or important information. - Encourage staff to attach customer names for better service tracking. - Review orders regularly to spot trends and improve your business. - Use filters to find orders quickly by date, customer, or product. --- # How to Add Payment Methods to Your Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/payment-method/adding-payment-methods # How to Add Payment Methods to Your Store Give your customers more ways to pay by adding payment methods to your POS. This guide walks you through the process step by step. ![The Add Payment Method screen in the Fuze Store app showing a list of available payment methods including Cash, Credit Card, GCash, and Maya with toggle switches](/docs/store/payment-method/add-payment-method-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Store Settings.** Select **Store Settings** from the menu. 3. **Go to Payment Methods.** Under Store Settings, select **Payment Methods** to open the payment methods page. 4. **Add a payment method.** Click the **Add Payment Method** or **Create Payment Method** button. 5. **Attach or detach payment methods.** Select the payment methods you want to add or remove from the list. 6. **Save.** Click **Save**. The new payment method is now available in your store. ## Tips - Use clear, simple names so staff and customers can identify each payment method. - Only activate payment methods you actually accept. - Double-check account details for digital payments to avoid errors. - You can edit or remove payment methods at any time. ## Best Practices - Review your payment methods regularly, especially when you add new services or promotions. - Train your staff on how to process each payment type. - Keep records of all payments for accurate tracking and reporting. --- # How to Add a Payment to an Order > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/payment-method/adding-payment-to-order # How to Add a Payment to an Order You can add a payment to any order in Fuze Store POS before submitting it. The system supports multiple payment methods and calculates change automatically. **Your store collects the money directly.** Fuze Store does not process card or e-wallet payments for you. The customer pays cash, taps your own card terminal, or scans your own GCash/Maya/bank QR code. You then **record** that payment here so your sales stay accurate. Because you collect the money yourself, a payment never "fails" or sits pending in the app — once you take it, you record it as done. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Go to the **POS Register** by selecting **Register** under the POS section in the menu. 2. Add items to the order as usual. 3. Collect the payment from the customer using your own channel — take the cash, run your card terminal, or show your store's QR code for them to scan. 4. Click the **Menu** button in the order summary, then select **Add Payment**. 5. Choose the payment method the customer used (such as Cash, Credit Card, GCash, or Bank Transfer). 6. Enter the amount received. The system calculates any change automatically. For non-cash payments you can also note a reference number (such as the GCash reference or card slip number). 7. Click **Submit** or **Complete Order** to finalize the order. The payment is recorded right away. ## Tips - Double-check that the payment actually arrived before you record it. - You can use split payments if a customer wants to pay with more than one method. - Always confirm the amount received for cash payments to ensure correct change. - For card or e-wallet payments, keep the terminal slip or transaction reference in case you need to look it up later. ## Best Practices - Train your staff on how to process each payment type. - Keep your payment methods up to date in store settings. - Review payment records regularly for accurate tracking. --- # How to Remove a Payment Method from Your Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/payment-method/detaching-payment-method-in-store # How to Remove a Payment Method from Your Store If you no longer accept a certain payment method, you can remove it from your POS system. This keeps your checkout options clean and your records organized. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store Settings** from the menu. 3. Select **Payment Methods** from the list. 4. Find the payment method you want to remove (such as "GCash" or "Bank Transfer"). 5. Click the **Delete** or **Remove** button next to it. 6. Confirm the removal when prompted. ## What Happens When You Remove a Payment Method - The payment method is removed from your list and will no longer appear during checkout. - Past sales and reports still show the original payment method used at the time of sale. - You can add a new payment method later if your needs change. ## Tips - Double-check before removing. A deleted payment method cannot be restored. - Only remove payment methods you are sure you no longer need. - If you are unsure, consider editing the payment method instead of deleting it. - Keep your payment method list tidy by removing outdated options. ## Best Practices - Review your payment methods regularly and remove any that are no longer in use. - Use clear names so staff can find and manage payment methods easily. - Let your team know when you change available payment options. --- # Payment Method Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/payment-method/overview # Payment Method Overview A **payment method** is any way a customer can pay for an order. Common examples include cash, credit or debit cards, e-wallets, bank transfers, and gift cards. Your POS supports multiple payment types so checkout stays fast and flexible. **You collect payments into your own accounts.** Fuze Store does not act as a payment processor for your sales. When a customer pays by card, e-wallet, or bank transfer, the money goes to **your own** terminal or account — you simply pick the matching method in the app so the sale is recorded correctly. The payment methods you set up here are labels for **how** you got paid, used for receipts and reporting. ## Why Set Up Multiple Payment Methods - **Convenience.** Let customers choose how they want to pay. - **Faster checkout.** Accept cards, cash, or digital payments to keep lines moving. - **More sales.** Attract more customers by offering their preferred payment option. - **Easy tracking.** Your POS records every payment so you always know where revenue comes from. ## How Payment Methods Work in Your POS - **Easy setup.** Add or remove payment methods anytime from your store settings. - **Flexible options.** Accept cash, cards, e-wallets, bank transfers, and more. - **Clear receipts.** Every receipt shows the payment method used. - **Secure transactions.** Your POS keeps payments safe and reliable. ## Tips - Only activate payment methods you actually accept. - Double-check account details for digital payments to avoid errors. - You can edit or remove payment methods at any time. ## Best Practices - Review your payment methods regularly, especially when you add new services or promotions. - Train your staff on how to process each payment type. - Keep records of all payments for accurate tracking and reporting. --- # How Booking-Time Staff Availability Works > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/event/booking-staff-availability # How Booking-Time Staff Availability Works When you create or edit an appointment in Fuze Store POS, the **Staff** picker shows every staff member but disables anyone who is unavailable for the time you picked. This guide explains why a staff member might appear disabled and how to fix it. ![The Book Staff Availability form in the Fuze Store app showing Staff Member, Date, Time Slots, and Status fields](/docs/store/pos/event/book-availability-form.png) ## Where You See It The staff picker opens from the appointment form when you tap the **Staff** row. Each staff member is shown as a card. If they cannot take this appointment, the card is dimmed and shows a small reason chip. ## Reason Chips | Chip | What it means | Typical fix | |------|---------------|-------------| | **Off schedule** | The staff member has no working hours that cover the chosen time, or an override marks them as unavailable for that day. | Update the staff member's [weekly schedule](/docs/store/staff/managing-staff-schedule), or remove the override. | | **Has conflict** | The staff member already has another booking that overlaps with this time, including the buffer before and after the service. | Pick a different time, choose another staff member, or move the conflicting booking. | | **Outside business hours** | The chosen time falls outside the staff member's working window for at least one day in the range you are looking at. | Choose a time inside the staff member's working hours, or extend their schedule. | ## How the Picker Decides For the date and time you have selected, Fuze Store checks each staff member against: 1. Their **weekly working hours** for the day of the week. 2. Any **override** for that exact date (overrides win over the weekly schedule). 3. Any **existing event** that overlaps with the slot. If you picked a service, the slot is widened by the service's *buffer before* and *buffer after* so back-to-back bookings still leave prep / cleanup time. If you are editing an existing appointment, the appointment's own time block is excluded from the conflict check — you can keep the same staff and just nudge the time. ## Tips - Always set up at least one weekly schedule row for every staff member. Without a schedule, Fuze Store treats them as unavailable. - If a staff member is sick or on leave, add an **override** instead of clearing their weekly schedule. Overrides keep the recurring pattern intact. - Adjust each service's *buffer* values to give staff realistic prep and cleanup time. - The picker refreshes every time you change the service, date, or time slot — there is no manual "reload" needed. ## Related Guides - [Creating an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/creating-an-event) - [Updating an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/updating-an-event) - [Managing a Staff Schedule](/docs/store/staff/managing-staff-schedule) - [Service Setup](/docs/store/service/overview) --- # How to Cancel an Event (Appointment or Reservation) > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/event/canceling-an-event # How to Cancel an Event You can cancel any appointment or reservation in Fuze Store POS when plans change. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **POS Event** from the menu. 3. Find the event you want to cancel in the list or calendar view. 4. Click on the event to open its details. 5. Click the **Menu** button to show action options. 6. Select **Cancel**. 7. Confirm the cancellation when prompted. The event status changes to **Canceled**. Canceled is a terminal status and cannot be reversed. ## Tips - Let your customer know about the cancellation to avoid confusion. - If the event has a linked order, canceling the event also cancels the linked order automatically. - You can create a new event anytime if plans change again. - Use the notes field to record the reason for cancellation. - Canceled events remain visible in your calendar history for reference. ## Related Guides - [Event Overview](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) - [How to Create an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/creating-an-event) - [How to Update an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/updating-an-event) --- # How to Create an Event (Appointment or Reservation) > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/event/creating-an-event # How to Create an Event You can create two types of events in Fuze Store POS: - **Appointment** -- Book a service for a customer (e.g., a haircut, massage, or class). A bookable service is required, and a staff member can optionally be assigned. - **Reservation** -- Reserve a table, room, or space. Services and staff are optional. ![The Create Event form in the Fuze Store app showing Event Name, Date and Time, Service, Duration, and Max Attendees fields](/docs/store/pos/event/create-event-form.png) ## Creating an Appointment 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **POS Event** from the menu. 3. Tap the **+** button. 4. Select **Appointment**. 5. Choose a **service** from the service picker dialog. 6. Optionally select a **staff member**. The staff picker shows roster availability for the selected day — staff with no working hours that day, or with conflicting bookings, are visibly disabled with a reason chip ("Off schedule" or "Has conflict"). Leave the picker as **Any Available** to skip staff assignment. 7. Pick a **date** from the inline calendar. 8. Select an available **time slot** from the generated slots. 9. Enter the **customer name** (required) and optional phone, email, and special requests. 10. Tap **Create Appointment** to save. ## Creating a Reservation 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **POS Event** from the menu. 3. Tap the **+** button. 4. Select **Reservation**. 5. Enter a **title** for the reservation. 6. Set the **date**, **from time**, and **to time**. 7. Optionally fill in customer details, party size, deposit amount, location, and notes. 8. Tap **Save Reservation** to save. ## Linking to an Order Creating an event does **not** create an order. Events and orders are separate. When the customer is ready to pay, link the event to an order at POS checkout by selecting the event in the register summary. ## Tips - Appointments require a bookable service. Set up your services in the **Event Services** section first. - Time slots are calculated based on service duration, staff availability, and existing bookings. - Double-check the date and time to avoid scheduling conflicts. - Use clear names and notes so your team knows what is booked. - You can edit or cancel events anytime if plans change. ## Related Guides - [Event Overview](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) - [How to Update an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/updating-an-event) - [How to Cancel an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/canceling-an-event) --- # Events - Appointments & Reservations Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/event/overview # Events: Appointments and Reservations Overview In Fuze Store POS, every scheduled booking is called an **Event**. Events come in two types: **Appointments** and **Reservations**. Understanding the difference helps you run your schedule smoothly. ## What Are Appointments? Appointments are service-based bookings linked to a bookable service and optionally a staff member. Examples include a haircut, massage, or personal training session. When you create an appointment, Fuze Store calculates available time slots based on the service duration, staff availability, and existing bookings. Appointments are created independently from orders. When the customer is ready to pay, you link the appointment to an order at POS checkout. ## What Are Reservations? Reservations are time-based bookings for spaces like tables, rooms, or areas. **Services and staff are optional.** You can reserve a space by itself or attach additional details like party size and deposit amount. **Key difference:** - **Appointments** = Service-based, staff-assigned, slot-calculated - **Reservations** = Time-based, space-oriented, flexible ## Field Reference ### Appointment Fields | Field | Description | Required | Example | | -------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | -------- | --------------------- | | **Service** | The bookable service for this appointment | Yes | Deep Tissue Massage | | **Staff** | Assigned staff member (or "Any Available") | No | Anna | | **Date** | Appointment date (inline calendar) | Yes | 2026-03-25 | | **Time Slot** | Available time calculated from service and staff | Yes | 10:30 AM | | **Customer Name** | Customer's name | Yes | John Doe | | **Customer Phone** | Customer's phone number | No | +1 555-1234 | | **Customer Email** | Customer's email address | No | john@example.com | | **Color** | Calendar display color | No | #4A90D9 | | **Special Requests** | Customer special requests or notes | No | Allergic to lavender | ### Reservation Fields | Field | Description | Required | Example | | -------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | -------- | --------------------- | | **Title** | Name of the reservation | Yes | Team Dinner | | **Date** | Reservation date | Yes | 2026-03-25 | | **From Time** | Start time | Yes | 7:00 PM | | **To Time** | End time | No | 9:00 PM | | **Customer Name** | Customer's name | No | Jane Smith | | **Customer Phone** | Customer's phone number | No | +1 555-5678 | | **Customer Email** | Customer's email address | No | jane@example.com | | **Party Size** | Number of guests | No | 4 | | **Deposit Amount** | Prepayment amount | No | 50.00 | | **Location** | Where the event takes place | No | Private Room B | | **Color** | Calendar display color | No | #E74C3C | | **Special Requests** | Customer special requests | No | Window seat preferred | | **Note** | Internal staff notes | No | | | **Description** | Detailed description | No | | ## Booking Status As a booking moves through your day, its status changes so everyone can see where it stands. Appointments and reservations use slightly different sets: - **Appointments** flow through stages like New, Confirmed, Checked In, In Progress, Completed, and Closed. - **Reservations** flow through stages like Confirmed, **Seated**, In Progress, Completed, and Closed. A booking can also be marked **No Show** if the customer never arrives, or **Cancelled** if it's called off. The app only offers the next valid steps for each type, so you can't accidentally seat an appointment or check in a reservation. ## Booking Policies Your store can set rules that protect your schedule (managed in store preferences): - **Lead time** — how far in advance a customer must book (for example, no same-hour appointments). - **Maximum advance** — how far into the future bookings are allowed. - **Cancellation window and fee** — cancel inside the window and a fee may apply. If a staff member cancels a fee-bearing booking late, the app asks them to confirm the fee before it goes through. ## Attached Items A bookable service can carry a list of **attached items** — products or services that belong with it. For example, a "Spa Package" service might attach a towel set and a bottle of water. When you **check in** the booking at the POS, these required items are added to the order automatically, so staff never forget them. If a cashier already added the same item by hand, it won't be doubled. ## Event-Order Linking Events and orders are **separate entities**. Creating an event does not create an order. When the customer is ready to pay, staff can link the event to an order during POS checkout by selecting the event in the register. This keeps scheduling and billing independent. ## Why Use Events? - **Stay organized** -- View all bookings in one calendar to prevent double-bookings. - **Save time** -- Quickly add, edit, or cancel appointments and reservations. - **Reduce no-shows** -- Pair Events with the [SMS add-on](/docs/store/sms/overview) to text booking reminders automatically. - **Personalize service** -- Track customer preferences for every visit. - **Maximize your space** -- Fill your schedule and make the most of staff, rooms, and tables. ## Tips - Use clear names and details so staff and customers know what to expect. - Appointments require a bookable service. Reservations can be created without one. - Turn on the SMS add-on to send automatic booking reminders and reduce no-shows. - Review your bookings regularly to spot busy periods and plan ahead. - You can edit or cancel events anytime as needs change. - Link events to orders at POS checkout when the customer is ready to pay. ## Related Guides - [How to Create an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/creating-an-event) - [How to Update an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/updating-an-event) - [How to Cancel an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/canceling-an-event) - [Using the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) - [POS Units and Areas](/docs/store/pos/unit/overview) - [POS Order Screen](/docs/store/pos/managing-orders) --- # How to Update an Event (Appointment or Reservation) > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/event/updating-an-event # How to Update an Event You can change the details of any appointment or reservation in Fuze Store POS. Update the date, time, customer, items, or any other field as needed. You can also progress an event through its lifecycle — confirm the booking, check the customer in, mark a no-show, or complete the service — directly from the event details screen. ![The Edit Event form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Event Name, Date, and Service fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/pos/event/edit-event-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **POS Event** from the menu. 3. Find the event you want to update in the list or calendar view. 4. Click on the event to open its details. 5. Click **Edit** or the pencil icon. 6. Update the fields you need to change. See [Event Overview](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) for field details. 7. Click **Save** to apply your changes. ## Quick Actions on the Event Details Screen The event details page exposes one-tap quick actions that move the event through its lifecycle without re-opening the form: | Action | When it appears | What it does | |--------|------------------|--------------| | **Edit** | Any non-terminal event | Opens the full edit form | | **Notify** | Any non-terminal event | Opens the notify screen to email or SMS the customer | | **Check-in** | Appointments in *Scheduled* or *Confirmed* | Marks the customer as arrived | | **Complete** | Events that are *In Progress* or *Checked-in* | Closes out the service; finalizes payments if linked to an order | | **Void** | Any non-terminal event | Cancels the event | Quick actions require the **Event Modify** permission. ## Tips - Double-check the updated date and time to avoid scheduling conflicts. - Appointments require a bookable service. You can change the service, staff, date, or time slot. - For reservations, you can update the title, date, time range, and all optional fields. - Use the notes field to keep your team informed about changes. - If the event dates change and the status is not "Scheduled", the status transitions to "Rescheduled" automatically. - If two staff members try to edit the same booking at the same time, the second save is rejected so nobody silently overwrites the other's changes — refresh and try again. ## Related Guides - [Event Overview](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) - [How to Create an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/creating-an-event) - [How to Cancel an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/canceling-an-event) - [Booking Staff Availability](/docs/store/pos/event/booking-staff-availability) --- # Managing Orders in the POS Register > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/managing-orders # Managing Orders in the POS Register The POS Orders screen lets you view and manage all current orders. Orders are grouped by status so you can quickly find what needs attention. ## Key Features - **Order List** -- See all current orders grouped by status: Pending, On-Hold, Processing, Ready, Shipped, and Complete. - **Order Details** -- View items, quantities, prices, and customer information for any order. - **Action Buttons** -- Edit, void, refund, or update orders directly from the detail view. Available actions depend on the order's current status and your permissions. ## How to Manage Orders 1. **Open the Menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to POS Orders** -- Select **POS Orders** from the menu. You will see all current orders grouped by status. - If sessions are enabled and no session is active, you will be asked to start one. - If sessions are disabled or one is already running, you go straight to the orders screen. 3. **Select an Order** -- Click any order to view its details, including items, prices, and customer information. 4. **Take Action** -- Use the action buttons to edit, void, refund, or change the order status as needed. Available actions depend on the current status and your role. ## Available Actions | Action | What It Does | | --- | --- | | **Accept Order** | Accept an incoming order. | | **Cancel Order** | Cancel an order that has not been completed. | | **Notify** | Send a notification to the customer by email or mobile number. | | **Print Slip** | Print the order slip. | | **Print Receipt** | Print the order receipt. | | **Edit Order** | Change items, quantities, or prices. | | **Void/Close Order** | Void a completed order and close it out. | | **Void Items** | Remove one or more items from an unpaid order with a reason code. See [Voiding Items and Orders](/docs/store/pos/voiding-items). | | **Process Order** | Move the order to **Processing** status. | | **Hold Order** | Move the order to **On-Hold** status. | | **Pending Order** | Move the order to **Pending** status. | | **Ready Order** | Move the order to **Ready** status. | | **Ship Order** | Move the order to **Shipped** status. | | **Complete Order** | Move the order to **Completed** status. | | **Add Payments** | Record a payment against the order. | | **Apply Gift Cards** | Apply a gift card to the order. | | **Update Service Mode** | Change the fulfillment method for the order. | | **Assign Staff** | Assign staff members to the order. | Emailing receipts and order updates to customers needs the **Lite plan or higher**. Sending updates by SMS needs the **Text Messaging (SMS)** add-on (available on any plan). See the [pricing page](/pricing) for details. ## Action Availability by Status This table shows which actions are available at each order status. | Action | New | Pending | On Hold | Processing | Shipped | Ready | Completed | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Accept Order** | Yes | | | | | | | | **Cancel Order** | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | | | **Notify** | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | **Print Slip** | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | **Print Receipt** | | | | | | | Yes | | **Edit Order** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | | | **Hold Order** | | Yes | | Yes | | | | | **Process Order** | | Yes | Yes | | Yes | Yes | | | **Ready Order** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | | | **Ship Order** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | | | **Complete Order** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | **Add Payments** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | **Apply Gift Cards** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | **Update Service Mode** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | **Assign Staff** | | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | | **Void/Close Order** | | | | | | | Yes | | **Save Customer to Store** | | | | | | | Yes | ## Tips - Double-check order details before accepting or processing. - If you make a mistake, you can void or refund the order. - Attach customers to orders for loyalty tracking and easier returns. - Assign staff to orders for better reporting. - Add notes for special requests or delivery instructions. ## Related Guides - [Using the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) - [Voiding Items and Orders](/docs/store/pos/voiding-items) - [POS Unit (Area and Unit Management)](/docs/store/pos/unit/overview) - [Events](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) --- # Capturing Service Details at Checkout > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/service-context/capturing-at-checkout # Capturing Service Details at Checkout Once your fields are [set up](/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields), your team fills them in while ringing up a sale. There are two places to capture them on the register, plus the waiting list. ## On the Register The order summary shows a **Service details** section as soon as you add the first item to the cart. ![The register order summary with a Service details section prompting the cashier to tap to add details](/docs/store/pos/service-context/register-capture-section.png) Add items to the order as usual. In the order summary, tap the **Service details** section (it reads *Tap to add service details* when empty). Fill in each field. Dropdowns show your list of choices; Yes / No fields are a switch; Text and Number fields are typed in. Tap **Save**. The captured values now appear in the summary, and the order carries them through checkout. ![The Service details capture sheet with a plate number field, a vehicle type dropdown, and a VIP switch](/docs/store/pos/service-context/capture-sheet.png) You can also open the same capture screen from the register action **Menu** -> **Service details**. Text fields with **Uppercase** normalization tidy the value for you -- typing `abc 1234` saves as `ABC 1234`, so plates and claim tags look consistent on every order and receipt. ## On the Waiting List If you use the waiting list (queue), the same fields appear on the **Add to waiting list** form, so you can capture the plate or claim tag the moment a customer joins the queue -- before the order even exists. ## Viewing Captured Details - **Order details** -- open any order to see its Service Details listed as label / value rows. - **Customer display** -- the primary (searchable) field can show beside the customer's name on the customer-facing screen. - **Receipt & queue ticket** -- fields you marked to **Show on** the receipt or queue ticket print there automatically. ![An order details screen listing the captured service details as label and value rows](/docs/store/pos/service-context/order-details-rows.png) Details are saved as a snapshot on each order. If you later rename or remove a field, orders you already completed keep the values exactly as they were captured. - [Service Details Overview](/docs/store/pos/service-context/overview) - [Setting Up Your Fields](/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields) - [Using the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) - [POS Order Screens](/docs/store/pos/managing-orders) --- # Service Details Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/service-context/overview # Service Details Overview **Service Details** let you capture a small set of structured, per-visit fields on every order -- a license plate, a claim tag, a device serial number, a unit number. It is built for walk-in service shops (car wash, laundry, repair, water refill), but it is completely generic: **you choose the field labels**, so the same tool fits any business. ![The register order summary showing a Service details section with a plate number and vehicle type](/docs/store/pos/service-context/register-service-details.png) ## What Are Service Details? A **service detail** is a labeled field you fill in while ringing up a sale -- for example a **Plate number** on a car-wash order or a **Claim tag #** on a laundry order. The values are saved with the order, so you can later match the order back to the physical item you serviced. You decide which fields exist and what they are called. A car wash might use *Plate number*, *Vehicle type*, and *Color*; a repair shop might use *Device*, *Serial / IMEI*, and *Reported issue*. Nothing is hard-coded to any industry. ## Why Use Service Details? - **Match orders to the item you serviced** -- find the right car, garment bag, or device at pickup. - **Structured, not free text** -- consistent fields your whole team fills the same way, instead of cramming everything into the order note. - **Prints where it matters** -- values can appear on the receipt, the kitchen/queue ticket, and the customer display. - **Searchable** -- mark one field (such as the plate or claim tag) as the primary identifier. - **Zero setup for common trades** -- pick a store template and the right fields are filled in for you (see [Store Templates & Examples](/docs/store/pos/service-context/store-templates-and-examples)). ## The Four Field Types When you create a field you pick one of four types: | Type | Use it for | Example | | --- | --- | --- | | **Text** | Free text, optionally auto-uppercased | Plate number, claim tag, serial | | **Number** | Whole numbers | Bag count, gallon count | | **Dropdown** | A fixed list of choices you define | Vehicle type: Sedan / SUV / Van | | **Yes / No** | A simple on/off flag | VIP, express service | ## Where Service Details Appear Once a field is set up and filled in, its value can show up in several places: - **POS register** -- a **Service details** section in the order summary, and a **Service details** button in the register action **Menu**. - **Order details** -- listed on the order after it is created. - **Waiting list** -- captured when you add a customer to the queue. - **Receipt & queue ticket** -- printed on the documents (for fields you mark to show there). - **Customer display** -- the primary identifier can appear on the customer-facing screen. ## Field Limits A few simple rules keep the capture screen fast: - Up to **10 fields** per store. - Each field needs a unique **key** (letters, numbers, and underscores; must start with a letter). - **One** field can be marked **Searchable** as the primary identifier. - **Dropdown** fields need at least one option. Service Details is available on any paid plan (Starter and up) and during your free trial. On the free Basic plan the capture screens and the editor are hidden -- but any details already saved on past orders stay visible, and everything switches back on the moment you upgrade. - [Setting Up Your Fields](/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields) - [Capturing Details at Checkout](/docs/store/pos/service-context/capturing-at-checkout) - [Store Templates & Examples](/docs/store/pos/service-context/store-templates-and-examples) - [Using the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) --- # Setting Up Your Service Detail Fields > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields # Setting Up Your Service Detail Fields You define your Service Detail fields once, in **Store Preferences**. Every field you add here appears on the capture screens described in [Capturing Details at Checkout](/docs/store/pos/service-context/capturing-at-checkout). ![The Service Context editor with an enable toggle and a list of field cards, each with a drag handle and a delete button](/docs/store/pos/service-context/editor-overview.png) ## Opening the Editor Open the **sidebar menu** and go to **Configurations**. Open **Preferences**, then select the **Service Context** tab. Turn on **Enable service details**. The field list appears only while this is on. If you do not see the **Service Context** tab at all, your store is on the free Basic plan. Service Details is a paid-plan feature -- upgrade to Starter or higher (or use it during your free trial) and the tab appears. ## Adding a Field Tap **Add field**. A new card appears, already expanded so you can edit it. Enter a **Label** -- the name your staff sees, such as *Plate number*. Set the **Key** -- a short internal id (letters, numbers, and underscores; must start with a letter), such as `plateNumber`. It is used behind the scenes and must be unique. Choose the **Type**: Text, Number, Dropdown, or Yes / No. Fill in the type-specific options (see below), then choose where the field shows and whether it is required. Tap **Save** at the bottom of the screen. ## Field Options Each field card expands to reveal its settings. Tap the card header (or the chevron on the right) to expand or collapse it. | Setting | Applies to | What it does | | --- | --- | --- | | **Label** | All | The name staff see on the capture screen and order. | | **Key** | All | Unique internal id; letters, numbers, underscores; starts with a letter. | | **Type** | All | Text, Number, Dropdown, or Yes / No. | | **Max length** | Text | Caps how many characters can be entered. | | **Normalization** | Text | Auto-formats the value: *None*, *Uppercase + trim*, or *Uppercase + letters/numbers only*. | | **Options** | Dropdown | The list of choices. At least one is required. | | **Show on** | All | Where the value appears: register, waiting list, queue ticket, receipt, customer display. | | **Required** | All | Staff must fill it in before saving. | | **Searchable** | All | Marks the field as the store's primary identifier. Only one field can be searchable. | Choose a single field -- usually the plate or claim tag -- as **Searchable**. This is the value shown as the headline identifier (for example on the customer display), and it is the field you will use to look an order up. The editor only lets one field be searchable at a time. ## Reordering Fields Fields appear on the capture screen in the same order as this list. To change the order, **press and drag the handle** (the dotted grip on the left of a card) up or down. The new order saves with the rest of your changes. ## Editing or Removing a Field - **Edit** -- expand a card and change any setting. - **Remove** -- tap the **trash** icon on the card. Removing a field only affects *new* orders; details already captured on past orders stay on those orders. You can define up to **10 fields**. Keep the list short -- every field is one more thing your cashier fills in per order. Two or three well-chosen fields are usually enough. - [Service Details Overview](/docs/store/pos/service-context/overview) - [Capturing Details at Checkout](/docs/store/pos/service-context/capturing-at-checkout) - [Store Templates & Examples](/docs/store/pos/service-context/store-templates-and-examples) --- # Store Templates & Service Detail Examples > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/service-context/store-templates-and-examples # Store Templates & Service Detail Examples When you create a store and pick a **business template**, Fuze Store fills in a sensible set of Service Detail fields for that trade automatically -- so a car wash starts with a plate and vehicle type, a laundry starts with a claim tag, and so on. It is a head start, not a cage: you can rename, reorder, add, or remove any field afterward in [Store Preferences](/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields). Picking a template is optional and never locks you in. It only pre-fills the fields; you stay in full control from the **Service Context** tab in Preferences. ## What Each Template Sets Up | Template | Fields it fills in | | --- | --- | | **Car Wash** | Plate number, Vehicle type, Color | | **Laundry Shop** | Claim tag #, Load / bag count, Service type | | **Repair Shop** | Device / item, Serial / IMEI, Reported issue | | **Water Refilling** | Container count, Container type | | **Pet Grooming** | Pet name, Pet type, Size | | **Cafe / Milk Tea** | Name on cup | | **Bakery** | Order name, Pickup date | | **Restaurant** | Number of guests, Allergy / notes | | **Salon / Barbershop** | Preferred stylist / barber, Chair / station | | **Spa / Massage** | Room #, Therapist preference | | **Dental Clinic** | Patient chart #, Treatment | | **Optical Clinic** | Prescription ref #, Lens type | | **Pharmacy** | Prescription #, Patient name | | **Hardware** | Job / delivery ref | | **Cellphone Store** | Device model, IMEI / serial | | **Motorcycle Parts** | Plate number, Motorcycle model | | **Mini Grocery** | Tab / suki name | | **Convenience, Vape, Retail, Custom** | None -- grab-and-go stores start with Service Details off | The fields are always filled in when you pick a template, on every plan. On the free Basic plan they sit ready but inactive; the moment you move to a paid plan (or during a free trial) they switch on with nothing to reconfigure. ## Example Setups ### Car Wash - **Plate number** (Text, auto-uppercase, searchable) -- your primary identifier, shown on the customer display. - **Vehicle type** (Dropdown: Sedan, SUV, Van, Pickup, Motorcycle, Truck). - **Color** (Text) -- helps spot the car in a busy lot. ### Laundry Shop - **Claim tag #** (Text, searchable) -- match the customer's ticket at pickup. - **Load / bag count** (Number). - **Service type** (Dropdown: Wash & Fold, Dry Clean, Press Only, Full Service). ### Repair Shop - **Device / item** (Text) -- what came in. - **Serial / IMEI** (Text, searchable) -- the exact unit. - **Reported issue** (Text) -- what the customer said is wrong. ### Building Your Own Not on this list? Start from the **Custom** template (or any close match) and add your own fields. Anything that identifies the visit works well: a locker number, a booking reference, a tag color, a job number. See [Setting Up Your Fields](/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields). - [Service Details Overview](/docs/store/pos/service-context/overview) - [Setting Up Your Fields](/docs/store/pos/service-context/setting-up-fields) - [Capturing Details at Checkout](/docs/store/pos/service-context/capturing-at-checkout) --- # How to Make an Order with a Unit > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/unit/making-an-order-with-unit # How to Make an Order with a Unit You can assign an order to a specific table, room, or seat. This helps your team know exactly where each order belongs. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Click **POS Unit** from the main menu. 3. Select the unit where the order will be served (e.g., Table 5, Room 2, Seat 8). 4. Create a new order. Follow [How to Use the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) for detailed steps. 5. The unit is automatically assigned to the order you create. The order is now linked to the selected unit, so everyone knows where it should go. ## Tips - Double-check that you selected the correct unit before saving the order. - Use clear names or numbers for your units (e.g., "Table 3" or "Booth 1") to avoid mix-ups. - You can move an order to a different unit later if a customer changes spots. - Assigning orders to units helps you track which areas are busy and plan service better. ## Related Guides - [POS Units and Areas Overview](/docs/store/pos/unit/overview) - [Updating Unit Status](/docs/store/pos/unit/updating-unit-status) --- # POS Units & Areas Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/unit/overview # POS Units and Areas Overview In Fuze Store POS, a **unit** is a space you can assign to an order -- like a table, room, seat, or booth. Units help you track where each order belongs and keep your team organized. ## What Are Units? Units are the individual spaces you use for service. Examples: - Table 1 in a restaurant - Room 3 in a hotel - Seat 5 at the bar - Private booth or karaoke room When you create an order, you can assign it to a specific unit. For example, Order #123 is assigned to Table 1. ## What Are Areas? Areas are groups of units. They help you organize your space and find units quickly. Examples: - **Balcony** (Tables 1-4) - **Patio** (Tables 5-8) - **Main Area** (Booths 1-6) - **Bar Side** (Seats 1-10) Areas let you see at a glance which sections are busy. Staff can quickly locate the right spot for each order. ## Why Use Units and Areas? - **Stay organized** -- Always know where each order is. - **Speed up service** -- Staff can quickly find the right table, room, or seat. - **Improve experience** -- Customers get the right order at the right place. - **Plan ahead** -- See which areas are busy and allocate resources accordingly. ## Tips - Use clear, simple names for units and areas (e.g., "Table 1" or "Patio"). - Group units into areas that match your physical layout. - You can add, edit, or remove units and areas anytime as your business changes. ## Related Guides - [Updating Unit Status](/docs/store/pos/unit/updating-unit-status) - [Making an Order with a Unit](/docs/store/pos/unit/making-an-order-with-unit) - [Using the POS Register](/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register) - [Events Overview](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) - [POS Order Screen](/docs/store/pos/managing-orders) --- # Updating Unit Status > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/unit/updating-unit-status # How to Update Unit Status Tracking which tables, rooms, or seats are available, occupied, or reserved keeps your team informed in real time. Updating unit status helps prevent double-bookings and keeps service running smoothly. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Click **POS Unit** from the main menu. You see a list of all enabled units in your store. 3. Select the unit you want to update (e.g., Table 5, Room 2, Seat 8). 4. Choose the new status: - **Available** -- Ready for new orders. - **Unavailable** -- Temporarily out of use (e.g., cleaning or maintenance). - **Reserved** -- Set aside for a future booking. - **Occupied** -- Currently in use with an active order. 5. Save or confirm the change. The unit's status updates instantly. Everyone on your team can see what is available or busy. ## Tips - Update status as soon as things change to avoid confusion or double-bookings. - Some POS setups support color-coded statuses for faster recognition. - Keeping statuses current helps you deliver faster, more reliable service. ## Related Guides - [POS Units and Areas Overview](/docs/store/pos/unit/overview) - [Making an Order with a Unit](/docs/store/pos/unit/making-an-order-with-unit) --- # How to Use the POS Register > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/using-pos-register # How to Use the POS Register The POS Register is where you ring up sales, take payments, and serve your customers. This guide covers the key features and walks you through creating an order. ![The Fuze Store POS register screen showing the product menu panel on the left and the active order panel on the right with item list, subtotal, and checkout controls](/docs/store/pos/pos-register-overview.png) ## Key Features - **Discounts** -- Apply preset discounts or enter a custom discount. Custom discounts support both a fixed amount and a percentage off the order or individual items. - **Gift Cards** -- Enter or scan a gift card code to apply its value. - **Customers** -- Attach a customer to the sale for loyalty tracking, receipts, or special offers. - **Tax Exemption** -- Remove tax from an order when a customer qualifies for exemption. - **Service Mode** -- Choose how the order will be fulfilled: Dine-in, Delivery, Pick Up, Take Away, or Service. - **Assign Unit/Area** -- Assign the order to a specific table, room, or area within your store. This is useful for dine-in orders or service-based businesses. - **Staff Assignment** -- Assign one or more staff members to the order for tracking. - **Notes** -- Add special instructions like "No onions" or "Deliver after 5pm." - **Payments** -- Add payment details before or during checkout. - **Order State** -- Set the default order state (Pending, On-Hold, Processing, Ready, Shipped, or Complete) before submitting. - **Void Items** -- Remove individual items from an order by voiding them. Voided items are tracked separately for accountability. ## How to Create an Order 1. **Open the Menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to POS Register** -- Select **POS Register** or **Terminal** from the menu. - If sessions are enabled and no session is active, you will be asked to start one. - If sessions are disabled or one is already running, you go straight to the register. 3. **Add Items** -- Search for products or scan barcodes to add them to the order. 4. **Add a Customer** (optional) -- Attach a customer for loyalty or receipt purposes. 5. **Apply Discounts or Gift Cards** (optional) -- Add a preset discount, enter a custom fixed or percentage discount, or scan a gift card. ![The POS order panel with three items added, showing quantity controls, line-item prices, a discount field, and the running order subtotal](/docs/store/pos/pos-add-items.png) 6. **Remove Tax** (if needed) -- Remove tax for an exempt customer. 7. **Set Service Mode** (optional) -- Choose Dine-in, Delivery, Pick Up, Take Away, or Service. 8. **Assign Unit/Area** (optional) -- Assign the order to a table, room, or area. 9. **Assign Staff** (optional) -- Link staff members to the order. 10. **Add Notes** (optional) -- Enter any special instructions. 11. **Add Payment** (optional) -- Select a payment method and enter the amount. ![The POS payment screen showing the amount-due calculator, payment method buttons (Cash, Card, GCash), and an exact-change shortcut button](/docs/store/pos/pos-payment.png) 12. **Set Order State** (optional) -- Pick the appropriate status for your workflow. 13. **Review** -- Double-check items, discounts, taxes, and totals. 14. **Submit Order** -- Click **Submit Order** to finalize the sale. ## Voiding Items You can void individual items from an order instead of canceling the entire order. Voided items are removed from the order total but remain visible for record-keeping. This helps you track adjustments without losing the audit trail. ## Tips - Use the search bar or barcode scanner to find items quickly. - Always verify the total before taking payment. - Attach customers to sales for loyalty rewards and easier returns. - Assign staff to orders so you can track who handled each sale. - If you make a mistake, you can void individual items or refund the order afterward. - Set the order state to match your workflow (for example, mark as Processing or Ready). - Use the Assign Unit/Area feature to organize dine-in or room-based orders. ## Related Guides - [POS Unit (Area and Unit Management)](/docs/store/pos/unit/overview) - [Events](/docs/store/pos/event/overview) - [Managing Orders](/docs/store/pos/managing-orders) --- # Voiding Items and Orders > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/pos/voiding-items # Voiding Items and Orders Punched the wrong item? Customer changed their mind before paying? A **void** removes an item from an order **before any payment is taken** — with a reason attached, so your records stay complete and honest. ## Void, Cancel, or Refund? These three corrections cover different situations: | Action | When to use it | Money involved | | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | | **Void** | Remove one or more **items** from an order that has not been paid. | None — nothing was collected yet. | | **Cancel** | Call off the **whole order** before it is completed. | None (or handled separately if a deposit was taken). | | **Refund** | Return money for a **paid and closed** order. | Yes — see [Refunds](/docs/store/refund/overview). | If the order has already been paid, the **Void** option is not available — use a [refund](/docs/store/refund/overview) instead. This keeps collected money and your sales records in agreement. ## How to Void Items From the POS orders screen, open the order that needs correcting. Select the item (or items) to void. You can void a **partial quantity** — for example, void 1 of 3 lattes and keep the other 2 on the order. Every void needs a reason. Choose the one that fits: Wrong item, Customer changed mind, Operator error, Duplicate entry, Item unavailable, Kitchen error, Test or training, or Other. You can add an optional note for context. If your store uses the **Staff Operations** add-on, some voids require a manager's approval. A PIN pad appears — the manager enters their PIN to approve on the spot, without switching the active operator. ## What Happens After a Void - **The item is flagged, not erased.** Voided lines stay on the order record for your audit trail, but they no longer count toward the order total, sales, taxes, or stock usage. - **The kitchen is told.** If you use the Kitchen Display, the voided items drop off the ticket right away. Stores with a kitchen printer can also print a void slip. - **Voiding everything voids the order.** If every item on an order is voided, the order itself becomes **Voided** — recorded separately from cancelled orders. - **It shows up in your reports.** Cashier session reports (Z-reports) count voided items and their value, and the loss-prevention reports break voids down **by staff member** and **by reason** so unusual patterns stand out. Reason codes turn voids from silent deletions into useful data. A spike in "Operator error" voids might mean a training gap; frequent "Item unavailable" voids might mean a stock problem. Review the void reports regularly. ## Who Can Void Voiding uses the same **Point of Sale** permission as other register actions. With the **Staff Operations** add-on, you can additionally require manager approval for voids — the cashier raises the void, and a manager approves it by PIN. Managers can approve in place at the register or from the Staff Operations approvals queue. --- # Creating a Product > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/product/creating-a-product # Creating a Product Products represent the items you sell -- food, merchandise, services, and more. Follow these steps to add a new product to your catalog. ![The Create Product form in the Fuze Store app showing Name, Price, Category, Description, SKU, and Photo upload fields](/docs/store/product/create-product-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the Menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Products** -- Select **Products** from the menu. 3. **Add a Product** -- Press the **Add Product** button at the top right of the product list. 4. **Fill in the Details** -- Enter the information for your new product. See the [Field Reference](/docs/store/product/overview#field-reference) for what each field means. 5. **Save** -- Click **Save**. Your product appears instantly in your POS and menus. ## Tips - Group similar items under the same category for easier browsing. - Use product variants if you sell different sizes (for example, Small, Medium, Large). - You can edit or remove products later if your offerings change. - Make sure each **product name** is unique and descriptive. - Add clear images to help staff and customers recognize products quickly. ## Related Guides - [Product Overview](/docs/store/product/overview) - [How to Update a Product](/docs/store/product/updating-a-product) - [How to Delete a Product](/docs/store/product/deleting-a-product) --- # Deleting a Product > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/product/deleting-a-product # How to Delete a Product If you no longer sell a product or want to clean up your catalog, you can remove it in a few clicks. There are two ways to delete a product. ## Option 1: Delete from the Product List 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Products** -- Select **Products** from the menu list. 3. **Find the product** -- Locate the product you want to delete (for example, "Iced Latte"). 4. **Delete** -- Click the trash bin icon in the action column. 5. **Confirm** -- A confirmation prompt appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## Option 2: Delete from the Product Details 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Products** -- Select **Products** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a product** -- Click the product you want to delete. 4. **Delete** -- Click the trash bin icon on the product details page. 5. **Confirm** -- A confirmation prompt appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## What Happens When You Delete a Product - The product is removed from your POS and menus immediately. - Past sales history and reports remain available. The product simply stops being available for new sales. - Any associations with modifiers or bundles are removed. - You can always add a new product later if needed. ## Tips - **Deletion is permanent** -- double-check before you confirm. - If you only want to hide a product temporarily, make it inactive instead of deleting it. - After deleting, review any related bundles or modifiers to make sure nothing is broken. ## Related Guides - [Product Overview](/docs/store/product/overview) - [How to Create a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [How to Update a Product](/docs/store/product/updating-a-product) --- # Product Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/product/overview # Product Overview The Product feature lets you manage everything you sell -- physical items, digital goods, and more. You can organize, track, and customize your entire catalog from one place. ## What is a Product? A product is any item you offer for sale. This includes food, drinks, retail goods, and more. Each product has its own price, description, image, and settings. **Examples:** - **Food and Beverage** -- Latte, Sandwich, Bottled Water - **Retail** -- T-shirt, Headphones, Gift Card ## Key Benefits - **Centralized Catalog** -- Manage all products in one place. - **Flexible Organization** -- Group products by category, type, or custom tags. - **Modifiers** -- Offer add-ons like extra toppings or premium options. - **Inventory Tracking** -- Monitor stock levels and receive alerts when inventory is low. - **Visual Customization** -- Add images and descriptions to help staff and customers. - **Pricing Control** -- Set prices, costs, taxes, and special promotional pricing per product. - **Sales Insights** -- Track product performance and sales trends. ## Form Structure When you create or edit a product, the form is organized into tabs. Each tab groups related fields together. - **General** -- Name, SKU, Barcode, type, categories, and description. - **Attribute** -- Weight and weight unit. - **Inventory** -- Manage stock, quantity, low stock threshold, and stock status. - **Media** -- Upload product images. - **Modifiers** -- Attach add-on options to the product. - **Pricing** -- Base price, cost, and optional special pricing with date ranges. - **Tax** -- Tax class and tax rule. ## Field Reference | Section | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | General | **Enable** | Whether this product is active for sale. | Yes | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Availability** | Whether this product is available for purchase. | Yes | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Name** | The product name. | Yes | Any text | Iced Latte | | | **SKU** | A unique internal code for tracking and identification. | No | Any text | LATTE-ICED-12OZ | | | **Barcode** | A scannable barcode value for the product. This is separate from the SKU. | No | Any text | 4901234567890 | | | **Type** | The product type. | No | Simple, Bundle | Simple | | | **Categories** | The group this product belongs to. | No | Store categories | Drinks | | | **Description** | A short description of the product. | No | Any text | Chilled espresso | | Attribute | **Weight** | The weight of the product. | No | Any number | 12 | | | **Weight Unit** | The unit of measurement. | No | lb, kg, g, mg, oz, l | oz | | Inventory | **Manage Inventory** | Whether to track inventory for this product. | Yes | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Quantity** | The current stock quantity. | If inventory is enabled | Any number | 1 | | | **Low Stock Level** | The threshold that triggers a low-stock alert. | If inventory is enabled | Any number | 5 | | | **Status** | The current stock status. | If inventory is enabled | In Stock, Out of Stock | In Stock | | Bundle Items | **Bundle Items** | Products grouped together as a bundle. | If type is Bundle | Store products | Iced Coffee Latte, Croissant | | Modifier | **Modifiers** | Add-on options for the product. | No | Store modifiers | Add On, Sizes | | Media | **Media** | Images of the product. | No | Image files | /images/latte.png | | Pricing | **Price** (Inclusive VAT) | The base selling price. | Yes | Any number | 150 | | | **Cost** | Your cost for the product. | No | Any number | 20 | | | **Enable Special Price** | Whether to activate a promotional price. | No | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Special Price** | The promotional price. | If special price is enabled | Any number | 18 | | | **Special Price Start Date** | When the promotional price begins. | No | Date | 2023-10-01 | | | **Special Price End Date** | When the promotional price ends. | No | Date | 2023-10-31 | | | **Special Price Present** | Whether the special price runs indefinitely. | No | Yes, No | No | | Tax | **Tax Class** | The tax classification. | Yes | None, Taxable goods | Taxable Goods | | | **Tax** | The tax rule applied to the product. | If tax class is Taxable Goods | Store taxes | General Tax | ## SKU vs. Barcode These two fields serve different purposes: - **SKU** is your internal code. You define it for tracking and organizing products within your system. - **Barcode** is the scannable code printed on the product packaging. You can scan it at checkout using a barcode scanner. You can use one, both, or neither depending on your workflow. ## Best Practices - Use clear, descriptive names and images for every product. - Group products into logical categories for easier browsing. - Keep inventory counts up to date to avoid stockouts. - Use modifiers to reduce catalog clutter. - Set a Barcode value if you use a barcode scanner at checkout. - Review prices and descriptions regularly for accuracy. ## Related Guides - [How to Add a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [How to Update a Product](/docs/store/product/updating-a-product) - [How to Delete a Product](/docs/store/product/deleting-a-product) --- # How to Update a Product > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/product/updating-a-product # How to Update a Product Keep your products current so your POS and menus always match what you offer. You can change a product's name, image, color, or any other detail in just a few steps. ![The Edit Product form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Name, Price, and Category fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/product/edit-product-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu** -- Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Products** -- Select **Products** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a product** -- Click the product you want to edit (for example, "Iced Latte"). 4. **Edit the details** -- Update any field as needed. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/product/overview#field-reference) for what each field means. 5. **Save** -- Click **Save**. Your changes appear instantly in the POS and menus. ## Tips - Changes take effect right away after saving. - Use clear, descriptive names and images so staff and customers can find items quickly. - Leave optional fields blank if you are unsure what to enter. - Make sure each **Product Name** is unique. - Group similar items under the same category for easier browsing. ## Related Guides - [Product Overview](/docs/store/product/overview) - [How to Create a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [How to Delete a Product](/docs/store/product/deleting-a-product) --- # Completing a Refund > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/refund/completing-a-refund # How to Complete a Refund Follow these steps to return money to a customer through Fuze Store POS. Before you start, make sure the original order is **closed**. Refunds are only available on completed, closed orders. If you do not see a refund option, the order is probably still open or in progress — finish and close it first. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Refunds.** Select **Refunds** from the menu list. 3. **Find the refund.** Search or use filters to locate the refund you need. 4. **Open the refund.** Click **View Details** to see the refund information. 5. **Refund the customer first.** Send the money through your own channel — cash from the drawer, your own GCash/Maya, a bank transfer, or a reversal on your own card terminal. 6. **Record the refund.** Click the **Complete Refund** button to open the refund form, then record **how** you refunded: choose the tender (e.g. Cash, GCash, Card), enter a **reference number** (the GCash ref, bank txn id, or card terminal slip #), and confirm the amount. - Entering the full amount records a **full refund** and marks the refund **Completed**. - Entering a smaller amount records a **partial refund**; the remaining balance is calculated automatically and you can record more later. The refund is recorded and your records update automatically — stock is restored and any loyalty points or gift-card value are reversed. ## Tips - Always double-check the order and items before refunding. - Communicate clearly with customers about the refund process. - Use notes to explain the reason for the refund. This helps your team. - Refunds can be full or partial. Only refund what is needed. - Use the same payment method as the original sale when possible. --- # Refund Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/refund/overview # Refund Overview Sometimes a customer changes their mind, receives the wrong item, or needs to cancel a service. The refund feature in Fuze Store POS lets you handle returns quickly and keep your records accurate. ## What Is a Refund A **refund** is when you return money to a customer for a product or service they purchased. This could be for a returned item, a canceled booking, or a mistake in the order. **You send the money through your own channel.** Fuze Store does not move money for you — you refund the customer the way you got paid (cash from the drawer, your own GCash/Maya, a bank transfer, or a reversal on your own card terminal), then **record it here**. Recording the refund keeps your sales and inventory accurate, restores stock, and reverses any loyalty points or gift-card value. For card payments, refund on the same terminal you charged on and enter the terminal reference number when you record it. **You can only refund a completed, closed order.** A refund becomes available once the order has been fully paid and **closed**. If the order is still open or being processed, finish and close it first — the **Refund** option will not appear until then. This keeps refunds tied to real, settled sales. Because you hand over the money yourself, a refund records as **Completed** the moment you save it. There is no waiting period and no "pending" or "failed" state — card refunds are just another tender you log with a reference number. **Real-life examples:** - **Food and Beverage.** A customer returns a coffee that was made incorrectly, and you refund the amount. - **Retail.** Someone brings back a shirt that did not fit, and you process a refund to their card. - **Services.** A client cancels a massage appointment and receives their money back. ## Why Use the Refund Feature - **Keep customers happy.** Quick refunds show you care about good service. - **Easy to use.** Process returns and refunds in just a few clicks. - **Accurate records.** Every refund is tracked so your sales and inventory stay correct. - **Flexible options.** Refund to cash, card, or gift card depending on how the customer paid. - **Staff accountability.** See who processed each refund for better control. ## Field Explanations Here is what you see for each refund: | Field | What It Means | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Refund Number** | Unique ID for the refund. | | 200145 | | **Amount** | Total money returned to the customer. | Any number | $15.00 | | **Reason** | Why the refund was given (if provided). | | Wrong size | | **Status** | Current status of the refund. | Draft, Authorized, Completed, Voided | Completed | | **Created At** | When the refund was created. | | 2025-07-11 10:15 | | **Updated At** | When the refund was last updated. | | 2025-07-11 10:15 | | **Transactions** | List of transactions related to the refund. See [Transaction Field Explanations](/docs/store/transaction/overview#field-explanations) for details. | | TXN-200145 | | **Items** | List of items included in the refund. See [Product Field Explanations](/docs/store/product/overview#field-reference) or [Service Field Explanations](/docs/store/service/overview#field-explanations) for details. | | | ## Best Practices - Always check the original order before processing a refund. - Communicate your refund policy clearly to customers. - Use notes to explain why a refund was given. - Review refunds regularly to spot patterns or issues. - Make sure your staff knows how to process refunds correctly. --- # AOV Trends Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/aov-trends-report # AOV Trends Report The AOV Trends report tracks your **average order value** (AOV) over time so you can see whether your ticket size is growing, holding, or slipping. AOV is one of the cleanest revenue-quality signals you have — it tells you whether each transaction is becoming more valuable independent of the number of orders. ## What you'll see For the chosen date range: - **AOV trend line** — daily / weekly AOV across the range. - **Period AOV** — the single number for the whole range. - **Comparison AOV** — same number for the comparison period (previous, last week, last month). - **AOV delta** — absolute and percentage change vs. comparison. - **Order volume context** — overlay of total orders so you can tell whether AOV grew because of upsell or because of a quieter day. ## How to use it Sidebar → **Reports** → **AOV Trends**. A single day is too noisy. Use a 14- or 30-day range to see direction. If you ran a promo, use a range that brackets the promo with equal pre- and post-windows. Toggle the comparison range. The percentage change is the headline number — anything more than ±5% is worth a look. ## What to look for - **AOV growing without volume change** — your team is upselling effectively, or your menu mix is shifting toward higher-priced items. Both are good. - **AOV growing while volume drops** — usually means smaller customers stopped coming. Combine with [Customer Insights](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) to see whether the new-customer share is the one shrinking. - **AOV dropping while volume grows** — promo impact, or a shift to lower-price-point items. Worth checking whether the lower-price items are also lower-margin. - **Sharp single-day AOV swing** — usually a single big group order (catering, party booking). Pair with [Order Types Report](/docs/store/reports/order-types-report) to confirm. ## Permissions and plan Needs **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature (Lite plan and up) + **Reports** permission. Owner / org owner+admin always have access. ## Related guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Order Types Report](/docs/store/reports/order-types-report) - [Customer Insights Report](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) - [Discount Analysis Report](/docs/store/reports/discount-analysis-report) --- # Customer Insights Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report # Customer Insights Report The Customer Insights report turns your customer database into actionable signal: how many of your sales come from new vs. returning customers, who's actually coming back, what they spend, and how often. This is the report you reach for when you're deciding whether to invest in acquisition or retention. ## What you'll see For the chosen date range: - **New vs returning** — order count and revenue split between first-time and repeat customers. - **Repeat purchase rate** — % of customers in the period who bought more than once. - **Average orders per customer** — typical purchase frequency. - **Average customer spend** — typical lifetime spend across the period. - **Top customers by spend** — your highest-value customers in the range. - **Top customers by frequency** — your most loyal customers regardless of ticket size. Customers without a registered profile (anonymous walk-ins) are bucketed as a single "Walk-in" line so the per-customer metrics don't get diluted. ## How to use it Sidebar → **Reports** → **Customer Insights**. Use 30+ days for meaningful frequency metrics — repeat-purchase rate is meaningless on a single day. Toggle the comparison range. A drop in the new-customer share usually means acquisition has stalled; a drop in the returning share usually means retention has slipped. Open their profile to see full order history, [enroll them in Loyalty](/docs/store/loyalty/overview), or attach a note for staff. ## What to look for - **Returning-customer revenue share above 50%** — your business runs on regulars. Protect it: a Loyalty program, customer-only discounts, and remembering names go further than ad spend. - **Returning share dropping** — something has changed. New menu? New staff? Quality drift? Talk to your top frequency customers to find out. - **High new-customer count + low repeat rate** — leaky bucket. Acquisition is working, but the second visit isn't. Audit first-visit experience. - **High AOV from a small group of customers** — VIPs. Worth a personal thank-you and an early invite to new menu items. Pair this report with the [Customer Retention Report](/docs/store/reports/overview) (cohort analysis) for a longer-horizon view. ## Permissions and plan Needs **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature (Lite plan and up) + **Reports** permission. Customer-detail drilldowns also require the **Customers** permission. ## Related guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Discount Analysis Report](/docs/store/reports/discount-analysis-report) - [Customer Profiles](/docs/store/customer/overview) - [Loyalty Programs](/docs/store/loyalty/overview) --- # Discount Analysis Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/discount-analysis-report # Discount Analysis Report The Discount Analysis report shows you exactly which of your discounts are pulling weight and which are quietly eroding margin. Every discount you've created is listed with the number of orders it touched, the revenue it discounted, and the absolute discount amount given away. ## What you'll see For each discount used in the date range: - **Discount name** — what you called it (e.g. "Happy Hour 15%", "Senior Discount"). - **Orders** — how many orders applied this discount. - **Discounted revenue** — gross revenue on those orders before the discount. - **Discount given** — total absolute amount discounted. - **Effective discount %** — discount given ÷ discounted revenue. - **Trend** — usage and discount given over the comparison period. Loyalty-program redemptions are surfaced as a separate row so you can see the difference between "we chose to discount" and "the customer earned a discount". ## How to use it Sidebar → **Reports** → **Discount Analysis**. A 30-day range works for routine review. Use a longer range when evaluating whether to retire a discount. Toggle the comparison range. If a discount's usage is growing but margin is shrinking, that's a discount that's training your customers to wait for the deal. A discount that drives an obvious sales spike in the same date range is doing its job. A discount that doesn't move the top line is probably margin given to people who would have paid anyway. ## What to look for - **High usage, low marginal sales** — a discount that gets applied a lot but doesn't grow total sales is just margin loss. Consider tightening the rule (one per customer per week, minimum order size) or retiring it. - **Stacked discounts** — Fuze Store applies discounts in priority order; if you see a single order pulling multiple discounts, audit your discount priorities. - **Loyalty redemption velocity** — if your loyalty discount line is huge, the program is engaged. Pair it with the [Customer Insights Report](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) to see whether it's retaining customers. - **Effective discount % > nominal %** — usually means modifiers / add-ons aren't being included in the base; check the discount's product scope. ## Permissions and plan Needs **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature (Lite plan and up) + **Reports** permission. Owner / org owner+admin always have access. ## Related guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Customer Insights Report](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) - [Discount Setup](/docs/store/discount/creating-a-discount) --- # Exporting Reports > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/exporting-reports # Exporting Reports You can export any report from Fuze Store to an Excel or CSV file. This makes it easy to analyze data offline, keep records, or share reports with your accountant. ## Step-by-Step Guide Follow these steps to export a report. 1. **Open the report** you want to export (Sales, Item, or Transaction Report). 2. **Set your date range** and apply any filters you need. 3. **Tap the Export button.** You will find it near the top of the report screen. 4. **Choose your format.** Select either Excel (.xlsx) or CSV (.csv). 5. **Download the file.** The file saves to your device automatically. ## Supported Formats | Format | Best For | | --- | --- | | **Excel (.xlsx)** | Spreadsheet analysis with formatting and formulas. | | **CSV (.csv)** | Simple data import into accounting or other software. | ## What Gets Exported The exported file includes all the data visible in the report. This covers: - All rows matching your selected date range and filters. - Column headers for each data field. - Totals and summaries where applicable. ## Common Use Cases - **Bookkeeping.** Keep monthly sales records for your financial files. - **Tax preparation.** Share transaction data with your accountant at tax time. - **Team review.** Send performance reports to business partners or managers. - **Data analysis.** Open the file in Excel or Google Sheets for custom charts. ## Tips - **Set the right date range first.** The export only includes data from the selected period. - **Use filters before exporting.** This keeps your file focused on the data you need. - **Save files with clear names.** Include the date range in the file name for easy reference. ## Related Guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/sales-report) - [Item Report](/docs/store/reports/item-report) - [Transaction Report](/docs/store/reports/transaction-report) --- # Hourly Sales Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/hourly-sales-report # Hourly Sales Report The Hourly Sales report shows your revenue, order count, and average order value (AOV) hour by hour across the chosen date range. Use it to staff for the rush, prep ingredients ahead of peaks, and avoid scheduling people through the dead zones. ## What you'll see For each hour in the date range: - **Sales** — gross revenue rung up that hour. - **Order count** — how many orders were processed. - **Average Order Value (AOV)** — sales ÷ orders. - **Trend line** — revenue over the entire range, hour-by-hour. The chart aggregates across all selected days. If you pick a 7-day range, hour 12 is the sum of every 12 PM in the range. ## How to use it Sidebar → **Reports** → **Hourly Sales**. A single day shows that day's pattern; a 7-day range averages a typical week; a 30-day range smooths over special events. Use 7 days for routine staffing decisions. Use the comparison toggle to overlay the prior week or month. If your peak just shifted later, you'll see it immediately on the trend line. The [Sales Heatmap](/docs/store/reports/overview) (also under Reports) shows the same data on a 7×24 day-of-week grid — useful for spotting weekend-only peaks or Monday slumps that an averaged hourly chart would smooth out. ## What to look for - **Clear peak hours** — schedule your most experienced staff there. Consider a pre-rush prep block 30 minutes before. - **Low-volume hours** — a great time for cleaning, restocking, or trialling promotions. Don't over-staff. - **AOV by hour** — late-night orders often have higher AOV (groups, bigger meals); morning orders are usually quick singles. Adjust upsell prompts accordingly. - **Sudden spike or drop vs comparison range** — usually a marketing event, weather, or a holiday. Worth annotating in your shift log. ## Permissions and plan Needs **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature (Lite plan and up) + **Reports** permission. Owner / org owner+admin always have access. ## Related guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Staff Performance Report](/docs/store/reports/staff-performance-report) - [Order Types Report](/docs/store/reports/order-types-report) --- # Item Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/item-report # Item Report The Item Report breaks down your sales by individual product or service. You can also find this report listed as the **Sales Item Report**. ## What the Item Report Shows This report tells you exactly which items drive your revenue. | Column | Description | | --- | --- | | **Item Name** | The name of the product or service sold. | | **Quantity Sold** | The total number of units sold. | | **Revenue** | The total earnings from that item. | | **Percentage of Sales** | How much of your total revenue this item represents. | ## Why the Item Report Is Useful Understanding item-level performance helps you run your business better. - **Find your best sellers.** See which items customers buy most often. - **Spot underperformers.** Identify items that rarely sell. - **Plan inventory.** Stock more of what sells and less of what does not. - **Set pricing.** Adjust prices based on demand and sales volume. ## How to Use the Item Report 1. Go to **Reports** from the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Item Report**. 3. Choose your date range. 4. Review the list of items sorted by revenue or quantity. You can sort the table by any column to find the information you need. ## Tips for Getting the Most Out of This Report - **Check weekly** to keep up with changing customer preferences. - **Review before restocking** to order the right quantities. - **Compare periods** to see seasonal item trends. - **Export the data** for deeper analysis in a spreadsheet. ## Related Guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/sales-report) - [Exporting Reports](/docs/store/reports/exporting-reports) - [Creating a Product](/docs/store/product/creating-a-product) - [Inventory Overview](/docs/store/inventory/overview) --- # Order Types Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/order-types-report # Order Types Report The Order Types report breaks down your sales by **service mode** — Dine-In, Take-Away, Delivery, Pick-Up, and Service. Use it to see where your revenue is actually coming from and to balance kitchen load, marketing spend, and operational focus. ## What you'll see For each service mode used in the date range: - **Sales** — gross revenue from orders served in that mode. - **Order count** — number of orders. - **Average Order Value (AOV)** — sales ÷ orders. - **Channel share** — % of total sales that came through that mode. - **Trend** — channel share over time vs. the comparison period. Service modes that weren't used at all in the period are hidden so the chart doesn't look empty. ## How to use it Sidebar → **Reports** → **Order Types**. Defaults to the last 7 days. Pick a 30-day range to spot longer-term shifts. Toggle the comparison range to see whether Dine-In is recovering, Delivery is growing, or Take-Away is plateauing. ## What to look for - **Channel concentration risk** — if 70%+ of revenue comes from one mode, a disruption to that channel (delivery driver shortage, dine-in restrictions) hits hard. Consider rebalancing. - **AOV gap between modes** — Delivery typically has higher AOV (group orders, delivery fee), Dine-In has higher add-on attach rate. Use that to design upsell prompts per mode. - **Mode mix shifting against you** — if Dine-In share is dropping while Delivery rises, kitchen workflow may need to switch to a queue / KDS-driven prep model rather than a per-table model. - **Pick-Up gaining without marketing** — natural growth that's worth investing in. A loyalty offer or pre-order discount could compound it. ## Permissions and plan Needs **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature (Lite plan and up) + **Reports** permission. Owner / org owner+admin always have access. ## Related guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Hourly Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/hourly-sales-report) - [AOV Trends Report](/docs/store/reports/aov-trends-report) - [Service Modes](/docs/store/service/overview) --- # Reports Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/overview # Reports Overview The Reports section helps you understand your business performance. You can track sales, review transactions, study customer behaviour, watch your margin, and compare any period to the one before it — all from real, signed-in data. Reports come in two tiers: - **Reports (Basic)** — the headline daily reports: Sales, Best Sellers, and Sales by Payment Method, plus your transaction history. The day-to-day numbers you need to close out a shift. Included on the **Starter** plan and up. - **Reports (Advanced)** — every analytic and breakdown: sales by category, hourly sales, order types, discounts, staff performance, customers and retention, gross margin, cash variance, inventory health, voids, and SMS analytics — plus Excel exports of any report. Included on the **Lite** plan and up. ## Sales reports | Report | What it shows | | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Sales Report** | Revenue over time with daily, weekly, or monthly views. | | **Item Report** | Sales broken down by individual product or service. | | **Sales by Category** | Revenue grouped by product category. | | **Sales by Payment Method** | Revenue grouped by tender (cash, GCash, Maya, card, ...). | | **Best Sellers** | Top products by revenue and units. | | **Sales Heatmap** | 7×24 grid showing busiest day-and-hour windows for staffing decisions. | ## Analytics reports These reports were added in the May 2026 analytics expansion. Each one supports period-over-period comparison — pick a comparison range (previous period, last week, last month) and the dashboard will overlay the delta percentage on every KPI tile. | Report | What it shows | | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Hourly Sales** | Revenue, order count, and AOV by hour. Use for shift planning. [Open guide →](/docs/store/reports/hourly-sales-report) | | **Staff Performance** | Per-staff sales, orders, AOV, refund rate, discount usage. [Open guide →](/docs/store/reports/staff-performance-report) | | **Order Types Breakdown** | Sales split by Dine-In, Take-Away, Delivery, Pick-Up, and Service. [Open guide →](/docs/store/reports/order-types-report) | | **Discount Analysis** | Discount usage count, discounted revenue, and margin impact. [Open guide →](/docs/store/reports/discount-analysis-report) | | **Customer Insights** | New vs returning, AOV, frequency, repeat customers. [Open guide →](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) | | **AOV Trends** | Average order value over time with trend line. [Open guide →](/docs/store/reports/aov-trends-report) | | **Customer Retention** | Cohort retention curves and repeat-purchase rate. | | **Refund Reasons** | Refund volume and amount grouped by normalised reason. | | **Cash Variance** | Per-session over/under by closed session. | | **Gross Margin (categories)** | Gross profit and margin by product category. | | **Gross Margin (products)** | Top and bottom margin products. | | **Inventory Health** | Slow movers, dead stock, days of supply, sell-through. | | **Upcoming Events** | Booking and reservation volume by status. | ## Transaction report The Transaction report lists every payment transaction (completed, pending, cancelled, expired) with method, status, amount, and a link back to the order. This list uses **endless scroll** — scroll to load more, no page numbers. The first page is cached so cold-open is instant; further scrolling pulls fresh data. ## Period-over-period comparisons Every analytics report has a comparison toggle. Pick: - **Previous period** — same number of days immediately before your current range. - **Last week** — same days last week. - **Last month** — same days last month. - **Custom** — pick any explicit range. KPI tiles show the comparison delta as a percentage (green up, red down) and the absolute difference. Trend charts overlay both ranges so you can see the shape of the change at a glance. ## Why reports matter Reports take the guesswork out of running your business. You can use them to: - **Track revenue trends** and spot growth or decline. - **Identify best-selling items** and stock accordingly. - **Reconcile payments** across different payment methods. - **Spot operational pressure** using hourly, heatmap, event, and cash variance reports. - **Protect margin** by reviewing discounts, refunds, gross profit, and inventory health. - **Coach your team** with per-staff performance breakdowns. - **Find your repeat customers** and design loyalty / promo offers around them. - **Share data with your accountant** using exported Excel files. ## How to access reports 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Tap **Reports** from the navigation list. 3. Pick a report from the **Report Hub**. 4. Set your date range, filters, and (optionally) a comparison range. 5. For exportable reports, tap the export icon in the top-right. ## Plan availability Reports are included in paid subscription plans. The export-to-Excel surface needs the higher-tier **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature. ## Related guides - [Hourly Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/hourly-sales-report) - [Staff Performance Report](/docs/store/reports/staff-performance-report) - [Order Types Report](/docs/store/reports/order-types-report) - [Discount Analysis Report](/docs/store/reports/discount-analysis-report) - [Customer Insights Report](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) - [AOV Trends Report](/docs/store/reports/aov-trends-report) - [Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/sales-report) - [Item Report](/docs/store/reports/item-report) - [Transaction Report](/docs/store/reports/transaction-report) - [Exporting Reports](/docs/store/reports/exporting-reports) - [Dashboard Overview](/docs/store/dashboard/overview) --- # Sales Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/sales-report # Sales Report The Sales Report shows your revenue over time. You can use it to see how much your business earns across different periods. ## What the Sales Report Shows The report gives you a clear picture of your sales performance. | Metric | Description | | --- | --- | | **Total Revenue** | The sum of all completed sales in the selected period. | | **Number of Orders** | How many orders were placed. | | **Average Order Value** | Total revenue divided by the number of orders. | | **Comparison** | How the current period compares to a previous one. | ## Choosing a Date Range You can view your sales data for any period you choose. - **Today** -- Sales from the current day. - **This Week** -- Sales from the past seven days. - **This Month** -- Sales from the current month. - **Custom Range** -- Select any start and end date. ## Viewing Breakdowns You can switch between different time breakdowns to see your data in more detail. - **Daily** -- See revenue for each day in the selected range. - **Weekly** -- Group revenue into weekly totals. - **Monthly** -- View revenue summarized by month. This helps you spot patterns like busy days or slow weeks. ## Comparing Periods Select two periods to compare side by side. For example, compare this month to last month to check if revenue is growing. The report highlights increases and decreases so you can see changes quickly. ## Tips for Using the Sales Report - **Review weekly** to catch trends early. - **Compare month over month** to track long-term growth. - **Use daily breakdowns** during promotions to measure impact. - **Export the data** if you need to share it with your team. ## Related Guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Item Report](/docs/store/reports/item-report) - [Transaction Report](/docs/store/reports/transaction-report) - [Exporting Reports](/docs/store/reports/exporting-reports) - [Dashboard Overview](/docs/store/dashboard/overview) --- # Staff Performance Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/staff-performance-report # Staff Performance Report The Staff Performance report breaks down your sales activity by the staff member who rang up each order. Use it to identify your top performers, spot training opportunities, and make sure no one is leaning on discounts or refunds in a way that hurts margin. ## What you'll see For each staff member who served an order in the date range: - **Total sales** — gross revenue rung up by that staff member. - **Order count** — how many orders they processed. - **Average Order Value (AOV)** — total sales ÷ order count. - **Refund rate** — refunded value as a % of their sales. - **Discount usage** — total discounted amount and discount rate as a % of their sales. - **Voids** — count of orders they cancelled. ## How to use it 1. Open the sidebar and tap **Reports**. 2. Tap **Staff Performance** in the Report Hub. Use the date picker at the top to choose a period — today, this week, this month, or a custom range. The default is **last 7 days**. Toggle the comparison range (previous period, last week, last month) to see who improved and who slipped vs the prior cycle. Tap any row to see their orders, refunds, and discount activity for the period. ## What to look for - **High discount rate without higher sales** — staff giving away margin to close orders. Consider re-training on closing techniques. - **High refund rate** — could indicate quality issues on items they sell, mis-rings, or pressure to refund-then-redo. - **AOV gap between staff** — top performers usually upsell modifiers, recommend add-ons, or work the higher-margin sections of your menu. Pair newer staff with them. - **Order count vs sales** — high count + low AOV is a fast cashier; low count + high AOV is a closer. Both have a place. ## Permissions and plan This report needs the **Reports (Advanced)** plan feature (Lite plan and up) plus the **Reports** permission for the staff member viewing it. Owner / org owner+admin always have access. ## Related guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Hourly Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/hourly-sales-report) - [Customer Insights Report](/docs/store/reports/customer-insights-report) - [Roles and Permissions](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Transaction Report > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/reports/transaction-report # Transaction Report The Transaction Report lists every payment transaction processed through your store. You can use it to verify payments and reconcile your records. ## What the Transaction Report Shows Each transaction entry includes the following details. | Column | Description | | --- | --- | | **Transaction ID** | A unique identifier for the transaction. | | **Date and Time** | When the transaction was processed. | | **Amount** | The total payment amount. | | **Payment Method** | How the customer paid (cash, card, e-wallet, etc.). | | **Status** | Whether the transaction is completed, pending, or failed. | | **Order Reference** | The order linked to this transaction. | ## Understanding Transaction Statuses - **Completed** -- The payment was successfully processed. - **Pending** -- The payment is still being processed or awaiting confirmation. - **Failed** -- The payment did not go through. ## How to Use the Transaction Report 1. Go to **Reports** from the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Transaction Report**. 3. Set your date range. 4. Use filters to narrow results by payment method or status. ## Common Uses - **Daily reconciliation.** Match transactions against your cash drawer or bank records. - **Dispute resolution.** Look up a specific transaction by ID or date. - **Payment method analysis.** See which payment methods your customers prefer. - **Audit trail.** Keep a record of all payments for accounting purposes. ## Tips - **Filter by payment method** to reconcile each channel separately. - **Check for failed transactions** regularly to catch payment issues. - **Export the report** to share with your accountant or bookkeeper. ## Related Guides - [Reports Overview](/docs/store/reports/overview) - [Sales Report](/docs/store/reports/sales-report) - [Exporting Reports](/docs/store/reports/exporting-reports) - [Adding Payment Methods](/docs/store/payment-method/adding-payment-methods) --- # How to Create a New Role > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/roles-and-permission/creating-a-role # How to Create a New Role Custom roles let you control exactly what each team member can do. This is useful when you want to give someone specific permissions or limit access to certain features. ![The Create Role form in the Fuze Store app showing Role Name field and a permission toggle list organized by feature area](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/create-role-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. You will see a list of store settings. 3. Select **Roles & Permissions** to open the roles management page. 4. Click the **Add Role** or **Create Role** button. 5. Enter the role details. See the [field explanations](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 6. Set the permissions for this role. See the [full permissions list](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview#fuze-store-permissions) for all available options. 7. Click **Save**. Your new role will appear in the list and can be assigned to staff members. ## Tips - Use clear names so your team knows what each role is for. - Only give sensitive permissions (like deleting data or changing settings) to trusted team members. - You can always edit or delete roles later if your needs change. - Review your roles regularly as your business grows. ## Best Practices - Start with basic roles and add more as needed. - Keep permissions simple -- most staff only need basic access. - Remove or update roles that are no longer needed to keep your system clean. --- # How to Delete a Role > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/roles-and-permission/deleting-role # How to Delete a Role You may need to remove a role that is no longer needed -- a test role, an outdated position, or a duplicate. There are two ways to delete a role. ## Option 1: Delete from the Roles List 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. You will see a list of store settings. 3. Select **Roles & Permissions** to open the roles management page. 4. Find the role you want to delete. 5. Click the **Delete** icon (trash can) in the action column. 6. Confirm by clicking **Yes** or **Confirm**. The role is permanently removed. ## Option 2: Delete from the Role Details Page 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. You will see a list of store settings. 3. Select **Roles & Permissions** to open the roles management page. 4. Find the role you want to delete. 5. Click the **Edit** button to open the role details page. 6. Click the **Delete** button on the details page. 7. Confirm by clicking **Yes** or **Confirm**. The role is permanently removed. ## Deleting a Role That Has Staff If any staff are still assigned to the role, Fuze Store warns you before deleting. The confirmation tells you how many staff are affected, and that they will be unassigned and lose the access the role granted. You can continue or cancel. To avoid leaving anyone without access, reassign those staff to another role first, then delete the empty role. The **default role cannot be deleted.** Your store's built-in Super Admin role is permanent — you can rename it or change its description, but the Delete action is not available for it. ## What Happens When You Delete a Role? - The role no longer appears in the list of available roles. - Any staff who had the role are unassigned and lose the access it granted (you are warned of this before confirming). - You can always create a new role later if your needs change. ## Tips - Double-check before deleting -- a deleted role cannot be restored. - Reassign staff to a different role before deleting so no one loses access unexpectedly. - Only delete roles you are sure you no longer need. ## Best Practices - Review your roles regularly and remove any that are outdated or unused. - Keep your list of roles clean for easier management. - Communicate changes to your team so everyone knows their responsibilities. --- # Roles and Permissions Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview # Roles and Permissions Overview Roles and permissions control what each staff member can see and do in your POS system. Setting them up correctly keeps your business secure and running smoothly. ## What Are Roles and Permissions? - **Roles** are like job titles (e.g., cashier, manager, admin) that define what a staff member can do. - **Permissions** are the specific actions each role is allowed to perform, such as making sales, viewing reports, or changing settings. Giving the right role to each team member helps you: - Protect sensitive information - Prevent mistakes - Make sure everyone has the tools they need ## Common Roles | Role | What They Can Do | | --- | --- | | **Cashier** | Process sales, handle orders, view receipts | | **Manager** | All cashier abilities plus manage staff and view reports | | **Admin** | Full access to all settings, reports, and sensitive info | Your system may also have custom roles. Ask your admin if you are unsure about your access level. When you create a new role, you can start from a **predefined template** (Manager, Cashier, Kitchen Staff, Server, and more) instead of an empty list. The template pre-checks a sensible set of permissions for that job, and you can adjust them before saving — a fast way to set up your team. ## Field Explanations | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable** | Whether the role is active | Yes | Yes | | **Name** | The role name | Yes | Cashier | | **Description** | A brief description of the role's responsibilities | | Handles sales transactions | | **Permissions** | The list of actions the role can perform | Yes | Order Modify, Order Create, Transaction View | ## Fuze Store Permissions Fuze Store provides 84 permissions across 34 modules. The table below lists every available permission. Note that product-related permissions use "Item" naming in the system (for example, Item View, Item Modify). Some modules are part of paid add-ons (Inventory, Gift Card, Loyalty, KDS, SMS, Staff Operations, and more). You can still tick their permissions while building a role even if the add-on is off — the role editor shows a **"Requires add-on"** hint, and the access turns on automatically once you enable that add-on. | Module | Permission | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | **Store** | Modify | Allow modifying store general information | | | Export | Allow exporting store data | | | Import | Allow importing store data | | **Preferences** | Modify | Allow configuring store preferences | | **Dashboard** | View | Allow viewing the store dashboard | | **Point of Sale** | Modify | Allow operating the POS register (create and modify orders, take payments) | | **Order** | View | Allow viewing orders | | | Modify | Allow modifying orders | | | Reprint Receipt | Allow reprinting an order receipt (includes Order View) | | **Transaction** | View | Allow viewing transactions | | | Modify | Allow recording and modifying transactions | | **Refund** | View | Allow viewing refunds | | | Modify | Allow creating and recording refunds | | | Override | Allow overriding refund guardrails (window, amount cap, tender, no receipt) | | **Session** | Modify | Allow opening and closing cashier sessions and drawer movements | | **Item** | View | Allow viewing products and services | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying products and services | | | Delete | Allow deleting products and services | | **Category** | View | Allow viewing categories | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying categories | | | Delete | Allow deleting categories | | **Inventory** | View | Allow viewing inventory and stock levels | | | Modify | Allow adjusting inventory | | | Delete | Allow deleting inventory records | | **Discount** | View | Allow viewing discounts | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying discounts | | | Delete | Allow deleting discounts | | **Tax** | View | Allow viewing taxes | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying taxes | | | Delete | Allow deleting taxes | | **Gift Card** | View | Allow viewing gift cards | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying gift cards | | | Delete | Allow deleting gift cards | | **Loyalty** | View | Allow viewing the loyalty program | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying the loyalty program (includes deleting tiers) | | **Customer** | View | Allow viewing customers | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying customers | | | Delete | Allow deleting customers | | **Staff** | View | Allow viewing staff | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying staff | | | Delete | Allow deleting staff | | **Roles and Permissions** | View | Allow viewing roles and permissions | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying roles and permissions | | | Delete | Allow deleting roles and permissions | | **Staff Operations** | View | Allow viewing staff sessions, terminals, and approvals | | | Modify | Allow managing PINs, terminals, and sessions | | | Approve | Allow approving manager-approval requests (voids, overrides) | | **Area** | View | Allow viewing areas and units | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying areas and units | | | Delete | Allow deleting areas and units | | **Events** | View | Allow viewing events, appointments, and reservations | | | Modify | Allow creating and modifying events, appointments, and reservations | | | Delete | Allow deleting events | | **Waiting List** | View | Allow viewing the waiting list | | | Modify | Allow managing the waiting list | | **Display** | Front Display | Allow access to the customer-facing display | | **Kitchen Display (KDS)** | View | Allow viewing the kitchen display | | | Modify | Allow starting, bumping, and recalling kitchen tickets | | | Delete | Allow removing kitchen tickets | | **Printer** | View | Allow viewing printers and print jobs | | | Modify | Allow adding, editing, and testing printers | | | Delete | Allow deleting printers | | **Payment Method** | View | Allow viewing payment methods | | | Modify | Allow modifying payment methods | | | Delete | Allow deleting payment methods | | **Expense** | View | Allow viewing expenses | | | Create | Allow creating expenses | | | Modify | Allow modifying expenses | | | Approver | Allow approving or rejecting expenses | | | Delete | Allow deleting (voiding) expenses | | **Reports** | View | Allow viewing reports | | | Download | Allow downloading and exporting reports | | **SMS** | View | Allow viewing SMS settings and history | | | Modify | Allow managing SMS settings, templates, and automation | | **Wallet** | View | Allow viewing the prepaid wallet balance and history | | | Modify | Allow managing the wallet | | | Top Up | Allow topping up the wallet | | **Organization Wallet** | View | Allow viewing the organization's pooled wallet | | | Top Up | Allow topping up the organization wallet | | | Modify | Allow managing the organization wallet | | **Fuze Store Hub** | Admin | Allow managing the on-premise Fuze Store Hub | | **Billing History** | View | Allow viewing billing history | | | Download | Allow downloading billing records | | **Subscription** | View | Allow viewing subscriptions and billing | ## How to Assign Roles 1. Open the **Staff** section from the sidebar menu. 2. Click on a staff member's name to open their profile. 3. Choose the right role from the dropdown. 4. Click **Save**. The staff member's permissions update instantly. For the full walkthrough, see [Assigning Roles to Staff](/docs/store/staff/assigning-role). ## Tips - Only give admin roles to trusted team members. - Review staff roles regularly, especially after promotions or team changes. - Remove staff promptly when they leave to keep your system secure. - If you are unsure, start with a lower role and adjust as needed. ## Best Practices - Review and update roles regularly to match your business needs. - Follow the principle of least privilege -- only give staff the access they need. - Document role definitions and permission settings for clarity. - Train staff on their roles so they understand their access levels. --- # How to Update a Role > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/roles-and-permission/updating-a-role # How to Update a Role You can update a role to change what team members assigned to it can do. This is useful after promotions, team changes, or as your business grows. ![The Edit Role form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Role Name and permission toggles with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/edit-role-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Store** from the menu. You will see a list of store settings. 3. Select **Roles & Permissions** to open the roles management page. 4. Find the role you want to update (e.g., "Cashier" or "Manager"). 5. Click the **Edit** button to open its details page. 6. Update the role: - Change the name or description if needed. See the [field explanations](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. - Adjust permissions by checking or unchecking actions. See the [full permissions list](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview#fuze-store-permissions) for all available options. 7. Click **Save**. The updated role takes effect right away for all staff assigned to it. ## Tips - Review roles regularly, especially after promotions or team changes. - Only give sensitive permissions (like deleting data or changing settings) to trusted team members. - Use clear names and descriptions so everyone knows what each role is for. - You can always edit roles again later if your needs change. ## Best Practices - Keep permissions simple -- most staff only need basic access. - Remove or update roles that are no longer needed to keep your system clean. - Communicate changes to your team so everyone knows their responsibilities. --- # Creating a Service > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/service/creating-a-service # Creating a Service Services represent non-physical offerings you provide, such as appointments, bookings, or service packages. Follow these steps to add a new service to your POS system. ![The Create Service form in the Fuze Store app showing Service Name, Price, Duration, Category, and Description fields](/docs/store/service/create-service-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Services.** Select **Services** from the menu list. 3. **Add a service.** Press the **Add Service** button at the top right of the service list page. 4. **Fill in the details.** Enter the information for your new service. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/service/overview#field-explanations) for what each field means. 5. **Save.** Click **Save**. Your new service appears instantly in your POS and menus. ## Tips - Group similar services under the same category for easier booking. - Use the duration and staff assignment fields to streamline scheduling. - Make sure each service name is unique and descriptive. - Add clear images to help staff and customers recognize services quickly. - Use modifiers or add-ons for upselling, such as extra time or premium options. - You can always edit or remove services later if your offerings change. ## Related Guides - [Service Overview](/docs/store/service/overview) - [How to Update a Service](/docs/store/service/updating-a-service) - [How to Delete a Service](/docs/store/service/deleting-a-service) --- # How to Delete a Service > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/service/deleting-a-service # How to Delete a Service When you no longer offer a service, you can remove it from your POS system. There are two ways to delete a service. ## Option 1: Delete from the Service List 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Services.** Select **Services** from the menu list. 3. **Find the service.** Locate the service you want to delete (for example, "Deep Tissue Massage"). 4. **Delete.** Click the **Delete** button (trash bin icon) in the action column. 5. **Confirm.** A confirmation message appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## Option 2: Delete from the Service Details 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Services.** Select **Services** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a service.** Click the service you want to delete. 4. **Delete.** Click the **Delete** button (trash bin icon) on the service details page. 5. **Confirm.** A confirmation message appears. Click **Yes** or **Confirm** to finish. ## What Happens When You Delete a Service - The service is removed from your POS and booking menus immediately. - Past sales and booking history remain in your records. The service is simply no longer available for new bookings. - Services linked as add-ons or included in packages lose that association. - You can always create a new service later if needed. ## Tips - Double-check before deleting. A deleted service cannot be restored. - If you just want to hide a service temporarily, consider disabling it instead of deleting it. - Keep your service list organized by removing offerings you no longer provide. - Review related packages or add-ons to make sure nothing is left broken. ## Related Guides - [Service Overview](/docs/store/service/overview) - [How to Add a Service](/docs/store/service/creating-a-service) - [How to Update a Service](/docs/store/service/updating-a-service) --- # Service Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/service/overview # Service Overview The **Service** feature lets you manage and sell non-physical offerings. These include appointments, bookings, and service packages. You get flexible tools for scheduling, customization, and tracking. ## What is a Service? A **service** is any non-tangible offering you provide. Services can be scheduled, assigned to staff, and customized with options or add-ons. **Examples:** - **Salon and Spa:** Haircut, Massage, Facial - **Automotive:** Car Wash, Oil Change, Detailing - **Professional:** Consulting Session, Training Package - **Events:** Birthday Party Package, Room Rental ## Key Benefits - **Centralized service catalog** -- Manage all your services and packages in one place. - **Flexible scheduling** -- Book appointments, manage calendars, and assign services to staff. - **Customizable options** -- Add modifiers or add-ons such as extra time or premium products. - **Bundling** -- Create service packages or combine multiple services for special offers. - **Staff assignment** -- Assign services to specific team members for better organization. - **Pricing control** -- Set prices, discounts, and taxes for each service. - **Sales insights** -- Track service performance and booking trends. ## How Services Compare to Products Services use the same form structure as products. They share the same tabs and most of the same fields. The key difference is that services replace the **Inventory** tab with an **Attribute** tab for duration settings. Like products, services support: - Categories for grouping - Modifiers for add-on options - Pricing with special price date ranges - Tax classification - Media images - Bundle items for service packages ## Form Structure When you create or edit a service, the form is organized into tabs: - **General** -- Name, SKU, Barcode, type, categories, and description. - **Attribute** -- Duration and duration period (replaces the Inventory tab used by products). - **Media** -- Upload service images. - **Modifiers** -- Attach add-on options to the service. - **Pricing** -- Base price, cost, and optional special pricing with date ranges. - **Tax** -- Tax class and tax rule. ## Field Explanations Below is a breakdown of every field available when creating or editing a service. | Section | Field | What it Means | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | General | **Enable** | Controls whether this service is active for sale. | Yes | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Availability** | Controls whether this service is available for purchase. | Yes | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Name** | The service name. | Yes | Any text | Thai Massage | | | **SKU** | A unique internal code for tracking. | No | Any text | massage-001 | | | **Barcode** | A scannable barcode value for the service. | No | Any text | 4901234567890 | | | **Type** | The type of service. | No | Simple, Bundle | Simple | | | **Categories** | The group this service belongs to. | No | Categories in the store | Massages | | | **Description** | Short details about the service. | No | Any text | Relaxing massage | | Attribute | **Duration** | How long the service takes. | Yes | Any number | 1 | | | **Duration Period** | Unit of measurement for duration. | Yes | Minute, Hour, Day, Week, Month, Year | Hour | | Bundle Items | **Bundle Items** | Combination of simple services for a package. | Yes (if Type is Bundle) | Services in the store | Thai Massage, Swedish Massage | | Modifier | **Modifiers** | Additional options for the service. | No | Modifiers in the store | Add On, Sizes | | Media | **Media** | Images related to the service. | No | Image files | /images/massage.png | | Pricing | **Price** (Inclusive VAT) | Base selling price. | Yes | Any number | 150 | | | **Cost** | Cost of the service. | No | Any number | 20 | | | **Enable Special Price** | Turns on special pricing. | No | Yes, No | Yes | | | **Special Price** | Discounted price for the service. | Yes (if Special Price is enabled) | Any number | 18 | | | **Special Price Start Date** | Start date for the special price. | No | Date | 2023-10-01 | | | **Special Price End Date** | End date for the special price. | No | Date | 2023-10-31 | | | **Special Price Present** | Makes the special price permanent. | No | Yes, No | No | | Tax | **Tax Class** | Tax classification for the service. | Yes | None, Taxable goods | Taxable Goods | | | **Tax** | Tax rule applied to the service. | Yes (if Tax Class is Taxable Goods) | Tax rules in the store | General Tax | ## Best Practices - Use clear, descriptive names and images for your services. - Group services logically for easier booking and management. - Keep schedules and staff assignments up to date. - Use modifiers and packages to offer more value. - Review prices and descriptions regularly for accuracy. ## Related Guides - [How to Add a Service](/docs/store/service/creating-a-service) - [How to Update a Service](/docs/store/service/updating-a-service) - [How to Delete a Service](/docs/store/service/deleting-a-service) --- # How to Update a Service > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/service/updating-a-service # How to Update a Service Keep your services up to date so your POS and booking menus always reflect your current offerings. You can change a service's name, price, duration, assigned staff, or any other detail at any time. ![The Edit Service form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Service Name, Price, and Duration fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/service/edit-service-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar hamburger menu to open navigation. 2. **Go to Services.** Select **Services** from the menu list. 3. **Choose a service.** Click the service you want to edit (for example, "Deep Tissue Massage"). 4. **Edit details.** Update any fields as needed. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/service/overview#field-explanations) for what each field means. 5. **Save.** Click **Save**. Your updates appear instantly in your POS and booking menus. ## Tips - Changes show up right away after you save. - Use clear names, images, and descriptions so staff and customers can find services easily. - Adjust duration, price, or assigned staff as your business needs change. - Leave optional fields blank if you are not sure what to enter. - Make sure each service name is unique and descriptive. - Use modifiers or add-ons to offer extra value, such as aromatherapy or extra time. - Group similar services under the same category for easier booking. ## Related Guides - [Service Overview](/docs/store/service/overview) - [How to Add a Service](/docs/store/service/creating-a-service) - [How to Delete a Service](/docs/store/service/deleting-a-service) --- # Session History Detail > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/session-history-detail # Session History Detail Every time you close a session, the full reconciliation snapshot is preserved as a **Session History** entry. The detail screen lets you open any past session — yesterday's close, last week's, or one from six months ago — and review the exact same numbers your cashier saw at the close. Useful for managers reviewing variance, accountants reconciling at month-end, and owners spotting patterns. ## Opening a session Sidebar → **Store Sessions** → **History** tab. The list is sorted newest-first. You can scroll through the list or filter by date range and staff member. If you got a variance escalation notification, tapping it deep-links straight into the detail screen. The same works for `/reports/cash-variance` drilldowns. ## What you'll see The detail screen shows the full reconciliation in three sections: ### Header - Cashier name. - Open and close timestamps (in your store's timezone). - Variance, with color-coded badge (green / orange / red based on your [thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds)). - Variance reason and explanation, if applicable. ### Reconciliation - Opening cash. - Cash sales (from the tender breakdown). - Total payouts and total payins. - Expected cash (computed). - Closing cash (declared). - Variance. ### Tender breakdown Sales totals grouped by payment method — cash, GCash, Maya, card, and any other tenders you accept. The cash row matches the **cash sales** line in the Reconciliation section. ### Orders - First and last order number — your receipt-sequence anchor for BIR / audit. - Total orders, total discounts, total service charge. - Total voids count and amount. ### Drawer movements Every Cash In and Cash Out logged during the session, with reason, amount, and timestamp. Useful for tracing a specific payout if there's a question. ### Optional denomination breakdown If the cashier entered a denomination breakdown at close (5×₱1000, 4×₱500, ...), it shows here. Helps spot one-bill miscounts vs. a structural variance. ## Print the Z-report The **Print Report** button at the top of the detail screen sends the Z-report to your default Bluetooth thermal printer. The Z-report layout matches what the cashier saw at close — same fields, same totals — just on paper. You can re-print the Z-report at any time. There's no audit log on re-prints because the Z-report itself is a snapshot, not an event. ## Share the Z-report The **Share Report** button packages the same fields as a markdown summary and opens your phone's native share sheet. Use it to: - Email it to your accountant. - Send it to head office on a multi-store rollup. - Save it as a file in your phone's storage for offline records. ## What you can't do here - **Edit the closed session.** Closed sessions are immutable — you can re-print and re-share, but you can't change the closing cash, variance reason, or any other field. - **Re-open a closed session.** A closed session is closed. If you genuinely closed the wrong session by mistake, contact your owner — there's a manual fix path. - **Add new drawer movements.** Movements must be logged during the active session. Discovering a missed Cash Out a day later is one of the reasons for using the variance reason / explanation fields at the next close. ## Permissions The detail screen needs the **Sessions** permission. Owner / org owner+admin always have access. The **Hub Admin** permission also grants visibility because variance escalation notifications go to that group. ## Related guides - [Using Store Sessions](/docs/store/using-store-session) - [Closing the Day with the Z-Report](/docs/store/closing-end-of-day) - [Cash Drawer Movements](/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements) - [Cash Variance Thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds) - [Roles and Permissions](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Setup Your Store Preferences > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/setup-your-store-preference # How to Set Up Your Store Preferences Your store preferences control how orders, printing, payments, and other features work in your POS. Adjusting these settings helps your business run the way you need it to. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Store Settings.** Select **Store** from the menu list. 3. **Go to Store Preferences.** Select **Store Preferences** in the menu. 4. **Update your preferences.** Change the fields that apply to your business. See the sections below for details. 5. **Save changes.** Click **Save**. Your updated preferences take effect immediately. ## Preference Sections ### Store #### Session | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable Store Session** | Requires starting a store session before using the POS terminal. | Yes, No | ### Connecting to a Fuze Store Hub Connecting this device to an on-premise **Fuze Store Hub** (for USB/Serial printers, kitchen displays, and customer screens) isn't configured on this Preferences screen. Pair the device from **Configurations → Integrations → Fuze Store Hub** instead. See [LAN Bridge Setup](/docs/app/printer/lan-bridge-setup) and [Pairing the Mobile App](/docs/hub/pairing-mobile-app). ### POS Settings These settings control the default behavior when you submit an order from the POS terminal. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Default Order State** | The default status assigned to a new order when you submit it. | New, Pending, On Hold, Processing, Ready, Ship, Completed | | **Default Payment Method** | The payment method pre-selected when you create an order. | Any active payment method in your store | ### POS Requirements These settings determine what information is required before you can submit an order. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Customer Required** | You must attach a customer to each order before submitting. | Yes, No | | **Service Mode Required** | You must select a service mode (e.g., Dine-in, Takeout) before submitting. | Yes, No | | **Staff Required** | You must assign a staff member to each order before submitting. | Yes, No | | **Auto-Assign Staff** | Automatically assigns the logged-in staff member to the order. | Yes, No | ### Order Tab Settings These settings control which order tabs appear on the POS screen. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Show All Orders** | Shows the "All" tab that displays every order regardless of status. | Yes, No | You can also toggle individual tabs on or off: **New**, **Pending**, **On Hold**, **Processing**, **Ready**, **Shipped**, **Completed**, and **Closed**. Only the tabs you enable will appear on the POS screen. ### Order Settings These settings control general order behavior. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Save Customer on Create** | Saves the customer information when you create an order. | Yes, No | | **New Order Threshold** | The time limit (in minutes) for editing a newly created order. Orders past this threshold are no longer considered "new." | Any number | | **Delivery Fee** | The default delivery fee amount applied to orders. | Any number | ### Order Slip These settings control order slip printing. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable Order Slip** | Turns on order slip printing for your store. | Yes, No | | **Print on Create** | Automatically prints the order slip when you create an order. | Yes, No | | **Print on Complete** | Automatically prints the order slip when you complete an order. | Yes, No | ### Order Receipt These settings control receipt printing. Your store must have a business permit set up to use receipts. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable Receipt** | Turns on receipt printing for your store. | Yes, No | | **Print on Complete** | Automatically prints the receipt when you complete an order. | Yes, No | ### Order Email Notifications These settings control email notifications sent to customers about their orders. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable Email** | Turns on email notifications for orders. | Yes, No | | **Send on Create** | Sends order details by email when you create an order. | Yes, No | | **Send on Complete** | Sends order details by email when you complete an order. | Yes, No | ### Service Fee These settings let you add a service fee to orders. | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable Service Fee** | Adds a service fee to orders. | Yes, No | | **Rate** | The service fee amount or percentage. | Any number | | **Rate Type** | Whether the service fee is a fixed amount or a percentage. | Fixed, Percentage | ### Stock | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Return Stock on Cancel/Void** | Automatically returns stock when you cancel, void, or close an order. | Yes, No | ### Tax | Setting | Description | Values | | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable Tax** | Turns on tax calculation for your store. | Yes, No | ## Tips - Save your preferences after every change. - Restrict access to this page using [roles and permissions](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) so only authorized staff can modify settings. - Revisit your preferences as your business grows or your workflow changes. --- # SMS Automation > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/sms/automation # SMS Automation Automation decides **which texts send on their own** and **when**. Instead of remembering to text every customer, you tell Fuze Store once: "Whenever an order is ready, text the customer," and it happens automatically. ## Where to find it From the sidebar, go to **Store Settings → SMS → Automation**. ## What you can control ## How automatic sending works Decide which categories may text customers automatically. Leave a category off and it stays manual-only. Within each allowed category, switch on the specific moments you care about. Keep it focused — every automatic text spends Wallet points. Add one or more reminder offsets, like 24 hours and 2 hours before the appointment. Fuze Store sends a reminder at each. Save your settings. From now on, qualifying events text customers without you lifting a finger. Automatic messages still respect everything else: a customer on your [suppression list](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list) is never texted, and you're never charged for a message that doesn't send. The same message is never sent twice for the same event. ## Manual sending still works Even with automation off for a category, your staff can still send those texts by hand from the relevant screen (for example, the Notify button on an order). Automation just removes the need to do it manually. ## Tips - Start small: enable "order ready" and one booking reminder, then expand. - Two reminders (a day before, an hour before) cut no-shows without feeling spammy. - Keep an eye on your Wallet — more automation means more points used. - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Message Templates](/docs/store/sms/message-templates) - [Suppression List](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list) --- # SMS Message History > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/sms/message-history # SMS Message History **Message history** is the record of every text your store has sent — what it was about, where it went (by the last four digits, for privacy), and whether it was delivered. It's your answer to "did that customer actually get the message?" ## Where to find it From the sidebar, go to **Store Settings → SMS → Message history**. Messages are listed newest first. You can filter by status or by message type. ## What each entry tells you ## Statuses explained - **Queued / Sent** — handed off to the network, on its way. - **Delivered** — the carrier confirmed the customer's phone received it. - **Failed** — the message couldn't be delivered. You are not charged for failures that happen before sending. - **Suppressed** — the message was intentionally skipped because the number is on your [suppression list](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list). ## Reconciliation At the top of the SMS hub you'll find a short **reconciliation** summary. It cross-checks your messages against your Wallet charges so the two always agree — every message that cost points has a matching charge, and every charge has a matching message. If anything ever looks off, this is where it shows up. For privacy and compliance, Fuze Store stores only the last four digits of each number, never the full mobile number. ## Tips - Filter by **Failed** to spot bad numbers worth cleaning up. - If a customer says they never got a text, check the status here first. - Use the reconciliation summary if your Wallet balance ever surprises you. - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Wallet Overview](/docs/store/wallet/overview) - [Suppression List](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list) --- # SMS Message Templates > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/sms/message-templates # SMS Message Templates A **template** is the wording Fuze Store uses for a particular kind of text. There's one template per situation — "order ready", "appointment reminder", "refund completed", and so on. You can rewrite any of them in your own voice, and use **placeholders** that get filled in with real details when the message is sent. ## Where to find templates From the sidebar, go to **Store Settings → SMS → Message templates**. Templates are grouped by what they're about: - **Order** messages (accepted, ready, completed…) - **Event** messages (booking confirmed, reminder…) - **Refund** messages (refund completed) - **Waiting list** messages (table ready) ## How to edit a template Go to **Store Settings → SMS → Message templates**. Tap the message you want to change, for example "Order ready". Edit the text in your own words. Use the placeholder helper to drop in details like the order number or customer name. Save your changes. The new wording is used the next time that kind of message is sent. ## Placeholders Placeholders are words wrapped in double curly braces, like `{{orderNumber}}`. When the message is sent, Fuze Store swaps each placeholder for the real value. For example: > Hi `{{customerName}}`, your order `{{orderNumber}}` is ready! might be sent as: > Hi Maria, your order #1042 is ready! The editor shows you which placeholders are available for each template. Common ones include the customer name, order or booking number, and your store name. If you type a placeholder name that doesn't exist (a typo like `{{ordernumbr}}`), it is **not** replaced — it goes out in the text exactly as typed. Always send a test to yourself after editing so you can spot mistakes before customers do. ## Tips - Keep messages short. Shorter texts cost fewer points and read better on a phone. - Lead with the useful part — customers skim. - Don't remove your store name; it tells customers who's texting. - Send a **test** from the SMS settings after any edit. - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Automation](/docs/store/sms/automation) - [Message History](/docs/store/sms/message-history) --- # SMS Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/sms/overview # SMS Overview The **SMS add-on** lets your store send text messages to customers — "Your order is ready", "Your table is booked for 7 PM", "Don't forget your appointment tomorrow". Texts reach customers even when they're not looking at email, which makes them great for time-sensitive updates. ## How it works, start to finish 1. You turn on the **SMS add-on** for your store. 2. You keep some credit in your [Wallet](/docs/store/wallet/overview) (1 point = 1 message segment). 3. When something happens — an order is ready, a booking is coming up — Fuze Store sends the matching text. 4. Each text sent subtracts points from your Wallet. **You only pay for messages that actually go out.** If a message can't be sent (for example, the customer opted out), you are not charged. There's no monthly message bundle to use up — it's pure pay-as-you-go from your Wallet. ## What sending costs Messages are billed in **segments**. A normal short text is one segment (1 point). A longer message is split into more segments and costs proportionally more. The app shows your balance as both points and an estimated number of messages, so you always know roughly how many texts you have left. To add credit, see [Topping Up Your Wallet](/docs/store/wallet/topping-up). ## What you can send You can text customers about: - **Orders** — accepted, ready, completed, and other order updates. - **Events** — appointment and reservation confirmations and reminders. - **Refunds** — confirmation that a refund was completed. - **Waiting list** — "Your table is ready" when you call them from the queue. Each store also has a free-form **Test send** so you can text your own phone and confirm everything works. ## The SMS hub Everything SMS lives under **Store Settings → SMS**. From the hub you reach: | Section | What it's for | | --- | --- | | **Wallet** | Your prepaid balance and top-ups. See [Wallet Overview](/docs/store/wallet/overview). | | **Settings** | Turn SMS on, set your sender name, alert email, and low-balance threshold. Includes a test-send. | | **Message templates** | Customize the exact wording of each message. See [Message Templates](/docs/store/sms/message-templates). | | **Automation** | Choose which messages send automatically, and set reminder timing. See [Automation](/docs/store/sms/automation). | | **Receipts** | Download receipts for your Wallet top-ups. | | **Suppression list** | Numbers that have opted out and won't be texted. See [Suppression List](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list). | | **Message history** | A record of every text and its delivery status. See [Message History](/docs/store/sms/message-history). | ## How your texts appear Your messages are sent from a recognizable sender name and lead with your store's name in brackets, like: > [Acme Cafe] Your order #1042 is ready for pickup. This way customers instantly know who the text is from. ## If a text doesn't arrive Most non-delivery comes down to one of these. Check them in order: - **The wallet is empty.** A send needs at least one point. Top up, then try again. See [Topping Up](/docs/store/wallet/topping-up). - **The number opted out.** If a customer is on your [suppression list](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list) (they replied STOP, or you added them), the message is skipped and your wallet is **not** charged. Remove them only if they ask to be re-subscribed. - **The message wasn't set to auto-send.** Automatic messages only go out for the triggers you turned on. Check [Automation](/docs/store/sms/automation). - **The customer has no mobile number on file.** Add one to their customer record. - **The number isn't a valid mobile number.** Landlines and malformed numbers are rejected before sending. Every send — delivered, queued, failed, or skipped — shows up in [Message History](/docs/store/sms/message-history) with its status, so start there to see what happened to a specific text. ## Before you start - The **SMS add-on** must be active on your store (it's included free during a trial). - Your [Wallet](/docs/store/wallet/overview) needs some points. - Customers must have a mobile number on file for them to be textable. Always respect customers who opt out. If someone replies **STOP**, they're added to your [suppression list](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list) automatically and won't be texted again. This keeps you compliant with messaging rules. - [Wallet Overview](/docs/store/wallet/overview) - [Message Templates](/docs/store/sms/message-templates) - [Automation](/docs/store/sms/automation) - [Suppression List](/docs/store/sms/suppression-list) - [Message History](/docs/store/sms/message-history) --- # SMS Suppression List > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/sms/suppression-list # SMS Suppression List The **suppression list** is the list of phone numbers that should **not** receive your texts. As long as a number is on this list, Fuze Store will never message it — automatically or manually. This protects your customers' wishes and keeps you on the right side of messaging rules. ## How numbers get on the list - **A customer replies STOP.** If someone texts back "STOP" to one of your messages, their number is added to the suppression list automatically. - **A message hard-bounces.** If a number is invalid or permanently undeliverable, it's suppressed so you don't keep paying to text a dead number. - **You add it yourself.** You can manually add a number a customer asked you to stop texting. ## Where to find it From the sidebar, go to **Store Settings → SMS → Suppression list**. The list shows each suppressed number with the date it was added. ## Adding a number manually Go to **Store Settings → SMS → Suppression list**. Open the add form. Type the customer's mobile number and save. From that moment, that number is excluded from all your texts. Respecting opt-outs isn't optional — it's the law in most places. Never try to work around the suppression list to keep texting someone who asked you to stop. ## Tips - If a customer asks in person to stop receiving texts, add them here right away. - A suppressed customer can still get email notifications and printed receipts — suppression only affects SMS. - Review the list occasionally to understand who's opting out and why. - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Automation](/docs/store/sms/automation) - [Message History](/docs/store/sms/message-history) --- # How to Assign a Role to Staff > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/assigning-role # How to Assign a Role to Staff Assigning the right role to each staff member controls what they can see and do in your POS system. Roles help keep your business secure and running smoothly. ![The Assign Role screen in the Fuze Store app showing a staff member's name and a role selection dropdown with available roles listed](/docs/store/staff/assign-role-form.png) ## How to Assign a Role You assign a role when adding or updating a staff member. Open the staff member's profile, choose the appropriate role from the dropdown, and save your changes. For the full walkthrough, see [How to Update Staff](/docs/store/staff/updating-a-staff). To learn more about what each role can do, see [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview). --- # How to Add Staff to Your Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/creating-a-staff # How to Add Staff to Your Store Adding staff lets you share the workload, assign roles, and keep your business running smoothly. Follow these steps to add a new team member. ![The Invite Staff form in the Fuze Store app showing Email Address, Full Name, and Role Assignment fields with a Send Invitation button](/docs/store/staff/create-staff-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Staff** from the menu. You will see all your current team members here. 3. Click the **Add Staff** button. 4. Enter the staff member's information. See the [field explanations](/docs/store/staff/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 5. Choose the right role for the staff member (e.g., cashier, manager, admin) to control what they can access. 6. Click **Save**. The new staff member will appear in your staff list right away. 7. If you fill in the email field, the staff member will receive an email notification to confirm their Fuze Store account for this store. **Important:** Staff who are not synced to a Fuze Store account will not be able to log in. If you want staff to log in, make sure to fill in their email address. They will receive an email to confirm their account. ## Field Explanations | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **First Name** | The staff member's first name | Yes | Alex | | **Last Name** | The staff member's last name | Yes | Cruz | | **Role** | Their role in your store (cashier, manager, etc.) | Yes | Cashier | | **Email** | For login and communication | Yes | alex@email.com | | **Phone** | For quick contact | | 0917 987 6543 | | **Notes** | Any extra info (shift, skills, etc.) | | Prefers morning | ## Tips - Assign clear roles so everyone knows their responsibilities. - Use the **Notes** field for shift preferences or special skills. - You can always edit or remove staff later if your team changes. - Keep staff info up to date for smooth scheduling and communication. ## Best Practices - Only give admin roles to trusted team members. - Remove staff promptly when they leave to keep your system secure. - Double-check email addresses for login access. - Encourage staff to use their real names for easy identification. ## Related Guides - [How to Update Staff](/docs/store/staff/updating-a-staff) - [How to Remove Staff](/docs/store/staff/deleting-staff) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) --- # How to Remove Staff from Your Store > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/deleting-staff # How to Remove Staff from Your Store When a staff member leaves or you want to clean up your team list, you can remove them from your POS system. Follow these steps. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Staff** from the menu. You will see all your current team members here. 3. Use the search bar or scroll to find the staff member you want to remove. 4. Click on their name to open their details page. 5. Click the **Remove** or **Delete** button on the page. 6. Confirm by clicking **Yes** or **Confirm**. The staff member is permanently removed. ## Tips - Double-check before removing -- a deleted staff member can no longer access your system. - Only remove staff who no longer work with you or need access. - If you are unsure, consider editing their info or changing their role instead. - You can always add a staff member again later if needed. ## Best Practices - Remove staff promptly when they leave to keep your system secure. - Only give admin roles to trusted team members. - Keep your staff list clean for easier scheduling and management. ## Related Guides - [How to Add Staff](/docs/store/staff/creating-a-staff) - [How to Update Staff](/docs/store/staff/updating-a-staff) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) --- # How to Manage a Staff Schedule > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/managing-staff-schedule # How to Manage a Staff Schedule Setting up staff schedules is what makes the appointment booking system work. The schedule tells Fuze Store who can take a booking, on which days, and during which hours. ![The Staff Schedule management screen in the Fuze Store app showing a weekly calendar grid with shift assignments for each staff member](/docs/store/staff/manage-schedule-form.png) > **Heads up**: Staff schedules require the **Events (Advanced)** feature on your subscription, and the staff member managing schedules must have the **Event Modify** permission. ## Set the Weekly Schedule The weekly schedule is the recurring pattern Mon-Sun. Use it for the staff member's normal working week. 1. Open the **sidebar menu** and select **Staff**. 2. Tap a staff member to open their profile. 3. Open the **Schedules** tab. 4. In the **Weekly Schedule** card, set the **Start** and **End** time for each day they work. 5. To mark a day off, leave it as **Unavailable**. 6. Optional: tap **Copy to weekdays** after setting Monday's hours to copy them to Tue–Fri. 7. Tap **Save**. Saved hours apply to every future week until you change them. ## Add a One-Off Override Use overrides for shift swaps, holidays, sick days, or special hours that don't fit the weekly pattern. 1. From the same **Schedules** screen, scroll to the **Override Calendar**. 2. Tap the date you want to change. 3. Either: - Mark the staff member as **Unavailable** for that day, or - Enter a different **Start** and **End** time for that day. 4. Optional: add a **Reason** (e.g. "Sick", "Trade with Sam", "Holiday hours"). 5. Tap **Save**. Overrides win over the weekly schedule for that exact date. The day's dot on the calendar tells you an override exists. ## How Schedules Drive Booking When a cashier creates an appointment: - The staff picker disables anyone who is **off schedule** for the chosen day. - The picker disables anyone with a **conflict** (an existing booking that overlaps the chosen time, including the service's buffer before/after). - If a staff member has **no weekly row and no override** for the day, they are treated as **unavailable**. Always set up at least one weekly row. For more on what cashiers see in the picker, read [Booking Staff Availability](/docs/store/pos/event/booking-staff-availability). ## Tips - Set up the weekly schedule first. Use overrides only for one-off changes. - Removing a weekly row is the same as marking the day **Unavailable** — both stop bookings on that day. - Update overrides as soon as plans change so your schedule stays accurate. - If two booking conflicts are saved at the same time, only the first wins. Refresh and try again. ## Related Guides - [Booking Staff Availability](/docs/store/pos/event/booking-staff-availability) - [Creating an Event](/docs/store/pos/event/creating-an-event) - [Assigning a Role](/docs/store/staff/assigning-role) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Staff Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/overview # Staff Overview Your staff are the heart of your business. This guide explains how to add, manage, and organize your team so everyone has the tools they need. ## Why Add Staff to Your Store? - **Assign roles** -- Give each team member the right access level (cashier, manager, or admin). - **Track performance** -- See who is making sales, handling orders, or helping customers. - **Improve security** -- Limit sensitive actions to trusted staff only. - **Smooth operations** -- Make shift changes, permissions, and communication easy. ## What You Can Do - **Add new staff** -- Quickly add team members as your business grows. - **Edit staff info** -- Update names, roles, or contact details anytime. - **Manage schedules** -- Set weekly working hours and one-off overrides so the booking system knows when each staff member is available. Requires the **Events (Advanced)** feature. - **Remove staff** -- Remove staff who no longer work with you. - **View your staff list** -- See all team members in one place with search and filters. ## Field Explanations | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Enable** | Whether the staff member is active and can access the store. The store owner is always enabled and cannot be deactivated. | Yes | Yes | | **First Name** | The staff member's first name | Yes | Maria | | **Last Name** | The staff member's last name | Yes | Santos | | **Email** | Email address for login and communication | | maria@email.com | | **Role** | The staff member's role (cashier, manager, admin, etc.). The store owner's role cannot be changed. | Yes | Cashier | You only need a name and role to get started. More details help you manage your team better. ## Tips - Assign clear roles so everyone knows their responsibilities. - Keep staff info up to date for smooth scheduling and communication. - Use notes for special instructions or preferences. - Remove staff promptly when they leave to keep your system secure. ## Related Guides - [How to Add Staff](/docs/store/staff/creating-a-staff) - [How to Update Staff](/docs/store/staff/updating-a-staff) - [How to Manage a Staff Schedule](/docs/store/staff/managing-staff-schedule) - [How to Remove Staff](/docs/store/staff/deleting-staff) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # How to Resend Staff Email Confirmation > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/resending-email-confirmation # How to Resend Staff Email Confirmation Sometimes a staff member might miss their invitation email or need a new confirmation link. You can resend the email confirmation at any time. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Staff** from the menu. You will see all your current team members here. 3. Use the filter or scroll to find the staff member who needs a new confirmation. 4. Click on their name to open their details page. 5. Tap the **Resend Invitation** quick action. It appears only while the staff member is still pending (not yet confirmed); once they accept, the option disappears. 6. The staff member will receive a new email with instructions to confirm their account and sync it with your store. The new link replaces any earlier one and is valid for 24 hours. ## Tips - Remind staff to check their spam or promotions folder if they do not see the email. - Make sure the email address is correct before resending. - If the staff member still does not receive the email, try updating their email address and resending. - You can resend the confirmation as many times as needed. ## Best Practices - Double-check email addresses for typos to avoid delivery issues. - Encourage staff to use a work email for easier communication. - Let staff know to look for an email from Fuze Store. - If a staff member is having trouble, walk them through the process in person. ## Related Guides - [How to Add Staff](/docs/store/staff/creating-a-staff) - [How to Update Staff](/docs/store/staff/updating-a-staff) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) --- # How to Update Staff Information > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff/updating-a-staff # How to Update Staff Information Keeping staff details up to date ensures everyone has the right access and information. Follow these steps to update a staff member's profile. ![The Edit Staff form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Full Name, Email, and Role fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/staff/edit-staff-form.png) The store owner's account can be updated (name, email, verification status), but the owner cannot be disabled and their role cannot be changed. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the sidebar menu. 2. Select **Staff** from the menu. You will see all your current team members here. 3. Use the search bar or scroll to find the staff member you want to update. 4. Click on their name to open their profile. 5. Change any details you need -- name, role, or email. See the [field explanations](/docs/store/staff/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 6. Click **Save**. The updated information is stored instantly and used for scheduling, permissions, and communication. 7. If the email field is filled, the staff member can receive an email notification to sync their Fuze Store account. ## Tips - Update staff info whenever someone changes their contact details, role, or responsibilities. - Use the **Notes** field for shift preferences, special skills, or important reminders. - Keep roles and contact info current for better scheduling and security. - You can always edit or remove staff later if your team changes. ## Best Practices - Double-check spelling and email addresses to avoid mistakes. - Only give admin roles to trusted team members. - Remove staff promptly when they leave to keep your system secure. - Encourage staff to use their real names for easy identification. ## Related Guides - [How to Add Staff](/docs/store/staff/creating-a-staff) - [How to Remove Staff](/docs/store/staff/deleting-staff) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) --- # Activity Log and Settings > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings # Activity Log and Settings Staff Operations keeps a record of every gated action and gives you settings to tune how strict the shift rules are. Managers use the log for accountability and loss prevention, and the settings to match the way your store runs. ## Activity log Every gated action is written to an append-only audit log. That includes: - Sign-ins and staff switches. - Handovers. - Voids. - Approvals. - Terminal changes. You can filter the log by type, staff member, and date. Because it is append-only, entries cannot be edited or deleted, so it stays a trustworthy record. ## Settings You configure Staff Operations under **Preferences** then **Store** then **Staff Operations**. ### Require registered terminal Blocks taking orders on a device until it has been paired as a terminal. Turn this on when you want every sale to come from a known device. See [Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals). ### Terminal auto lock Locks a registered terminal for PIN re-entry after it has been left idle in the background for the duration you set, in seconds. This only affects registered terminals, so a personal device that was never paired is never auto-locked. ### Require open session for POS Found under the session settings, this requires a cashier to start a cash session before they can take orders. Use it when you reconcile the till every shift. ### Approval policies You choose which actions need approval and the thresholds that trigger them. This is what makes a manager's PIN required for voids, refunds, or large stock adjustments. See [Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals). You can enable Staff Operations and leave most gates off, then turn on require-terminal, auto-lock, and approval thresholds as your team grows comfortable with the flow. ## Related guides - [Staff Operations Overview](/docs/store/staff-operations/overview) - [Staff PINs](/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials) - [Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals) - [Switching staff](/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff) - [Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Manager Approvals > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals # Manager Approvals Some actions need a manager's OK. When a cashier who lacks approve permission tries one, the app raises an approval request. A manager approves it in place by entering their PIN. The cashier stays signed in the whole time. ## What needs approval Approvals are wired for: - **Voiding order items.** - **Placing purchase orders and large stock adjustments** -- when the Inventory add-on is active. Refund overrides use the same approval idea. Which actions need approval, and the thresholds that trigger them, are configurable per store. ## Approve an action When an approval is requested, a manager enters their PIN to clear it. Pending requests also appear in a **Pending Approvals** queue, so a manager can clear them from anywhere -- not only on the device that raised them. The cashier selects **Void**, picks the items to void, and chooses a reason. Because the cashier lacks approve permission, the app raises an approval request instead of completing the void. A manager enters their PIN, in place on the same screen or from the Pending Approvals queue. The void is carried out and recorded, and the cashier continues working. ## Important rules - **Approvals expire** after a couple of minutes if no one acts on them. The cashier can start the request again if it lapses. - **Separation of duties.** Some actions, such as refunds and purchase order placement, require the approver to be a different person than the requester. A cashier cannot approve their own request in those cases. The point of in-place approval is that the active operator stays signed in. The manager only enters their PIN to authorize the one action, then control returns to the cashier. ## Related guides - [Staff Operations Overview](/docs/store/staff-operations/overview) - [Staff PINs](/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials) - [Switching staff](/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff) - [Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals) - [Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Staff Operations Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff-operations/overview # Staff Operations Overview Staff Operations turns the basic staff PIN into a complete shift platform. It gives your shared registers PIN sign-in, per-operator sessions, manager approvals, an activity audit log, terminal registration, and terminal auto-lock. It is built for shops where several cashiers share the same register across shifts. ## Who it's for Staff Operations is most useful when: - Multiple cashiers take turns on the same iPad or web register. - You run shifts and want each sale tied to whoever was signed in. - You want managers to approve sensitive actions without taking over the till. - You need a clear record of who did what, for accountability and loss prevention. If a single owner runs a single device, you may not need it. The add-on shines on shared hardware. ## What's included Each piece has its own guide: - **[Staff PINs](/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials)** -- the numeric code each person uses to sign in and to approve actions. - **[Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals)** -- register your shared devices so orders are attributed to the active operator. - **[Switching staff](/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff)** -- open and hand over shift sessions at a shared register. - **[Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals)** -- have a manager approve gated actions in place by PIN. - **[Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings)** -- review the audit trail and configure the rules. ## Before you start Staff Operations is a paid per-store add-on. You can use it on any paid plan with the add-on enabled, and it is included free during a free trial. For cashier-versus-manager access to actually differ, the **Roles & Permissions** add-on should be active. Without it, every staff member gets full access and approvals lose their meaning. Staff Operations is separate from, but complements, your Staff & Roles setup. You still add team members and assign roles the normal way. Staff Operations adds the shift, terminal, and approval layer on top. ## Related guides - [Staff PINs](/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials) - [Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals) - [Switching staff](/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff) - [Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals) - [Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Pairing Terminals > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals # Pairing Terminals A terminal is a registered device, such as an iPad or a web register. Pairing a device makes it a terminal, so the orders it takes are attributed to whoever is signed in on it. Each store can have many terminals. ## How pairing works Pairing uses a short code, the same pattern as plugging in a new card reader. A manager generates the code, then anyone signed in on the new device enters it to register that device. The code is the authorization. No extra permission is needed to claim it -- holding the code is enough. Open the **Terminal** hub and choose to add a terminal. Enter the name you want the new device to have, then generate an 8-character pairing code. The code is shown once and is valid for about 15 minutes. On the device you want to register, make sure someone is signed in, open the terminal screen, and enter the pairing code. The device registers under the name you set. Back in the terminal registry, the new device appears with an online status. Online or offline reflects recent activity. ## Managing terminals From the terminal registry you can: - **Rename** a terminal so it's easy to tell devices apart. - **Revoke** a terminal. Revoking unbinds the device. It must be re-registered before it can take orders again. ## Require a registered terminal You can turn on a store setting that blocks taking orders on an unregistered device. When it's on, a device must be paired before it can ring up a sale. See [Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings) for how to enable it. A terminal's registration is bound to its Device ID, found under Settings then Device. Reinstalling the app or regenerating the Device ID breaks the binding, and you will need to pair the device again. ## Related guides - [Staff Operations Overview](/docs/store/staff-operations/overview) - [Switching staff](/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff) - [Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals) - [Staff PINs](/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials) - [Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Staff PINs > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials # Staff PINs Each staff member has a numeric PIN. They use it to sign in at a shared terminal and to approve actions when they are a manager. The PIN is personal -- it identifies who is working and who authorized what. ## PIN rules - The PIN is 4 to 6 digits. - It must be numeric only. - After 5 wrong attempts in a row, the PIN locks for about 5 minutes. The lockout protects against someone guessing a PIN. It clears automatically once the wait passes. ## Set or change your own PIN You manage your own PIN from your profile, in the **Staff PIN** card. Changing it requires your current PIN. Go to your own staff profile and find the **Staff PIN** card. If you already have a PIN, enter it to confirm it's you. If you have no PIN yet, you skip straight to the next step. Type a new PIN that follows the rules above. Re-type the same PIN to confirm. Save, and your new PIN is active right away. You can also remove your own PIN from the same card. Removing it means you can no longer sign in with a PIN until a new one is set. ## Reset a staff member's PIN (manager) An owner or manager can set or reset any staff member's PIN. You do not need to know their current PIN. Go to the staff list and open the person whose PIN you want to reset. Open the **Staff PIN** card on their profile. Enter a new PIN that follows the rules and save. Share it with the staff member so they can sign in. You can also remove a staff member's PIN from here. Once removed, that person cannot sign in with a PIN until a new one is set. A staff member changing their own PIN must enter their current PIN. A manager resetting someone else's PIN does not -- the manager's own authority is enough. ## Related guides - [Staff Operations Overview](/docs/store/staff-operations/overview) - [Switching staff](/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff) - [Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals) - [Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals) - [Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Switching Staff > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/staff-operations/switching-staff # Switching Staff On a shared register, **Switch Staff** lets one person hand off to the next without anyone logging out of the account. The PIN is the authorization, so any signed-in staff member can open the switch and pass the till along. ## Switch to a new operator In the POS side menu, choose **Switch Staff**. The operator roster appears. Select the staff member who is taking over. The new operator enters their PIN. They become the active operator on this terminal. Switching opens a session for the new operator and automatically closes the previous operator's session on that terminal. Orders created from then on are attributed to the active operator's session. ## Hand over a shift When you finish a shift, you can hand it over from **Active Sessions**. Find your active session in the Active Sessions list. Choose to hand over. Add an optional note and declare your cash. This closes your session. Managers can view Active Sessions and force-close a session if needed -- for example, if a cashier left without handing over. On a shared register, reloading the app returns it to the account owner. This is expected. The next operator simply opens **Switch Staff** and signs in again with their PIN. ## Related guides - [Staff Operations Overview](/docs/store/staff-operations/overview) - [Staff PINs](/docs/store/staff-operations/pin-credentials) - [Pairing terminals](/docs/store/staff-operations/pairing-terminals) - [Manager approvals](/docs/store/staff-operations/manager-approvals) - [Activity log and settings](/docs/store/staff-operations/activity-and-settings) - [Staff Overview](/docs/store/staff/overview) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Store Setup Templates > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/store-setup-templates # Store Setup Templates When you create a store, Fuze Store offers **business-type templates** to give you a head start. Pick the one that matches your business and Fuze Store pre-fills a sensible starting setup, so you spend less time configuring and more time selling. Templates are completely **optional**. The default choice is **Custom**, which sets nothing up beyond the basics — perfect if you prefer to build your store your own way. ## What a template does Choosing a business-type template (like Restaurant, Cafe, Retail, Salon, or Car Wash) pre-configures a few things for you: | What it sets up | Details | | --- | --- | | **Store preferences** | Sensible defaults for how this kind of business operates (service modes, fees, customer/staff requirements, printing). | | **Common taxes** | Typical tax rows for your business type — for example a standard VAT rate. | | **Starter staff roles** | A small set of ready-made roles such as Manager, Cashier, Kitchen Staff, or Server, picked to fit the business. | It does **not** add products or payment methods — you'll add those yourself afterward. ## Choosing a template Begin the **Add Store** flow from your account or the app. The first step is the template picker. Select the template that best matches your business. The recommended, pre-selected default is **Custom**, which seeds nothing. Picking a niche is just a shortcut. If you chose a template, a short **Configuration** step shows the most important settings already filled in (such as tax and service/delivery fees, customer and staff requirements, and printing). Adjust anything, or accept the defaults. Complete the rest of the store details and save. Your store is created with the template's setup applied. A template is a starting point, never a cage. Everything it sets up can be changed afterward on your **Preferences** and **Settings** screens. You're never locked into a template's choices. ## Templates and your plan Template setup respects your subscription, so it never creates something you can't use yet: - On the **free Basic plan**, taxes are turned off — so a template skips seeding tax rows until you upgrade. Your settings are still applied. - Starter staff **roles** are only seeded when the Roles & Permissions add-on is available (it's included free during a trial). - The single owner role and your basic preferences are always created, on every plan. This means a brand-new free store won't be cluttered with settings for features it can't access yet — those appear when you enable the matching plan or add-on. ## Custom (the default) If you pick **Custom** (or simply leave the default selected), your store is created with only the essentials: the owner role and the standard default preferences. Nothing business-type-specific is added. This is the right choice if your business doesn't fit a template, or if you'd rather configure everything deliberately. ## Tips - If you're unsure, pick the closest template — you can change anything later, and it saves setup time. - After creating the store, visit **Preferences** to fine-tune anything the template set. - Templates don't add products — head to your catalog to add what you sell. - [Creating a Store](/docs/store/creating-a-store) - [Setting Up Store Preferences](/docs/store/setup-your-store-preference) - [Roles and Permissions Overview](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # How to Switch Between Stores > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/switching-stores # How to Switch Between Stores If you manage more than one store with Fuze Store POS, you can switch between them in just a few clicks. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Account.** Select **Account** from the menu list. 3. **Go to Stores.** Click **Stores** in the Account section. 4. **Select a store.** Click **Select Store** or the card for the store you want to switch to. 5. **Done.** You are redirected to the selected store's main page. You now see that store's products, staff, and settings. ## Tips - You can only see and manage stores you have access to. If a store is missing, check with your admin or manager. - Each store has its own products, staff, and settings. Make sure you are working in the right one. - Switching stores does not log you out of your account. - If you have many stores, use search or filters to find the right one quickly. ## Why Switch Stores - Manage multiple locations from a single account. - Keep sales, inventory, and staff separate for each store. - Move between stores without logging out or switching devices. ## Related Guides - [Getting Started Guide](/docs/getting-started) - [How to Create a Store](/docs/store/creating-a-store) - [How to Update Store Info](/docs/store/updating-store-info) --- # How to Attach Tax to Products or Services > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/tax/attaching-tax-to-item # How to Attach Tax to Products or Services After you create a tax, you need to attach it to the items that should charge it. The system then applies the tax automatically whenever those items are sold. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Products** or **Services**. 3. Click on the item you want to update. 4. Find the **Tax** section in the item details. 5. Choose the correct tax from the dropdown (for example, "VAT" or "Service Tax"). If you do not see the tax you need, create it first in [Store Settings > Taxes](/docs/store/tax/creating-a-tax). 6. Click **Save**. The selected tax will apply each time this item is sold. ## Tips - Confirm each item has the right tax, especially if you sell both taxable and non-taxable items. - You can assign different taxes to different products or services. - When you update a tax rate, all items using that tax update automatically. - Consult your accountant if you are unsure which tax applies. ## Best Practices - Review item tax assignments regularly, especially after price or menu changes. - Train staff to check tax settings when adding or editing products. - Remove unused or outdated taxes to keep your list clean. --- # How to Create a Tax > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/tax/creating-a-tax # How to Create a Tax Follow these steps to add a new tax rate to your store. ![The Create Tax form in the Fuze Store app showing Tax Name, Rate (percentage), and Tax Type fields](/docs/store/tax/create-tax-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Store Settings**. 3. Select **Taxes** to open the tax management page. 4. Click the **Add Tax** button. 5. Fill in the required fields. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/tax/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 6. Click **Save**. Your new tax will apply to future sales. ## Tips - Use clear, descriptive names so staff and customers understand the tax. - Verify your local tax rates before saving. - You can edit or remove any tax later if rates or laws change. - Ask your accountant if you are unsure which rate to use. ## Best Practices - Review your tax settings regularly, especially after menu or price changes. - Train staff on how taxes appear on receipts and how to handle tax-exempt sales. - Keep tax reports on file for easy access during audits. --- # How to Delete a Tax > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/tax/deleting-tax # How to Delete a Tax When a tax is no longer needed, you can remove it to keep your setup clean. There are two ways to delete a tax. ## Step-by-Step Guide ### Option 1: Delete from the Tax List 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Store Settings**. 3. Select **Taxes** to open the tax management page. 4. Find the tax you want to remove. 5. Click the **Delete** button next to it. 6. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ### Option 2: Delete from Within a Tax Record 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Store Settings**. 3. Select **Taxes** to open the tax management page. 4. Click on the tax you want to remove. 5. Click the **Delete** button on the detail page. 6. Confirm the deletion when prompted. ## What Happens When You Delete a Tax? - The tax is removed from your list and no longer applies to new sales. - Past sales and reports still show the tax as it was at the time of sale. - You can create a new tax later if your needs change. ## Tips - Deleted taxes cannot be restored. Double-check before confirming. - Only delete taxes you are certain you no longer need. - If you are unsure, consider editing the tax instead of deleting it. - Remove outdated taxes to keep your list manageable. ## Best Practices - Review your taxes regularly and remove any that are no longer in use. - Use clear names so staff can find and manage taxes easily. - Communicate tax changes to your team so everyone stays up to date. --- # Tax Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/tax/overview # Tax Overview Your POS system handles tax calculations automatically. Once you set up your tax rates, every sale applies the correct amount without any manual math. ## What Is a Tax? A **tax** is an extra charge added to the price of your products or services. Governments typically require it. Common examples include VAT, sales tax, and service tax. When you create a tax in Fuze Store, the system adds it to each qualifying sale for you. ## Why Set Up Taxes? - **Stay compliant** with local and national tax laws. - **Save time** by letting the system calculate amounts. - **Show clear receipts** so customers see exactly what they pay. - **Simplify reporting** when it is time to file or audit. ## How Taxes Work in Your POS - **Automatic calculation** -- taxes apply to sales based on your settings. - **Flexible setup** -- create different rates for different products, services, or locations. - **Tax exemptions** -- remove or adjust tax for specific customers or situations. - **Transparent receipts** -- every receipt breaks down the tax amount. ## Field Explanations When you create or edit a tax, the **Country** and **Currency** fields are auto-populated from your store settings. You do not need to enter them manually. You fill in the following fields: | Field | Description | Required | Possible Values | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Name** | The tax name shown on receipts | Yes | Any text | VAT | | **Rate** | The value added to the price | Yes | Any number | 12 | | **Rate Type** | How the tax is calculated | Yes | Fixed, Percentage | Percentage | | **Description** | A short explanation of the tax | No | Any text | Value Added Tax | ## Tips - Verify your local tax rates and rules before creating a tax. - Use clear names so your staff and customers understand each tax. - Consult your accountant or local tax office if you are unsure about rates. - You can update or remove taxes at any time as laws change. ## Best Practices - Review your tax settings regularly, especially after price changes. - Train staff on how taxes appear on receipts and how to handle exemptions. - Keep tax reports on file for easy access during audits. --- # Removing Tax When Ordering > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/tax/removing-tax-when-ordering # Removing Tax When Ordering Sometimes you need to remove tax from an order. This could be for a tax-exempt customer, a special promotion, or another valid reason. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Register** under the **POS** section. 3. Add items to the order as usual. 4. Remove the tax: - **Per item** -- Select the item you want to modify, find the tax section, and check **Exclude Tax** to remove tax for that item. - **Entire order** -- Go to **Summary**, click the **Menu** button below, and select **Remove Tax** to remove tax from the whole order. 5. Review the order summary to confirm the tax has been removed. 6. Complete the sale. The receipt will reflect the updated tax amount. ## Tips - Some stores require manager approval to remove tax. If you do not see the option, check with your admin. - Use the notes field to record why you removed tax (for example, a tax-exempt customer or charity event). - Only remove tax when your local laws or store policy allow it. - Always review the final total before completing the order. ## Best Practices - Train staff on when it is appropriate to remove tax. - Keep records of tax-exempt sales for reporting and compliance. - Review your tax settings regularly to match current regulations. --- # How to Update a Tax > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/tax/updating-a-tax # How to Update a Tax You can change a tax name, rate, or type at any time. Updates take effect immediately for all new sales. ![The Edit Tax form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Tax Name and Rate fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/tax/edit-tax-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu**. 2. Select **Store Settings**. 3. Select **Taxes** to open the tax management page. 4. Click on the tax you want to update. 5. Edit the fields you need to change. See [Field Explanations](/docs/store/tax/overview#field-explanations) for details on each field. 6. Click **Save**. Your changes apply to new sales right away. ## Tips - Double-check your changes before saving to avoid receipt errors. - Ask your accountant if you are unsure about a setting. - You can always edit or remove taxes later as rates or laws change. - Use clear names so staff and customers understand each tax. ## Best Practices - Review your tax settings regularly, especially after menu, price, or regulatory changes. - Train staff on how taxes appear on receipts and how to handle exemptions. - Keep a record of tax changes for reporting purposes. --- # Transaction Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/transaction/overview # Transaction Overview The **Transaction** feature tracks every payment, refund, and financial movement in your business. Whether you accept cash, process a card payment, or issue a refund, the Transactions section keeps a complete record. ## What is a Transaction? A **transaction** is any payment, refund, or adjustment made through your POS system. Transactions record how money moves in and out of your business. Each transaction tracks the amount, payment type, staff involved, and any related order or customer. **Real-life examples:** - **Food and Beverage** -- Accepting a card payment for a coffee, or giving a cash refund for a returned sandwich. - **Retail** -- Processing a gift card payment for a t-shirt, or handling a split payment (part cash, part card). - **Services** -- Charging for a massage session, or refunding a canceled appointment. ## Why Use the Transactions Feature - **All payments in one place** -- View every payment, refund, or adjustment in a single list. - **Flexible payment options** -- Accept cash, card, gift cards, or split payments. - **Easy refunds** -- Process refunds or adjust payments in a few clicks. - **Financial clarity** -- Always know where your money is going and coming from. - **Staff accountability** -- See which team member handled each transaction. - **Customer service** -- Quickly answer questions about payments or refunds. ## Field Explanations Here is what each field means on a transaction: | Field | Description | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Transaction ID** | Unique ID for the transaction | Yes | 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000 | | **Reference Number** | Unique code for referencing the transaction | Yes | TXN-20250710-001 | | **Order Number** | The linked order number | Yes (if applicable) | 100234 | | **Payment Method** | How the payment was made | Yes | Credit Card | | **Type** | Payment, Refund, Adjustment, etc. | Yes | Payment | | **Amount** | Total amount paid or refunded | Yes | $8.50 | | **Status** | Completed, Refunded, Pending, etc. | Yes | Completed | | **Transaction Date** | When the transaction was processed | Yes | 2025-07-10 14:32 | | **Staff** | Team member who processed the transaction | No | John Doe | | **Notes** | Special instructions or comments | No | Partial refund | ## Best Practices - Double-check transaction details before completing a payment or refund. - Use the notes field for special cases or important information. - Record split payments or unusual transactions clearly. - Review transactions regularly to spot trends and improve your business. - Use filters to find transactions quickly by date, customer, or payment method. --- # How to Transfer Store Ownership > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/transferring-ownership # How to Transfer Store Ownership You can transfer ownership of your store to another staff member. This is useful when selling your business, changing management, or assigning a new person to take full control. ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. Open the **sidebar menu** by clicking the hamburger icon. 2. Select **Configurations** from the menu. 3. Under **Store Management**, click **Transfer Ownership**. This option is only visible to the current owner. 4. Find and select the staff member you want to transfer ownership to. They must have an email address on their account. 5. Review the transfer details (current owner and new owner). 6. Click **Send Store Transfer**. The selected staff member receives an email with a link to accept. 7. Once they accept, they become the new owner with full control of the store. You become a regular staff member (unless the new owner removes you). The staff member can also **decline** the transfer from the same email. If they decline, nothing changes and you keep ownership. You can also cancel a pending transfer yourself any time before they respond. ## Why Transfer Ownership? - You are selling your business or passing it to a new manager. - You need to change who is responsible for store management. - You want the right person to have full control over settings, billing, and staff. ## Tips - Only transfer ownership to someone you trust. The new owner has full control over the store and its data. - Double-check the new owner's details before confirming. - You can still access the store as a staff member after the transfer, unless the new owner removes you. - Billing follows the new owner. When the transfer completes, you are billed for your share of the current cycle up to the transfer date, and the new owner is responsible for the store's charges after that. - The staff member must have their own Fuze Store account. If they have not accepted yet, the transfer link stays valid for 24 hours. ## Related Guides - [Getting Started Guide](/docs/getting-started) - [How to Create a Store](/docs/store/creating-a-store) - [How to Update Store Info](/docs/store/updating-store-info) --- # How to Update Your Store Information > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/updating-store-info # How to Update Your Store Information Keeping your store information current ensures your receipts, reports, and settings stay accurate. Follow these steps to update your store name and logo. ![The Store Information edit form in the Fuze Store app showing pre-filled Name, Contact Email, and Phone fields with a Save Changes button](/docs/store/edit-store-info-form.png) ## Step-by-Step Guide 1. **Open the menu.** Click the sidebar menu icon to open navigation. 2. **Go to Store Settings.** Select **Store** from the menu list. 3. **Go to General.** Select **General** in the menu. 4. **Update store information.** Change the fields you need. See the field explanations below. - **Store Name.** Enter your new store name. This appears on receipts and in the app. - **Logo.** Upload a new logo or image to personalize your store. 5. **Save changes.** Click **Save**. Your updated store info appears immediately in your POS and on receipts. ## Field Explanations | Field | What It Means | Required | Example | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Store Name** | The name displayed in the app and on receipts. | **Yes** | Fuze Coffee Shop | | **Logo** | Your store's logo or image. | No | (Upload an image) | ## Tips - Use a store name that is unique and easy to recognize. - Add a logo to make your store look professional and stand out. - You can update your store info at any time as your business evolves. --- # How to Use Store Sessions > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/using-store-session # How to Use Store Sessions A store session tracks every sale, payment, refund, and cash movement between opening and closing your store or register. Think of it as "opening" and "closing" your shift. Sessions help you see how much was sold, who was working, and whether your cash drawer matches your sales — the **end-of-day reconciliation** that catches counting mistakes, missed payouts, or genuine shortages before they become a habit. ## What a session captures A single session, from open to close, records: - **Opening cash** — what you declared was in the drawer at shift start. - **Tender breakdown** — every transaction, grouped by payment method (cash, GCash, Maya, card, ...). - **Discounts and service charges** on completed orders. - **Voided / cancelled orders** — count and total amount. - **Receipt range** — first and last order numbers issued during the shift, for invoice-sequence audit. - **Drawer movements** — every Cash In (top-up from the safe) and Cash Out (petty cash payout to a rider, supplier, etc.). - **Closing cash** — what you counted at the end. - **Cash variance** — the difference between what your drawer should hold and what's actually there. When you close, Fuze Store does the math: `expected_cash = opening_cash + cash_sales − total_payouts + total_payins`, and `cash_variance = closing_cash − expected_cash`. ## Step-by-step 1. Tap the **sidebar menu** (hamburger icon) and choose **Store Sessions**. 2. Tap **Start Session**. 3. Count the cash in your drawer and enter it as the **opening cash**. 4. Confirm. The session is now active and every order, transaction, and drawer movement will be linked to it automatically. Process orders, take payments, handle refunds. The session counts everything in the background. You can preview the running totals at any time from the **Reconciliation** card in the Sessions screen — it refreshes every 30 seconds. Whenever cash enters or leaves the drawer for a reason that isn't a sale or refund, log it: - **Cash In** — add a drawer top-up (manager float, change replenishment from the safe). - **Cash Out** — record petty cash you handed out (delivery rider, supply run, tip-out). If your store has the **Expenses** addon enabled, every Cash Out automatically routes through the existing Expense form so the disbursement is tracked once, not twice. Without Expenses, Cash Out goes straight into the session as a drawer movement. Either way, your end-of-day variance lines up. See [Cash Drawer Movements](/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements) for the full walkthrough. 1. Tap **End Session**. 2. Count the cash in the drawer one more time. 3. Enter the **closing cash**. Optionally enter the count by denomination (5×₱1000, 4×₱500, ...) — this helps spot miscounts. 4. Review the reconciliation summary: opening cash, cash sales, payouts, payins, expected cash, and your variance. 5. If the variance crosses your store's Review threshold (default ₱500), pick a **reason** (wrong change given, counterfeit bill, miscount, ...); past the Escalation threshold (default ₱5,000) a note for your manager is also required. 6. Tap **Close Session**. The closed session is now in your **Session History** list. If your variance is large enough to cross your store's escalation threshold (₱5,000 by default), your manager and the store owner are notified automatically. You can still close the session — Fuze Store never blocks the close, only flags it for review. Open the closed session from your **Session History** list. Two actions are available: - **Print Report** — sends a Z-report to your default Bluetooth thermal printer with the full reconciliation summary, tender breakdown, and order range. - **Share Report** — shares a markdown summary via your phone's share sheet (email, messaging, file save). The Z-report is BIR-friendly: it includes opening / closing receipt numbers, total voids, and tender breakdown so your accountant has everything in one place. ## Variance thresholds Three thresholds bracket your variance, and your owner can tune them per store: - **Minor** (default ₱50) — below this, no warning shows up. - **Review** (default ₱500) — orange banner on the closing screen; you have to pick a variance reason before closing. - **Escalation** (default ₱5,000) — red banner, mandatory note, and an automatic notification to the store owner / manager. To change these limits, the owner can adjust them under **Configurations → Preferences → Store → Cash Variance**. Closing is **never hard-blocked** by a high variance — these thresholds drive the warning level and the escalation notification, not the close itself. See [Cash Variance Thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds). ## Tips - **Always start a session at the beginning of a day or shift.** Otherwise the first hour of sales doesn't get bucketed and your reconciliation will be off. - **Count cash twice** at open and at close — once before counting denomination, once after. The denomination breakdown field exists exactly to catch that "I counted it twice and it still doesn't match" moment. - **Log payouts immediately**, not at the end of the shift. Memory is the leading cause of phantom variance. - **Use sessions to spot patterns.** A repeat ₱20 short on one cashier's shifts is a different problem from a ₱500 short once a month. - **Restrict who can start / end sessions** through [Roles and Permissions](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview). Only assign the Sessions permission to staff you trust to count cash. ## Related guides - [Closing the Day with the Z-Report](/docs/store/closing-end-of-day) - [Cash Drawer Movements (Cash In / Cash Out)](/docs/store/cash-drawer-movements) - [Cash Variance Thresholds](/docs/store/cash-variance-thresholds) - [Session History Detail](/docs/store/session-history-detail) - [Roles and Permissions](/docs/store/roles-and-permission/overview) --- # Managing the Queue > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/waiting-list/managing-queue # Managing the Queue The Waiting List screen gives you full control over your customer queue. You add parties, call them when ready, track wait times, and update their status as you serve them. ## Opening the Waiting List 1. Open the POS. 2. Select **Waiting List** from the menu. You see the current queue with each party's name, party size, position, wait time, and status. ## Adding a Party to the Queue 1. Press **New Waiting List**. 2. Fill in the fields below. 3. Press **Save**. The party appears at the end of the queue with the next position number. ### Queue Entry Fields There is no edit screen for a queue entry — only status actions. If you typed the mobile number wrong, **Cancel** the entry and add it again. ## Statuses and Actions Each entry has a status, and the actions available depend on it. Open a party to see its actions: - **Call** — marks the party **Called** and (with the SMS add-on configured) texts them that you are ready. You can call again to re-send. - **Skip** — passes over a party that is not ready. They keep their place in line. - **Wait** — returns a Called, Skipped, or Cancelled party to **Waiting**. A party you previously **Cancelled** rejoins at the **end** of the line; a Called or Skipped party keeps its place. - **Cancel** — removes a no-show from the queue. - **Done** — marks the party served and clears them from the active queue. ## Calling a Party (and SMS) When a spot opens, open the next party and press **Call**. The party moves to **Called**. If you have the **SMS add-on** active and waiting-list texts turned on, the customer automatically receives a message like *"Hi Maria, your table at your store is ready."* — as long as their entry has a valid mobile number. To enable the automatic text, turn on the **Waiting List** notification type and the **Waiting list called** automation in your SMS settings. See the [SMS Automation guide](/docs/store/sms/automation). Each text uses a small amount of your SMS wallet balance. If the add-on is off or no automation is set, **Call** still works — it just won't send a text. ## Returning a Party to the Queue If you called the wrong party, or a skipped customer is now ready: 1. Open the party. 2. Press **Wait**. They return to **Waiting**. A previously **Cancelled** party goes to the back of the line (they lost their turn); a **Called** or **Skipped** party keeps its original place. ## Marking a Party as Done When you finish serving a party: 1. Open the party. 2. Press **Done**. They leave the active queue. Completed parties stay visible for the rest of the day under the **Done** filter. ## Handling a No-Show If a party leaves before being served: 1. Open the party. 2. Press **Cancel**. They move to **Cancelled** and leave the active queue. If they come back, open them and press **Wait** to re-add them at the end of the line. ## Wait Times and the Customer Display Each entry shows two times: - **Wait time** — a live counter of how long the party has been waiting, since you added them. - **Estimated wait** — the minutes you entered, shown to set expectations. If you put the waiting list on a **customer-facing display**, guests see the queue with their position, party size, wait time, and estimated wait. As a party waits past its estimate, its row gradually changes color so staff can spot who has been waiting too long. ## Tips - **Add a mobile number** so you can text parties instead of shouting names. - **Set a realistic estimated wait** when you add a party — it sets expectations on the display. - **Update statuses promptly.** Call, Done, and Cancel right away to keep the queue and the display accurate. - **Use notes for special requests** so staff can prepare before the party is seated. ## Related Guides - [Waiting List Overview](/docs/store/waiting-list/overview) - [SMS Automation](/docs/store/sms/automation) - [Store Session Overview](/docs/store/using-store-session) --- # Waiting List Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/waiting-list/overview # Waiting List Overview When your store gets busy, a waiting list keeps things organized. The Waiting List feature lets you manage a customer queue, track positions and wait times, notify customers by SMS when their turn is up, and show the queue on a customer-facing display. ## What is the Waiting List? The Waiting List is a digital queue for your store. Instead of asking customers to wait without structure, you add them to a list. Each party gets a position in the queue. You serve them in order, call them when ready, and mark them as done. Your POS handles the queue automatically. You focus on serving customers. ## Who Should Use This Feature? The Waiting List works well for businesses that serve customers one at a time or in groups. Common use cases include: - **Restaurants** managing table availability - **Service businesses** like salons, barbershops, and spas - **Retail stores** with fitting rooms or personal shopping - **Any business** where customers need to wait for their turn ## Key Features - **Add parties quickly.** Enter a name and party size to join the queue. Add a mobile number to enable SMS, and an estimated wait to set expectations. - **Track positions and wait time.** See each party's place in line and how long they have been waiting at a glance. - **Call the next party.** When a spot opens, call them — and, with the SMS add-on set up, automatically text them that you are ready. - **Handle the unexpected.** Skip a party that stepped away, cancel a no-show, or return someone to the queue. - **Show a queue board.** Put the waiting list on a customer-facing display so guests can watch their position move up. ## How It Works 1. A customer arrives and asks to be added to the list. 2. You add their name and party size — and optionally a mobile number and estimated wait. 3. They get a queue position; the customer display shows their place in line. 4. When a spot opens, you **Call** them. If SMS is set up, they get a text automatically. 5. You mark them **Done** when served, or **Cancel** if they left. ## Benefits - **Reduce crowding.** Customers can wait nearby — even step away and return — instead of standing in line. - **Improve the experience.** Clear positions, live wait times, and an automatic "you're up" text make waiting less frustrating. - **Stay organized.** Never lose track of who is next. - **Save time.** Spend less time managing the line and more time serving. ## Related Guides - [Managing the Queue](/docs/store/waiting-list/managing-queue) - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Store Session Overview](/docs/store/using-store-session) --- # Wallet Overview > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/wallet/overview # Wallet Overview Your **Wallet** is a prepaid credit balance for your store. You add money to it ahead of time, and Fuze Store spends from it whenever you use a pay-as-you-go feature. Today, the first feature that spends your Wallet is **text messaging (SMS)** — sending a customer an order update or a booking reminder. Think of it like load on a prepaid phone: top it up, then use it. When it runs low, you top up again. The Wallet itself is **free** — there is no add-on or extra plan needed to have one. You only pay for what you actually use (for example, each text message you send). ## Points, in plain terms Your Wallet balance is measured in **points**, not pesos. The reason is simple and fair: - **1 point = 1 text message segment.** A short text is 1 segment, so it costs 1 point. A longer text may be split into 2 segments, so it costs 2 points. - When you top up, your money is converted into points at top-up time (for example, ₱1.00 buys 1 point). You always see how many points a top-up will add before you confirm. This way, your balance always tells you roughly **how many messages you can still send**, which is easier to reason about than a peso figure. ## Where the money comes from You add points by **topping up** — paying through a secure checkout page with your card or e-wallet. Every top-up generates a receipt you can download for your records (issued as an Acknowledgement Receipt until our BIR permit is granted). See [Topping Up Your Wallet](/docs/store/wallet/topping-up). ## Store wallet vs. organization wallet How your Wallet is funded depends on whether your store stands alone or belongs to an organization: - **Single store.** Your store has its own Wallet. You top it up and spend from it directly. - **Store in an organization (pooled).** Stores grouped under an organization share **one pooled Wallet** at the organization level. Top-ups happen at the organization, and every store spends from the shared pool. This lets a head office fund all branches in one place. See [Organization Wallet & SMS](/docs/account/organizations/sms-wallet). If your store is part of a pooled organization, the store's Wallet screen will show a balance but send you to the **organization** level to top up. That is expected — the pool is funded centrally. ## What you can see | Item | What it shows | | --- | --- | | **Balance** | Your current points, and roughly how many messages that covers. | | **Activity** | Every top-up and every charge, newest first, so you can trace where points went. | | **Receipts** | A downloadable receipt for each top-up. | | **Low-balance alert** | An optional email warning when your balance drops below a level you set. | ## Tips - Top up before a busy day so messages never stop mid-rush. - Set a low-balance alert email so you are warned before you run out. - Review your activity if a balance looks off — every change is listed. - [Topping Up Your Wallet](/docs/store/wallet/topping-up) - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Organization Wallet & SMS](/docs/account/organizations/sms-wallet) --- # Topping Up Your Wallet > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/store/wallet/topping-up # Topping Up Your Wallet Topping up adds points to your [Wallet](/docs/store/wallet/overview) so you can keep using pay-as-you-go features like text messaging. You pay with your card or e-wallet through a secure checkout page, and the points land in your balance once payment clears. ## How to top up From the sidebar, go to your store's **Wallet** (or **SMS** hub, which links to it). You'll see your current balance at the top. Tap the **Top up** button. A form opens where you choose how much to add. Pick one of the quick amounts or type your own. The form shows you exactly how many **points** the top-up will add and what your new balance will be before you commit. Confirm to open the secure checkout page. Choose your payment method there — card, GCash, Maya, and other options are offered on the checkout page itself. Finish paying on the checkout page. When it's done, you're returned to Fuze Store. Your points are added as soon as the payment is confirmed. This is usually instant, but can take a few moments. The balance and activity list refresh automatically. The payment is processed on the secure checkout page, not inside Fuze Store. Your full card details are never stored in the app. ## Receipts Every top-up creates a **receipt** for your records (useful for accounting and tax) — issued as an Acknowledgement Receipt until our BIR permit is granted. To get it: In your Wallet, open the **Receipts** list. Tap a receipt to **download** the PDF, or choose **email** to send a copy to yourself. Each receipt carries a unique number and the amount you paid. ## If a top-up doesn't show up - Give it a minute — confirmation can lag slightly behind the payment. - Reopen the Wallet screen to force a refresh. - Check the **Activity** list: a top-up in progress appears there. - If money left your account but points never arrived after a while, contact support with the receipt or payment reference. ## Tips - Top up a comfortable buffer before a busy day so you don't run out mid-service. - Keep your top-up receipts — they're your proof of purchase. - Set a low-balance alert in your SMS settings so you're warned early. - [Wallet Overview](/docs/store/wallet/overview) - [SMS Overview](/docs/store/sms/overview) - [Organization Wallet & SMS](/docs/account/organizations/sms-wallet) --- # What is Fuze Store POS? > Source: https://development.fuze-store.com/docs/what-is-fuze-store # What is Fuze Store POS? Fuze Store POS is a cloud-based Point of Sale system built for businesses of all sizes. It brings sales, inventory, staff, and customer management into one platform. Whether you run a cafe, retail shop, or service business, Fuze Store gives you everything you need to operate and grow. ## Key Features - **Dashboard** -- See your business performance, sales, and key metrics at a glance. - **POS Register** -- Ring up sales with support for discounts, refunds, and customer profiles. - **Orders** -- Manage orders, returns, and transactions with full tracking. - **Appointments and Reservations** -- Handle bookings for services or events. - **Product and Service Catalog** -- Organize items into categories with descriptions, images, and modifiers. - **Inventory Tracking** -- Monitor stock levels in real time and receive low-stock alerts. - **Customer Management** -- Build customer profiles, track purchase history, and offer loyalty programs. - **Staff Management** -- Add staff accounts, assign roles, and control permissions. - **Sales and Refunds** -- View order history and process refunds from one screen. - **Store Settings** -- Customize your address, taxes, payment methods, discounts, and social links. - **Reports and Analytics** -- Access sales reports, transaction history, and business insights. - **Import and Export** -- Move your data in or out for backup or migration. - **Gift Cards and Sessions** -- Sell gift cards and track POS sessions. - **Multi-Store Management** -- Run multiple stores from a single account. - **Device Compatibility** -- Works on smartphones, tablets, computers, and POS hardware. - **Cloud-Based and Secure** -- Access your POS from anywhere with an internet connection. ## Why Choose Fuze Store POS? - **Save time** by replacing manual record-keeping with automation. - **Make smarter decisions** using real-time reports and analytics. - **Stay secure** with role-based access control for your staff. - **Get started quickly** with a simple, intuitive interface. - **Work from anywhere** since everything is stored in the cloud. - **Use any device** -- smartphone, tablet, or computer. - **Start free** with no upfront costs on the free plan. - **Stay current** with regular feature updates and improvements. - **Leverage AI** with built-in tools that enhance your operations. - **Scale easily** from a single store to a growing chain. - **Customize** the system to fit your brand and business needs. ## What's Next? Now that you know what Fuze Store POS can do, take the next step: - [Getting Started Guide](/docs/getting-started) - [Create an Account](/docs/account/create-an-account) - [Create a Store](/docs/store/creating-a-store)